Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Understanding Power Quality Problems by Math.H.J.Bollen-ilovepdf-compressed PDF
Understanding Power Quality Problems by Math.H.J.Bollen-ilovepdf-compressed PDF
Understanding Power Quality Problems by Math.H.J.Bollen-ilovepdf-compressed PDF
QUALITY PROBLEMS
IEEE Press
445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331
Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331
Technical Reviewers
Mladen Kezunovic, Texas A & M University
Damir Novosel, ABB Power T&D Company, Inc., Raleigh, NC
Roger C. Dugan, Electrotck Concepts, Inc., Knoxville, TN
Mohamed E. El-Hawary, Dalhousie University, Halifax, Nova Scotia, Canada
Stephen Sebo, Ohio State University
Math H. J. Bollen
Chalmers University of Technology
Gothenburg, Sweden
IEEE.
PRESS
SERIES ~II
ONPOWER
ENGINEERING
+IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, lnc., NewYork
ffiWILEY-
~INTERSCIENCE
A JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.,PUBLICATION
e 2000 THE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL
th
AND ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERS, INC. 3 Park Avenue, 17 Floor, New York, NY 10016-5997
For genera) information on our other products and servicesplease contact our
CustomerCare Departmentwithin the u.s. at 877-762-2974,outside the U.S.
at 317-572-3993or fax 317-572-4002.
ISBN 0-7803-4713-7
PREFACE xiii
FTP SITE INFORMATION xv
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii
vii
viii Con ten ts
BIBLIOGRAPHY 465
INDEX 529
The aims of the electric power system can be summarized as "to transport electrical
energy from the generator units to the terminals of electrical equipment" and "to
maintain the voltage at the equipment terminals within certain limits." For decades
research and education have been concentrated on the first aim. Reliability and quality
of supply were rarely an issue, the argument being that the reliability was sooner too
high than too low. A change in attitude came about probably sometime in the early
1980s. Starting in industrial and commercial power systems and spreading to the public
supply, the power quality virus appeared. It became clear that equipment regularly
experienced spurious trips due to voltage disturbances, but also that equipment was
responsible for many voltage and current disturbances. A more customer-friendly defi-
nition of reliability was that the power supply turned out to be much less reliable than
always thought. Although the hectic years of power quality pioneering appear to be
over, the subject continues to attract lots of attention. This is certain to continue into
the future, as customers' demands have become an important issue in the deregulation
of the electricity industry.
This book concentrates on the power quality phenomena that primarily affect the
customer: interruptions and voltage sags. During an interruption the voltage is com-
pletely zero, which is probably the worst quality of supply one can consider. During a
voltage sag the voltage is not zero, but is still significantly less than during normal
operation. Voltage sags and interruptions account for the vast majority of unwanted
equipment trips.
The material contained in the forthcoming chapters was developed by the author
during a to-year period at four different universities: Eindhoven, Curacao, Manchester,
and Gothenburg. I Large parts of the material were originally used for postgraduate and
industrial lectures both "at home" and in various places around the world. The material
will certainly be used again for this purpose (by the author and hopefully also by
others).
xiii
xiv Preface
Math H. J. Bollen
Gothenburg, Sweden
FTP Site Information
Along with the publication of this book, an FTP site has been created containing
MATLAB® files for many figures in this book. The FTP site can be reached at
ftp.ieee.orgjupload/press/bollen.
xv
Acknowledgments
A book is rarely the product of only one person, and this book is absolutely no excep-
tion. Various people contributed to the final product, but first of all I would like to
thank my wife, Irene Gu, for encouraging me to start writing and for filling up my tea
cup every time I had another one of those "occasional but all too frequent crises."
For the knowledge described in this book lowe a lot to my teachers, my collea-
gues, and my students in Eindhoven, Curacao, Manchester, and Gothenburg and to my
colleagues and friends all over the world. A small number of them need to be especially
mentioned: Matthijs Weenink, Wit van den Heuvel, and Wim Kersten for teaching me
the profession; the two Larry's (Conrad and Morgan) for providing me with a contin-
uous stream of information on power quality; Wang Ping, Stefan Johansson, and the
anonymous reviewers for proofreading the manuscript. A final thank you goes to
everybody who provided data, figures, and permission to reproduce material from
other sources.
Math H. J. Bollen
Gothenburg, Sweden
xvii
Voor mijn ouders
Overview of Power Qual ity
and Power Qual ity Standards
Everybody does not agree with the use of the term powerquality, but they do agreet hat
it has becomeaveryimportantaspect of power delivery especially in the second half of
the 1990s.There is a lotof disagreementa boutwhat power quality actually incorpo-
rates; it looks as if everyone has her or his own
interpretation.In this chaptervarious
ideas will be summarized to clear up some of the confusion. However,author the
himself is part of the power quality world; thuspart of the confusion. After reading
this book the reader might want to go to the library and form his own picture. The
number of books onpower quality is still rather limited. The book "Electric Power
SystemsQuality" by Dugan et al. [75] gives a useful overviewof the various power
quality phenomenaand the recent developments in this field. There are two more books
with the term power quality in the title:"Electric Power QualityControl Techniques"
[76] and "Electric PowerQuality" [77]. But despite the general title, reference [76]
mainly concentrateson transientovervoltage and[77] mainly on harmonicdistortion.
But both books docontainsomeintroductorychapters on power quality. Also many
recent books on electric power systems containone or more general chapterson power
quality, for example,[114], [115], and [116]. Information on power qualitycannotbe
found only in books; a large numberof papers have been written on the subject; over-
view papers as well as technical papers aboutsmall detailsof power quality. The main
journals to look for technical papers are the IEEE Transactionson Industry
Applications, the IEEE Transactionson Power Delivery andlEE Proceedings-
Generation,Transmission,Distribution. Other technicaljournals in the power engi-
neering field alsocontainpapers of relevance. A journal specially dedicated to power
quality is Power Quality Assurance. Overview articles can be found in many different
journals;two early ones are[104] and [105].
Various sources use the term "power quality" with different meanings.Other
sources use similar but slightly different terminology like"quality of power supply"
or "voltage quality." What all these terms have in common that is they treat the
interaction between the utility and the customer, or in technical terms between the
power system and the load. Treatmentof this interaction is in itself not new. The
aim of the power system has always been to supply electrical energy to the customers.
1
2 ChapterI • Overview of PowerQuality and PowerQuality Standards
Therehave been(andwill be) a lot of argumentsaboutwhich term to use for theu tility-
customer (system-load) interactions. Most people use the term"power quality"
although this term is still prone to criticism. The main objection againstthe useof
the term isthat one cannottalk about the quality of a physicalquantity like power.
Despitethe objectionswe will use the term powerquality here, eventhoughit does not
give aperfectdescriptionof the phenomenon.But it has become a widely used term and
it is the best termavailableat themoment.Within the IEEE, the termpowerquality has
gained some officialstatus already, e.g., through the name of see22 (Standards
CoordinatingCommittee):"PowerQuality" [140]. But theinternationalstandardsset-
ting organizationin electrical engineering(the lEe) does not yet usethe term power
quality in any of its standarddocuments.Instead it uses the termelectromagnetic
compatibility, which is not the same aspower quality but there is astrong overlap
between the two terms. Below, numberof
a different terms will be discussed. As each
term has itslimitations the author feels that power quality remainsthe more general
term which covers all theotherterms. But, beforethat, it is worth to give the following
IEEE and lEe definitions.
Section 1.2 • PowerQuality, Voltage Quality 5
The classification of aphenomenonin one of these two types isn ot always unique. It
may dependon the kind of problemdue to thephenomenon.
240,.----.---...,----.-~---,---,
0.1
.~ 0.08
.g
g 0.06
~
or>
£ 0.04
0.02
Figure 1.2 Probabilitydensityfunct ion of the 220 225 230 235 240
Voltage in volts
voltage magnitudein Fig . 1.1.
8 Chapter I • Overview of PowerQuality and PowerQuality Standards
0.8
5
I:a
U')
0.6
.~
] 0.4
.s
£
0.2
220 225 230 235 240 Figure 1.3 Probability distribution function
Voltagein volts of the voltage magnitude in Fig. 1.1.
Two examplesof distored voltage are shown in Figs. 1.4and 1.5. The voltage
shownin Fig. 1.4containsmainly harmoniccomponentsof lower order(5,7,11,and 13
in this case). Thevoltageshownin Fig. 1.5containsmainly higher-frequencyharmonic
components.
Harmonicvoltagesand currentcan causea whole rangeof problems,with addi-
tional lossesand heating the main problem. The harmonicvoltage distortion is nor-
mally limited to a fewpercent(i.e., themagnitudeof the harmonicvoltagecomponents
Section 1.3 • Overview of PowerQuality Phenomena 11
400
300
200
rl
($ 100
>
.5
0 0
co
S
~ -100
-200
-300
400
300
200
~ 100
0
>
.S
0 0
r -100
~
-200
-300
-400
Figure 1.5 Exampleof distortedvoltage,with 0 5 10 15 20
higher-orderharmoniccomponents[211]. Time in milliseconds
150
100
en
e SO
~
cd
.5 0
=
~ -so
U
-100
50
• Ripple controlsignals: sinusoidal signals between 110 and 3000 Hz. These
signals are, from avoltage-quality point-of-view, similar to harmonic and
interharmonicvoltage components.
• Power-line-carriersignals: sinusoidal signals between 3 and 148.5 kHz. These
signals can be describedboth as high-frequencyvoltage noise (see below) and
as high-order(inter)harmonics.
• Mains markingsignals: superimposedshort time alterations (transients)at
selectedpoints of the voltage waveform.
400r---------,-----,------.--------,
300
200
ZJ
~ 100
.5 0
j
~ -100
-200
-300
-400
0 5 10 15 20
notching[211].
Figure 1.8 Example of voltage Timeinmilliseconds
14 ChapterI • Overview of PowerQuality and PowerQuality Standards
1.3.2 Events
1.5,----~--~-- -~-~--~-___,
0.5
5-
.5
~
~ - 0.5
~
-1
- 1.5
Figure 1.9 Example oftransientovervoltage
event: phase-to-groundvoltage due to fault I , , I
clearing in one of theother phases.( Data 20 30 40 60
obtained from (16].) Time in milliseconds
V, = iT V(t)dt (l.l)
140
120
100
~ 80
....0~
60 1.0-1.5
~
1.5-2.0
40
~~
2.0- 3.0 '-$'
20 'b"
.~
3.0-5.0 ~
~'I>
0
5.0-10.0
1.2r-- - - - - -- - - - -- - - - -,
t:
o
.~
E 0.8t--- --
en
~ 0.6
..
:E
.0
0.4
J: 0.2
between events has not been determ ined, but onlynumberofthe events per year with
different characteristics. Notethat the average time between events is the reciprocalof
the number of events per year. This is the normal situation; the actual distribution
function is rarelydetermined in powerquality or reliability surveys[107].
Figures 1.11 through 1.14 givestatistical informationaboutthe characteristicsof
the events. Figure 1.11 gives theprobability distribution function of the magnitude of
the event. We see t hat almost 80% of the events have a magnitudelessthan 1.5 pu .
Figure 1.12 gives thecorrespond ing densityfunction. By using alogarithmic scale the
numberof events in the high-magn itude rangebetter is visible. Figure 1.13 gives the
probability distribution function of the Vt-integral; Fig. 1.14 theprobability density
function.
1.2r-- - - -- - - - - - - - - ---,
o
.u;
t: 0.1
~
g
~ 0.01
.0
2
0..
1.2.-- -- - - - -- - - - - -- ---,
;".s
! 0.8+-- - - - - - --
'"
~ 0.6
~ 0.4+-- - -- - - --
£ 0.2
0.8 . - - -- - - - -- -- -- -- ----,
.~ 0.6+ - -- - - - -- -
~
~ 0.4+---- - - -- -
J
..: 0.2
• automaticswitching;
• manualswitching;
• repair or replacementof the faultedcomponent.
18 Cha pter I • Overviewof PowerQuality and Power QualityStandards
Various terminologies are in use to distinguish between these. The IEC uses the
term long interruptionsfor interruptions longer than 3 minutes and the term s hort
interruptions for interruptions lasting up to 3 minutes. Within the IEEE the terms
momentary,temporary,and sustained are used, but different documents give different
duration values. The various definitions will be discussedChapter3.
in
2. Undervoltages.Undervoltages of variousduration are known under different
names.Short-durationundervoltagesare called"voltage sags" or"voltagedips." The
latter term is preferred by thelEe. Within the IEEE and in manyjournal and con-
ference papers on power qua lity, the term voltage sag is used. Long-durationunder-
voltage is normall y simply referred to as " undervoltage."
A voltage sag is areductionin the supply voltagemagnitudefollowed by a voltage
recovery after ashort period of time. When a voltage magnitudereduct ion of finite
duration can actually be called a voltage sag (or voltage dip in the IEC terminology)
remains apoint of debate, even though the official definitions are cleara bout it.
Accord ing to the IEC, a supply voltage dip is a sudden reduction in the supply voltage
to a value between 90% and I % of the declared voltage, followed by a recovery
between 10ms and I minuteater. l For the IEEE a voltagedrop is only a sag if the
during -sag voltage is between 10% and 90% of the nominal voltage.
Voltage sags are mostly caused short-circuitfaults
by in the system and bystart-
ing of large motors. Voltage sags will be discussed in detail Chapters4,
in 5, and 6.
3. Voltage magnitude steps. Load switching, transformer tap-changers,and
switching actions in the system (e.g.,capacitorbanks) can lead to a sudden change in
the voltage magnitude. Such a voltagemagnitude step is called a " rapid voltage
change" [EN 50160] or "voltagechange" [IEEE Std.1l59] . Normally both voltage
before and after the step are in the normal operatingrange (typically 90% to 110%
of the nominal voltage).
An example of voltagemagnitudesteps is shown in Fig. 1.15. The figure shows a
2.5hour recording of the voltage in a 10kVistribution
d system. The steps in the voltage
magnitudeare due to theoperationof transformer tap-changersat various voltage
levels.
4. Overvoltages. Just like with
undervoltage, overvoltage events are given different
names based on their duration. Overvoltages of veryshort duration, and high magni-
tude, are called " transientovervoltages ," "voltage spikes," or sometimes "voltage
surges." The atter
l term is ratherconfusingas it is sometimes used to refer to over-
voltages with adurationbetweenabout 1 cycle and I minute . Thelatter event is more
correctly called"voltage swell" or "temporarypower frequency overvoltage ." Longer
1.05
1.04
:l 1.03
0.
.S 1.02
.,
OIl
~ 1.01
~
0.99
Figure 1.15 Example of voltagemagnitude
0.98 steps due to tran sformetap-changer
r
5:00:00 5:30:00 6:00:00 6:30:00 7:00:00 7:30:00
operation, recorded in a10kV distribution
Clock time (HH:MM:SS)
system insouthernSweden.
Section 1.3 • Overviewof PowerQuality Phenomena 19
(1.2)
Very Very
short Shortovervoltage Longovervoltage long
overvoltage overvoltage
110%
Normaloperatingvoltage
Very Very
short Shortundervoltage Longundervoltage long
undervoltage undervoltage
}-10%
Veryshort int. Shortinterruption Longinterruption Verylong int.
0
=00
oS
.~] Temporaryovervoltage (1)Overvoltage
f-f>
0
110%
Normaloperatingvoltage
? (supply)Voltagedip (1)Overvoltage
1%
Shortinterruption
I
I, Longinterruption
=
Q)
';;
Swell Overvoltage
~
110%
Normaloperatingvoltage
c:
Q)
'r;)
Voltagesag Undervoltage
I~
0
Z
100/0
Momentary
I Temporary Sustainedinterruption
In this field both IEC and IEEE lack a.good set of standardson power
quality. The lEe has set up a wholeframework on electromagneticcompat-
ibility which alreadyincludessome power quality standards.T he best exam-
ple is the harmonic standardIEC-61000-2-3 which limits the amount of
harmonic current produced by low-power equipment. The IEEE has a
good recommendedpractice for the limitation of harmonic distortion:
IEEE 519 [82] which gives limitsboth for the harmoniccurrentstaken by
the customerand for the voltagesdeliveredby the utility.
24 ChapterI • Overview of PowerQuality and PowerQuality Standards
Powersystem
Events
Conducted
disturbances
u
~
u
-; 0.75
.S
~u
~ 0.5
g
~
o
g 0.25
i
.J:J
Figure 1.20 Probability distribution function e
for a variation, with the compatibilitylevel ~ O~~-------------------'
Disturbancelevel inarbitraryunits
indicated.
EMC and Events. The EMC framework has not been developed for events
and its application to them has not been defined yet. For important power quality
phenomenalike voltage sagsand interruptions,the EMC standardscan thusnot be
used. This explains for a large part why the EMC standardsare not (yet) wellknown
in the powerquality field. Still an attemptshould be made atapplying the concepts
of electromagneticcompatibility to events.
Events onlyhappenoccasionallyand are not present allof the time;applying a
95°~ criterion is thereforeno longer possible. Animmunity to 95% of voltage sags
would dependon the wayof countingthe sags.C ountingall sags below 200 V (in a 230
V supply) would give a much higher numberthancountingall sagsbelow 150 V. The
immunity requirementin the latter case would be muchstricter than in the former.
In some powerquality monitoringsurveys a95% criterionin space is applied. The
electromagneticenvironmentis defined as the level of disturbance(numberof events)
not exceeded for950/0 of the sites. But the knowledge of the environmentin itself does
not sayanythingaboutequipmentimmunity requirements.The immunity requirement
should be based on theminimum time between events exceeding the immunity level.
Figure 1.21 shows the time between events exceeding certain
a disturbancelevel as a
function of the disturbancelevel (the severity of the event). The more severe the event
the more the time between events (the lower the event frequency). A of equipment
piece
or an industrial process to which theequipmentbelongs will have acertain reliability
requirement,i.e., a certain minimum time between events leading to tripping of the
equipmentor interruption of the process. By using the curve in Fig. 1.21 this can be
translatedinto an immunity requirement.As we will see later, theactual situation is
more complicated:the severityof an event is amultidimensionalquantity as at least
magnitudeand durationplaya role.
A possiblecompatibilitylevel would be the levelnot exceeded morethanten times
a year by95% of the customers.This can be done for anydimensionof the event,
leading to amultidimensionalcompatibility level. Thisconcepthas beenappliedto the
results of the Norwegianpower quality survey [67]. The frequency oftransientover-
voltage events, for the 950/0 site, is shown in Fig. 1.22. The95% site is chosen such t hat
95% of the sites have less transientovervoltageevents per yearthanthis site.From Fig.
1.22 we can see t hat reasonablecompatibility levels are:
6
Desired reliability
a:;
;;.
.!!
., 5
-5
OJ)
~.,
., 4
.,o><
ZJ
.,<::
.,;;. 3
.,<::
.,
~
.,
.,
.0
a 2
f::::
500
400
~.,;;. 300
""'d0
200 1.0-1.5
Z
~
100 2.0-3.0 . ~~
't>~"
3.0-5.0 ;s.'<S'
0 ~~"<J
5.0-10.0
1-10
Voltage-integral in Vs
Voltage Variations. Standard EN50160 gives limits for some variations. For
each of these variations the value is given which shall notexceededfor
be 95% of
the time. The measurement should be performed with a certain averaging window.
The length of this window is 10 minutes for most variations; thus very short time
scales are not considered in the standard. The following limits forlow-voltage
the
supply are given in the document:
- low value: the value likely to be found in the vicinity of large disturbing
loads and associated with a low probability of causing disturbing
effects;
- highvalue: value rarely found in the network and with a higher probability
of causing disturbingeffects.
3 5 %
15 0.5%
5 6% 17 20/0
7 5% 19 1.5%
9 1.5% 21 0.50/0
II 3.5% 23 1.5%
13 3% 25 1.5%
30 ChapterI • Overview of Power Quality and PowerQuality Standards
3.5,.--------.----,----.----.:.--.,....----,
3
5e
~ 2.5
.53
.~ 2
a
-8
g 1.5
~e
~
0.5
O'---.:=-----L--------J~_---I~_----I--=----'
Figure 1.23 Probability density function of 180 200 220 240 260 280
the normal distribution. Voltagein volts
32 Chapter 1 • Overview of Power Quality and Power Quality Standards
From a table of theerror function, which can befound in almostany book on statistics
or stochastictheory, we find that <1>(1.96) = 0.975 which givesa> 11.7V. Knowing
expectedvalue and standarddeviation of the normal distribution, the wholedistribu-
tion is known. It is thus no longerdifficult to calculatethe probability that the voltage
deviatesmore than 10% from its nominalvalue. The resultsof this calculationare given
in Table 1.3. The firstcolumngives theprobability that the voltageis within the voltage
range in thesecond,third, and fourth columns.The voltagerange is given instandard
deviations,in volts and as a percentageof the nominal voltage. The voltage is thus
between 200 and 260 V for990/0 of the time. The lastc olumn indicateshow often the
voltageis outsideof the range,assumingall samplesto bestochasticallyindependent.In
reality there isstrong correlation between thesampleswhich makesthat large devia-
tions become even more unlikely. Further, there arevoltage regulation mechanisms
(capacitor banks, transformertap-changers)which become active when the voltage
deviatestoo much from itsnominal value. Finally, one should realize that the 95%
value given in thestandarddoes not hold for the averagecustomerbut for the worst-
servedcustomer.All this leads to theconclusionthat voltagemagnitudevariationsof
much morethan 10% are extremelyunlikely.
From this reasoningone should absolutely not draw the conclusion that the
voltage magnitudewill never be lowerthan a value like 80%. The mainassumption
used isthat the voltage variations are due to the sumof a numberof small voltage
drops. During, e.g., a voltage sag, this nolonger holds. This brings us back to the
principal differencebetween"events" and "variations": for variationsthe normal dis-
tribution can be used; for events it is the time betweenevents which isof main impor-
tance. Theprobabilitiesin Table 1.3 thus only hold for voltagemagnitudevariations;
absolutelynothing is said yetabout voltagemagnitudeevents.
Voltage Events
Magnitude steps Frequent events shall be less than
3°.!cl in magnitude
Voltage sags No limits
Short interruptions No limits
Long interruptions
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 Interruptions
A long interruption is a power quality event during which the voltage at a cus-
tomerconnectionor at theequipmentterminalsdropsto zero and does not come back
automatically.Long interruptionsare one of the oldestand most severepower quality
concerns.The official IEC definition mentionsthree minutesas theminimum duration
of a long interruption. An interruption with a duration of less than three minutes
shouldbe called a"shortinterruption."Within the IEEE standardsthe term"sustained
interruption" is used forinterruptionslastinglongerthan 3 seconds[IEEE Std. 1159] or
longer than2 minutes[IEEE Std. 1250]. In thischapterthe term"long interruption"will
be used as aninterruption which is terminatedthroughmanualaction, thus not auto-
matic. An interruptionterminatedthroughautomaticreclosureor switching, is called a
"short interruption" and will be treatedin detail in Chapter3.
35
36 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
2.1.3 Terminology
....
E 1.2-,---- -- - - - - - -- - - - ----,
o
'@
o
l:;
~ 0.8
c:
1 o
06
.
.5 0.4
'-
~ 0.2
OJ
supply woulddeteriorate. Figure 2.1 clearly shows t hat this has not been the case; the
numberof supply interruptionshas stayedremarkablyconstant.
Individual interruptions arecharacterizedthrough their duration,i.e., the time it
takes until the supply isrestored. Often the averaged uration of an interruptionis not
published but instead the total durationof all interruptionsduring one year is provided.
This value is referred to as the"minuteslost perconnectedcustomer"or more correctly
as theunavailability of the supply. Thedata for Great Britain (Wales,Scotland,and
England)is shown in Fig. 2.2. We again see that the reliability of the supply remained
constant,with the exception of the year 1990/91, during which severe blizzards made it
impossible to restore the supply within a few hours. The numberof interruptionsdue to
this severeweatherwas relatively small. as can be concludedfrom Fig. 2.1, but its
duration had a seriousimpact on the unavailability of the supply .
The collectionof this datais less trivial thanit may look . One should realizethat
most utilities do notautomatically become awarethat the supply to one or more
customersis interrupted. It is typically the customersthat report an interruption to
the utility . The startingmomentof an interruption,and thus theduration,is therefore
not always easy todetermine.The total numberof long interruptionsin the service
territory of a utility can beobtainedsimply by counting them , as eachinterruption
requires anoperatoraction for the supply to be restored. The numberof customers
affected by aninterruption requires a studyof customerrecords which is often time
consuming. Some utilitiesjust assume a fixedamountof customersconnectedto each
feeder, whileother utilities link the interruption records with theircustomerdatabase .
250-,---- - -- -- -- -- - -- - - --,
~
" 200
~
:.§. 150
:€
{j 100
=a
g 50
;:J
o 90/9 1 91/92 92/93 93/94 94/95 95/96 Figure 2.2 Unavailability of the supply.
Monitoring period average forGreat Britain. (Data obtained
from [109].)
Section 2.2 • Observationof SystemPerformance 39
(2.1)
(2.3)
This value isredundant,as it may becalculatedfrom (2.1) and (2.2) by using the
following relation:
- q
D== (2.4)
A
X, q, D.
Utilities often publish two of these three values,
Note that (2.3) gives theaverageduration of an interruption from a customer
perspective.From a utility perspectiveanothervalue is alsoof interest: the average
duration per interruption, Dint, calculatedas
(2.5)
(2.7)
Table2.1 gives thepercentageof interruptionsrestoredwithin 3 hoursfor a numberof
British distributioncompanies.The values in thecolumnslabeled"practice" have been
obtainedfrom [109], the values in thecolumnslabeled "theory" have beenobtained
from (2.7) by using theaverageduration of supply interruptionsfor the same year.
Using the averagedurationandassumingan exponentialdistributionwill overestimate
the impact of interruptions:the numberof interruptionslonger than 3 hoursis signifi-
cantly lessthanwould be expected from the measuredaverage. This is clearly a case for
more detailedreportingof the distributionof the durationof both componentoutages
and supplyinterruptions.It also calls forincluding nonexponentialdistributionsin the
reliability evaluation.
Figure 2.3 shows theprobability density function of the durationof all interrup-
tions obtained for The Netherlandsbetween 1991 and 1994 [112]. We see t hat the
majority of interruptions has a duration between 30minutes and 2 hours, with a
TABLE 2.1 Distribution of Interruption Duration, 1996/97 Values for Various British
Utilities: Theory and Practice
TABLE 2.2 Numberof Interruptions perCustomerper Year X for Some British Utilities
ReportingYear
Distribution
Company 90/91 91/92 92/93 93/94 94/95 95/96
Both Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 give the average supply reliability for the whole of
GreatBritain. An old questionis, how useful is thisdatafor an individual customer.No
informationaboutindividual customersis available,but separatedataare availablefor
each of the 12d istributioncompanies[109]. Someof this datais shownin Table2.2 and
Table 2.3. In Great Britain the distribution companiesoperatethe voltage levels of
132 kV and lower. As will beshownin Table2.4 their systems are responsiblefor 97°~
of the numberof interruptions,as well as for97% of the unavailability. The compar-
ison between thedifferent utilities can giveinformationabouthow differences in system
design and operation influence the supply performance.Apart from the adverse-
weatheryear 90/91 thenumber of interruptionsand the supply unavailability have
remained remarkably constant. An accurate stochastic prediction method should
thus be capable of reproducing these numbers, an interesting challenge. We will
come back to thecomparisonbetweenobservationand predictionin Section2.7.
From Table 2.2 and Table 2.3 we can also see t hat companiesC, E, and H
suffered most from the severe weatherin 90/91. It is possible tocalculatethe average
duration of an interruptionfor eachof the distribution companies,by using (2.4).For
companyH we obtainfor the year 90/91:D = ll~: = 594minutes,almost 10hours.For
the year 91/92 theaverageduration of an interruption was only 106 minutesfor the
samecompany.
An evenfurther subdivisionhas been made in [109]: for each so-called"operation
unit" within the utility values are given forn umberof interruptionsand unavailability.
Based on thisdata a probability density function has beenobtainedfor the unavail-
ability of operationunits. The results areshown in Fig. 2.4 and Fig. 2.5. Thelatter
figure includes the units with the highest unavailability. We seethat 50% of the units
have anunavailability between50 and 100minutesper year.The 950/0 percentileof the
distribution is at 350 minutes. It is obvious from this graph that the averageunavail-
ability doesnot give anyinformation aboutthe unavailabilitywhich can be expected by
a specificcustomer.One shouldnote that this is not thedistribution for the customers,
as not all operationunits have the samenumberof customersand not all customers
within one operationunit have the sameunavailability. Getting such agraph for all
customerswould require a much more intensivedata collection effort than currently
being done.
Section 2.2 • Observationof SystemPerformance 43
10
8
.§tJ
C+-c
0
6
.8 4
~ 2
O~
Figure 2.4 Probability density function for
0
0
f")
I
0
tn
;
I
0
'"
1
\0
0
0\
...!. -,
~ 0
~
~ - --
0
V)
,
0
-
'" I
~
I
2
~
0
f")
~
0
V)
N
I
-
N 00
§ ~ ~ § 00 (5
N
M
N
~
N
the averageunavailability in Great Britain.
Interrupted minutes
(Data obtainedfrom [109].)
10......--...---------------------,
9
tJ 8
.~ 7
~o 6
.8 5
§4
Z 3
2
1
Other
3%
33 kV
12%
Other
3%
132 kV
4%
Urban Customers
0.4
i' 0.35
t)
>-
!, 0.3
~ 0.25
6
t
¢:l
0.2
a
Figure 2.8 Numberof interruptionsper year
for the averagelow voltagecustomerin The
Netherlands,1976-1995,with contributions
r
.:;: 0.15
..=
0.1
0.05
from low voltage(x), mediumvoltage(0), and Ol..------J.------L.----....L.---~
high voltage( +) systems.(Reproducedfrom 80 85 90 95
van Kruining et al. [110].) Year
60 High voltage
%
50
40
30
20
10
O'---.£""""",L-L-
0-1/4 114-112 1/2-1 1-2 2-4 4-8 8-16 16-32
Duration in hours
40 Medium voltage
% 35
30
25
20
15
10
5
O'--'=L-L-
0- 1/4 1/4-1/2 1/2-1 1-2 2-4 4-8 8-16 16-32
Duration in hours
30 Low voltage
%
25
20
15
10
5
o'--'"'-=L-.L._
0-1/4 1/4·112 112-1 1-2 2-4 4-8 8-16 16-32
Duration in hours
for this. Almost 100% of medium and low voltage networksin The Netherlandsare
underground. Restorationof the supply takes place
normally via switching in radially
operatedloops .
Source: [107].
48 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
Long interruptions are by far themost severepower quality event; thus any
documentdefining or guaranteeingthe quality of supply should contain limits on
frequencyand durationof interruptions.The internationalstandardson powerquality
do not yet give anylimitations for interruption frequencyor duration. The European
voltage quality standardEN 50160 (see Section 1.4.3) comes closeststatingby that
"under normaloperatingconditionstheannualfrequencyof voltageinterruptionslonger
thanthreeminutesmay be less than 10 or up to 50dependingon the area."The document
also statesthat Hit is notpossibleto indicate typicalvaluesfor the annualfrequency and
durations 0.[longinterruptions."
Many customerswant more accurate limits for the interruption frequency.
Therefore, some utilities offer their customersspecial guarantees,sometimescalled
"power quality contracts."The utility guaranteesthe customerthat there will be no
more than a certain number of interruptionsper year. If thismaximum number of
interruptionsis exceeded in a given year, the utility will paycertainamountof
a money
per interruptionto the customer.This can be a fixedamountper interruption,defined
in the contract,or the actualcosts and lossesof the customerdue to theinterruption.
Some utilities offervariouslevelsof quality, with differentcosts. Thenumberof options
is almost unlimited: customerwillingness to payextra for higher reliability and utility
creativity are the maininfluencingfactors at the moment.Technicalconsiderationsdo
not appearto play any role insettinglevels for themaximumnumberof interruptions
or the costsof the various options. For a customerto make adecisionaboutthe best
option, datashouldbe available,not only aboutthe averageinterruptionfrequencybut
also on theprobability distribution of the numberof interruptionsper year.
Contractualagreementsaboutthe voltagequality are mainly aimed atindustrial
customers.But also fordomesticcustomers,utilities offer compensation.Utilities in the
U.K. have to offer a fixedamount to each customerinterruptedfor longer than 24
hours. In The Netherlandsa court has ruled that utilities have to compensatethe
customersfor all interruption costs, unless theutility can provethat they are not to
blame for theinterruption.Also in Sweden some utilities offer customerscompensation
for an interruption.
3 hours 24 hours
Target Achieved Target Achieved
A 80°A, 80.7°A, 1000/0 100%
B 85% 90.2% 99% 100%
C 950/0 92.70/0 1000/0 99.9%
D 93% 93.0% 100% 100%
E 80% 88.50/0 99% 100%
F 80% 91.4% 99% 100%
G 85% 86.6% 99% 99.3%
H 850/0 92.9% 99% 100%
• generation
• transport(transmission)
• distribution
• level I: generation
• level II: generationand transport
• level III: generation,transport,and distribution
AnnualPeak Load. The rule that the total generationcapacityin a power sys-
tem should exceed theannualpeak load is likely to be themost important planning
criterion in power systems. Planning and building of large power stations take
between 5and 10 years, thus decisions about these have to bem adeseveral years in
advance.The most basic level Ireliability study is to calculatethe probability that
the availablegenerationcapacityis lessthan the annual peak load in a certain year
(e.g., 7 yearsaheadof the decision date). The i nput data for such astudy consistsof
the expectedannualpeakload, the capacityof eachgeneratorunit, and its forced un-
availability. The forced unavailability is the fraction of time during which a unit is
not availabledue to forcedoutages,Le., during which it is in repair. The assumption
to be made is that the probability that the unit is not available during the annual
peak isequal to the forcedunavailability. This gives us sufficienti nformation to cal-
culate the probability that the available capacityis lessthan the annual peak load.
This probability is called the"loss of load expectation"(LOLE) of the annual peak.
Note that scheduledoutagesare not consideredin peak load studies. It isassumed
that preventivemaintenancewill not be scheduledduring the period of the year in
which the peakload can be expected.
ten years fromnow" are addressed.In that case it is assumedthat all generating
plants and linesthat are not in repair or in maintenanceare availablefor generation
and transport.For operationalreserve studies the situation is different: one needs to
take into account only those plants that are actually running or which can be
brought online at short notice and assess the riskthat the total load cannot be
supplied within the next few hours.
• normal weather
• adverseweather
• major storm disaster
componentsbetween the' bulk supply point and the customer. Occasionally, parts of
the system areoperatedin parallel or meshed. As this concerns small parts of the
system, themathematicaldifficulties for calculatingthe interruptionfrequency remain
limited.
The Availabilityof the Alternative Supply. The list of terms given above, con-
tributing to the duration of an interruption, assumesthat the alternativesupply is
available. Thus, themoment the fault is located (or the faulted section is identified)
the supply can be restored. But this is not always the case, as alternativesupply
the
can also beinterrupted,or the alternativesupply is only able to take over part of the
load. In that case the supply can only be completely restored after repair or replace-
ment of the faultedcomponent.When the supply can be restored by switching, the
customerexperiences a"long interruption." When the supply can only be restored
through repair/replacement,the customerexperiences a"very long interruption" as
defined in Section 1.3.3. The frequency of very long interruptionswill be rathersmall
in most distribution systems (with the exception o f remote rural networks), but the
interruption costs may become very large, which makesimportant it that they be-
come an essential part of the reliability evaluationresults.Another reason forputting
special emphasis on very long interruptionsmay bethat the utility has to publish the
number of interruptionsnot restored within acertain time, or has to pay damages
for these"very long interruptions."
To get exact detailsof the distribution of the duration of interruptions,compli-
catedstochasticmodelsof the system are needed. But a two-step approachcan be used
if one is only interested in the frequency of very long interruptions. For very long
interruptions,the time-scale of interest is longer
thanthe time needed for the alternative
supply to be made available. For the assessment of the numberof very long interrup-
tions the switches used to restore the supply can be considered in a closed position
already. Toevaluatethe reliability of the resulting system, techniques developed for
58 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
transmissionsystems may be used. The models requiredfor this are muchmore com-
plicated than for predictingthe total interruption frequency.
Some of the before-mentionedaspectsof transmissionsystem reliability (com-
mon-modefailures, adverseweather,overloading)have to beincorporatedin a level
III study if the number of very long interruptionsand/or the interruption duration
distribution are of interest.
Changegeneration
Changetransportsystem
Changestabilityaspects
Changedistributionsystem
Changeequipment
immunity
Changeequipmentreliability
andredundancy
2. How often will a situation occur that the generationis available butthat it
cannotbe transportedto the load?
This layer correspondsto hierarchicallevel II in the public supply. The
variousconsiderationsare very similar,but with somedifferencein emphasis.
4. How often will the distribution system fail totransportpower to the plant?
Layer 4of industrial powersystem reliabilitycorrespondsto level III in
the public supply. We can thus apply similar techniques,with the difference
that the duration of an interruption is often not so important in industrial
systems. As it is the assessment of the interruption duration which makes
reliability analysis indistribution systemscomplicated,the calculationsin
industrial distribution systems will be simplerthan in public systems.
The distribution systemstartsat the transportsystemstudiedin layer 2
and layer 3, and ends at the equipmentterminals.The various distribution
systems arenormally consideredindependentof each other. An industrial
distributionsystem can be extremely complex: many pieces of equipmentwith
many levelsof redundancyand importance.Some kindof pruning needs to
be made before a study' can startedwith
be a reasonablechanceof success. A
first pruningis to only considerthe supply toequipmentwhich is essential for
the operationof the plant.
A decision to be madebeforehandis where thetransmissionsystemstops
and thedistribution system begins. The answer to this will again dependon
the detailsof the study. For smaller systems itmight be appropriateto not
make anydistinction betweentransmissionand distribution, while for large
systems eachplant is consideredas aseparatedistribution system.
5. How often will the plantoperationbe interrupteddue to insufficient voltage or
currentquality?
In this layer allother power quality phenomena(i.e., apart from inter-
ruptions which were discussed in layers I through 4) have to be assessed.
Examplesof voltage quality events to bestudiedare:
• Transientovervoltages.
• Voltage sagsand swells.
• Notching and burstsof harmonicdistortion.
• High-frequencyconducteddisturbances.
To studyall these in as muchdepthas for the longinterruptionswould lead
to extremely long studieswithout much hope of useful results. The level of
detail againdependson the system. Anappropriatechoice is to only look at
62 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
an outageor failure event; and the reverse transition(i.e., from thenonhealthyto the
healthystate), therepair or restore event.
The systemstateis a combinationof all event states; if thestateof one of the
componentschanges,the systemstatechanges. The system s tatefor a system withN
componentscan bethoughtof as a vectorof rank N. The valueof each element is the
state of the correspondingcomponent.An event is atransition between two system
states, due to thechangein stateof one or morecomponents.
Ll
1. generatorplus generatortransformerTl
2. substationA
3. line Ll
4. line L2
5. substationB
6. transformerT2
The Interruption Criterion. For each systemstateor for each event, an"inter-
ruption criterion" is used todetermineif this state or eventshould be countedas an
interruption or not. In most studies theinterruptioncriterion is rather trivial, but for
Monte Carlo simulation, the definition of the in-
more detailed studies, especially for
terruption criterion becomes animportant part of the modeling effort. It is recom-
mended to spend at least some time on defining interruption
the criterion for a
reliability evaluationstudy. Some simple examples of interruption criteria are given
below. Note that these arejust examples, andcertainly not the only possibilities.
64 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
R
(2.13)
Q=R+T
• The expectedtime betweenfailures (ETBF) is the sum of the expectedtime to
failure (ETTF) and the expectedrepair time. As the repair time is normally
muchsmallerthanthe time tofailure, ETBF and ETTF are aboutequalandas
a consequenceoften mixed up. From a mathematicalp oint of view, this is a
seriousmistake,but in engineeringthese kindof errors are commonand not
consideredvery seriously.
140 _I
A = 10 x 7500= 0.0019yr (2.14)
1
T = 0.0019= 530yr (2.15)
7360
R = 140 = 52.6h = 0.006yr (2.16)
Jl = ~R = 167yr-1 (2.17)
530
p = 0.006+ 530= 0.999989 (2.18)
0.006 .
Q = 0.006+ 530= 0.000011= 6mtn/yr (2.19)
• Each transformer has a probability of 0.0019 to fail in the coming year. In the whole
population, 14 transformers are expected to fail.
• After such a failure, the repair or replacement of the transformer is expected to last 52.6
hours.
• Each transformer will be out of operation, on average, 6 minutes per year.
66 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
Note that we have usedpast-performance d atato predictfuture behavior.This is the basis for all
reliability analysis: theassumptionthat the averageperformancein the past gives theexpected
behaviorfor the future.
The probability density function I(t) is a measurefor the probability that the compo-
nent will fail aroundan age t:
. Pr(T~t+~tIT>t)
A()
t = L\t~O
Iim - - - - - - - -
~I
(2.23)
The failure rate can be calculatedfrom the probability density function I(t) and the
probability distribution function F( t):
f(t) = m t om - {
exp (2.26)
A(t)=m-
r:' (2.27)
om
We seethat the failure rate increases for m > 1 and decreases for m < 1. From a
relatively simpleexpressionit is possible togeneratea whole rangeof lifetime distribu-
tions.
%
The ExponentialDistribution-Lifetime. As alreadystatedbefore, over 95 of
reliability evaluation studies use the simple model with a single failure rate and a
single repair rate. The underlying assumptionis that both repair time and lifetime
are exponentially distributed. The exponential distribution (also called "negative
exponentialdistribution") is defined through the following probability distribution
function:
F(t) = 1 - e-'At (2.28)
In( -In(Fr3 »
(2.29)
m= In(~)
with Fr3 the fraction of interruptionsnot restoredwithin three hours and () the char-
acteristicrepairtime. If we take theaveragerepairtime as thecharacteristicrepairtime,
we only makea smallerror as long asm > 1. Including the effectof the shapefactor on
the averagerepair time would make thecalculation too complicated.The resulting
shapefactors for the interruption durationsare given inTable 2.10. We find shape
factors somewhatin excessof unity.
The IEEE Gold Book [21] gives,amongothers,repair times for large electrical
motors in an industrial environment.As both the average and the median value are
given, it is again possible to
estimatethe shapefactor assuminga Weibull distribution.
In mostcases themedianvalue ismuchlarger thanthe average, whichindicatesa shape
factor less than one. An alternativeexplanationis the combinationof two Weibull
distributions,both with shapefactor greaterthan one, but with significantlydifferent
characteristicor averagerepair times.
More theoreticalmodelingand observationwork is needed tovalidatethe useof
the exponential distribution in power system reliability evaluation. Based on the
evidencepresented,the following preliminary conclusionscan bedrawn:
() Fr3 ShapeFactor
Q=Ar (2.31)
Sometimesa different form of these expressionsis used: theoutagerate is given in
failures per year,a ndthe repairtime in hours,leading to the following(mathematically
not fully correct,but very handy)expressionsfor availability and unavailability:
Ar
P = 1 - 8760 (2.32)
Ar
Q = 8760 (2.33)
On-sitegeneration
Public
supply
Figure 2.13Stochasticnetwork
representationof the systemshownin Fig.
2.12.
All componentsin the network in Fig. 2.13 are stochastically independent,so that simple mathe-
matics can be applied. Note that the capacity of one generator(5 MW) is not enoughto supply
the load (7 MW). To supply the load the public supply needsbetopresent, or both on-site
generatorsneed to be inoperation.In the networkdiagramthis is shown as the"public supply"
in parallel with both "on-site generators"in series. Also note the difference between a circuit
breakermaltrip and a short circuit in the breaker. In the
lattercase theprotectionon both sides of
the breakerwill trip leading to the loss of twoprimary componentsat the same time.
will also soon fail or be tripped by its overload protection. In that case astochastic
seriesconnectionis a betterrepresentation.
Al
rl
-<. As
rs
A2
r2
Figure 2.14Stochasticseriesconnection.
r.s = L"'IA'"
'=; I ' (2.38)
LJ=I AJ
Ap = QI A2 + Q2 AI (2.39)
= AI A2(' 1+ '2)
The parallel connectionis not availablewhen both componentsare not available. The
unavailability of the parallel connectionis
o, = QI X Q2 (2.40)
The repair time of the parallel connectionis obtainedfrom (2.39)and (2.40):
'p =-'1'2
- (2.41)
'I +'2
The equationscan beextendedto a system with threecomponentsin parallel by con-
sidering it as theparallel connectionof one componentand the equivalent of the
parallel connectionof the two other components.This results in the following expres-
sions for outagerate and repair time:
(2.42)
1 1 1 I
-=-+-+- (2.43)
'p '1 '2 '3
The same process can be repeatedseveral times, resulting in the following general
expressionsfor a systemconsistingof n componentsin parallel:
n n 1
-. = Il
;=1
Aj'j L -:
j=1 ,}
(2.44)
(2.45)
cut-set becauserepair of component3 does not restore the supply, even though
repair of component 1 or component 2 does. The cut-set {4, 5} is a minimum
cut-set becauseboth repair of component4 and repairof component5 restore the
supply. For each network there are a limitednumberof minimum cut-sets.Finding
all minimum cut-sets is the first step of the
minimum-cut-setmethod.
The network in Fig. 2.16 has the following minimum cut-sets:
{1,2}
{4,5}
{1,3,4}
{2, 3, 5}
Equations(2.44) and (2.45) giveequivalentfailure rate and repair time for the parallel connec-
tions representingthe four cut-sets.
74 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
(2.46)
'c2
1
= ( -+- I)-I = 0.086
'4 '5
= ( -I + -1 + -1)-1 =
(2.47)
'('3 0.046
'1 '3 '4
'('4
1
= ( -+-+-
1 1)-1= 0.04
'2 '3 '5
The failure rate A and repair time r of the whole system can be
calculatedby consideringit as a
seriesconnectionof the four cut-sets:
(2.48)
A second example of the use of the network approachis shown in Fig. 2.18 and Fig.
2.19. The first figure showsp art of a subtransmissionsystem. Thetransmissiongrid is
assumed to be fully reliable. Also substationsA, B, and C areassumednot to fail. The
load of interestis connectedto substationD. The networkrepresentationfor the system
in Fig. 2.18 is shown in Fig. 2.19. Component8 representsoutagesin the local sub-
station(D) which lead to aninterruptionfor the loadof interest.This network can no
longer be reducedthrough series andparallel connections,but the minimum cut-set
methodcan still be used.
6 7
These minimum cut-sets are shown in Fig. 2.20 from where the term ..set
cutbecomes
clear. A cut-set cuts allpathsbetween the source and the load.minimum
A cut-setcan
be described as "ashortestcut."
1----------
{8}
{1,2}
{I, 5}
{2,3}
{3,5}
{3, 7}
{5,6}
{6,7}
{I, 4, 7}
{2, 4, 6}
3 5
6 7
8
Figure 2.21 Industrial system withthree-bus
substation.
3 5
6 7
Figure 2.23Four-statecomponentmodel.
78 Chapter 2 • Long Interruptions and Reliability Evaluation
On-sitegeneration
Public
supply
Industrial
Figure 2.25 Example of industrial supply load
with double redundancy.
,,
,
,
,,
\
\
,
\
,, ,
I \
"~
8 ~
,,
-,
... I
/ ,
,
... I ,
...
'",
I
, ,
/ \\, "
"
I ... ,
I , ,
\\,',
I
/ "" \
dP2
(2.53)
i.e., the sumof state probabilitiesequalscertainty.To calculatethe stateprobabilities
only oneof the expressions (2.51) and (2.52) is needed, togetherwith (2.53).
From (2.51) and (2.53) we can solve theprobability that the system is instate1,
thus that the componentis healthy. It is assumed t hat the componentis healthyfor t =
o which correspondsto PI (0) = 1.
P (t) = _Jl_ + _A_e-t(A+Jl) (2.54)
1 A+J-L A+1l-
We seethat the probability reaches aconstantvalue after anexponentiallydecaying
transientwith a timeconstantA~ • For almost any engineering system we may assume
k
that repairis much faster thanf:ilure, thus A «/1.. When we also realizethat is the
averagerepair time, we seethat the probability reaches aconstantvalue within a time
of interestis normally much largerthan
scale equal to the repair time. The time period
the repair time (years versus hours) so that we can considerthe system states and
transition frequenciesconstant.This holds not only for atwo-componentmodel but
for every Markov model in which repair takes place much faster than failure.
82 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
dpi =0 (2.55)
dt
The equationswhich describe thestateprobabilitiesbecomealgebraicequations,which
can be easily solved.For the two-statemodel weobtain
o = -API + ttP2
o = API - IlP2 (2.56)
PI + P2 = I
One of the equationsin this set isredundant,so that only oneof the first twoequations
is needed.From this one and thethird equation,the steady-stateprobability becomes
PI = A +tt JL (2.57)
P2 =-A- (2.58)
A+1l
From the three-statemodel in Fig. 2.28 weobtain the following setof equations
for the stateprobabilities:
(2.61)
AIPI = I-tP3
A2P2 = AIPI
IlP3 = A2P2 (2.62)
PI + P2 + P3 = 1 (2.63)
(2.64)
(2.65)
dpi
dt = -AIPI + A2P2 (2.66)
PI + P2 = 1 (2.67)
84 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
P2(t) = AI
Al +A2
[I _e- /()..I+A2>] (2.68)
The fail-to-trip frequencyis equalto A2P2 and reachesits steady-statevalue with a time
constant A LA,' This holds if we assumethat hidden failures only reveal themselves
during a f~urt in the primary component.In case maintenanceis performed with a
frequencyA3 the transition rate from state2 to state1 is A2 + A3' The probability that
the relay is instate 2 becomes
n (1) =
mt v. Al
AI A2
+ A2 + A3
[I' _e 3>]
-t(AI +A2+ A (2.70)
(2.71)
dpi
dt = -(AI + A2)PI + JLIP2 + JL2P3 (2.72)
dP2
dt = AIPI - (JLI + A2)P2 + JL2P4 (2.73)
dP3
dt = A2PI - (J.t2 + At)P3 + J.tIP4 (2.74)
dP4
dt = A2P2 + AIP3 - (J.tl + J,L2)P4 (2.75)
PI + P2 + P3 + P4 = 1 (2.76)
Section 2.5 • BasicReliability EvaluationTechniques 8S
Figure 2.29Two-component,two-state
Markovmodel.
(2.88)
(2.89)
-dP
dt
-
= AP(t) (2.90)
(2.91)
and
o
112
A= (2.92)
JLl
-J-l1 - J-l2
The off-diagonal element Aij is the transition rate from statej to state i. The diagonal
elementA ii is minus the sum of all transition ratesaway from state i:
Aij=\i (2.93)
A ii = - LAij (2.94)
j
P(t) = v: + LPie-~
;>1
(2.97)
In most cases wecan neglect thetransientsand are only interestedin the steady-state
solution r;Note that the steady-statesolutionis independento f the initial values.The
steady-statesolution can be obtaineddirectly from the transition rates by setting the
time derivativesto zero:
(2.98)
(2.99)
Approximate Solutionof Large Markov Models. The main problem with the
exact solution of large systemsis that all stateprobabilities have to becalculatedat
the same time, even those with a very low probability. For an N-state model, an
N x N matrix has to beinverted to find the steady-stateprobabilities.Assumingthat
all componentshave two states(up and down) an It-componentsystem requires 2n
states.Thus, a IO-componentsystemalready requires 1000 states,and a 150-compo-
nent model requires the inversion of a matrix of size 1045• In other words, this
methodhas seriouslimitations. We might be able tosomewhatreducethe numberof
states,but exact solutionsfor systemswith more than 10 componentsare in practice
not possibleto obtain. To overcomethese limitations, one can use anapproximated
method, which gives recursive expressionsfor the state probabilities [145]. The
assumptionsmadeare as follows:
(2.100)
88 Chapter2 • Long Interruptionsand Reliability Evaluation
PI =1 (2.104)
According to the third assumption,we neglectthe termswith Ps, P6, P7,pg, and P9 on
the right-hand side of (2.101) through (2.103). That gives the following equationsfor
the states2 through 4:
PI = 1- LP;
;>1
(2.111)
The samemethod can be applied to states5 through 15, each time resulting in an
equationin which only one stateprobability is unknown. Insteadof having to solve
all stateprobabilitiesat the sametime, this procedureallows solving stateprobabilities
sequentially. For very large systems,not all statesare of equal interest, which can
Section 2.5 • Basic Reliability Evaluation Techniques 89
Sequence I
3 6 21
I
~~
I 4 I I 4
Sequence 2
o--L-o 6 G>>-+-~-~e
6
o~
cr--1--o--i--o--,,--
6----,,.--- - 0
Sequence 3
3 4 2 4
6
010 0
5
--0
4 3 I 5 Figure 2.31Threesequencesof a Monte
Carlo simulation.The circles indicate failures
.. 10 years
•
;
At time zero all threecomponentsstart their first lifetime. Upon failure they are
repaired and a new lifetime determined.This
is process isrepeateduntil t = 10 years is
reached .F rom the outcomeof this stochasticexperiment,many different outputpara-
meters can be chosen, for example,
1,7,5,2,3,10,4,6,9,8,1,7,5,2,3,10,4,6,9,8,1,
etc.
if one realizesthat thereare only
The row repeatsitself after 10elements,which isunderstandable
10 possibleoutcomesof (2.112). A cyclelength 10 (in general(N - 1) ) is the longestpossible
value. To showthat shortercycle lengthsare also possible,considerthe random-numbergen-
eratorwith N = II and a = 5 which has twopossiblerows, eachof cycle length 5:
1,5,3,4,9,1
2,10,6,8,7,2
The resultof (2.113) is arandomdraw from the uniform distribution on the interval
(0,1). Neither zero nor one can beobtainedthrough this method, which is often an
advantageas it preventsdividing by zero in further processingof the result. This
standarduniform distribution is the basis for allM onte Carlo simulations.
Note that for U = p the componentstateis actually not defined. In this examplethis
situationis attributedto stateSI but it could equally have beenattributedto state S2.
This ambiguity has to do with our discretizationof the uniform distribution. For a
continuousdistribution the probability that U =p is zero. For a random-numbergen-
erator with a cycle length of 231 - 1 this probability (5 x 10-1°) is small enoughto
neglect in allpracticalcases.
(2.114)
where X is a sample from the uniform distribution on the interval (Tt , T 2) . More
general:a stochasticvariable S with a distribution function F(s) is obtainedfrom
(2.115)
W = Oy!-ln(l - U) (2.120)
For m = 1 we obtain the exponentialdistribution as a special case o f the Weibull
distribution. A sample E from the exponentialdistribution with expectedtime 0 is
obtainedby
E = -Oln(l - U) (2.121)
I. Set up an initial event list. At thestart of each sequence, times for the first
event aredrawn for eachcomponent.The first event is typically a failure or
start of maintenance.These events aresorted on time of occurrenceand
placed in a so-called"event list." Part of an event list would typicallylook
as follows:
0.15 years component2 failure
1.74 years component5 maintenance
3.26years component1 hidden failure
4.91 years component5 failure
5.67 years component2 maintenance
6.21 years componentI maltrip
This event listshouldbe interpretedas follows: at t = 0.15 years,c omponent
2 will fail; at t = 1.74years,maintenanceon component5 is planned,etc. Not
all events in the list willactuallyoccur. We will see belowthat events may be
removedfrom the' event listand that events may beinserted.Furtheron in
the simulationof this sequence, it will always be the event top on of the list
which will be processed,a fter which the event list will beupdated.When the
event list isempty the simulationof this sequence is over.
2. Processthe event on top of the event list.Processingof the event on topof the
eventlist (thusthe next event tohappenin the system) is themain part of the
simulation, which will take up most time in programmingand deciding
about. This is where thestochasticmodel of the power systemand its com-
ponentsis implemented.The processingof an event typicallyconsistsof
making changesin the event list and making changesin the electrical
model of thepowersystem.Changesin the powersystem can be the removal
94 Chapter 2 • Long Interruptions and Reliability Evaluation
0.4
~
Q)
~ 0.3
I
0.2
0.55 .------~--~--~--~--_,
that each simulation may give a different result. The figure gives the result of 10
simulations, each using adifferent starting value of the random-numbergenerator.
Note that exactly the sameresultsare obtainedif the samestarting value is used for
the random-numberg enerator.
The error in the result of a Monte Carlo simulationcan be estimatedby usingthe
so-calledcentral-limit theorem.This theoremstatesthat the sumof a large numberof
stochasticvariableshas anormal distribution. Supposethat eachsequenceof a simula-
tion gives a value Xi for a certain stochasticvariable X. This value can be the total
number of interruptionsduring 20 years, but also the fraction of interruptionswith
durationsbetween1 and 3 hours.What we areinterestedin is the expectedvalueof such
a variable.To estimatethe expectedvaluewe usethe averagevalue, which is astandard
procedurein statistics. Let X be the averageof N samplesof Xi:
(2.122)
The Stopping Criterion. The fact that the error in a Monte Carlo simulation
will never becomezero meansthat we have toaccepta certain uncertaintyin the re-
sult. This issometimesmentionedas a disadvantageof the Monte Carlo simulation,
but also analytical calculationsare uncertain, due to theassumptionsand approxima-
tions madein the model. Where the error in an analytical calculationis often impos-
sible to estimate(unless a better model is used), theuncertainty in the result of a
Monte Carlo simulation can be estimated.The outcomeof any Monte Carlo simula-
tion will be a stochasticquantity with a normal distribution. For the normal distribu-
tion we know that 95% of all values are within two standard deviations of the
expectedvalue. We saw above that the standarddeviation after N samplesis equal
to ~. The 95% confidenceinterval of the estimateis thus,
Section 2.5 • BasicReliability EvaluationTechniques 97
- ax - ax (2.123)
X-2-</lx<X+2-
./N ./N
quantity X, ax , can beestimatedthroughthe
The standarddeviation of the stochastic
following expression:
ax ~
I ?=xl- [1
N_ I
N N
N?= Xi
]2 (2.124)
1=1 1=1
At regular momentsduring the simulation, e.g., after every 100 sequences, error
the in
the estimates may becalculatedand comparedwith the required accuracy. When the
required accuracy is reached the
simulationcan bestopped. Note that to determine the
of the sum of theXi values but also of the sum
error, one needs not only keep a record
of their squares .
(2.125)
neither converges nor diverges. The convergence parameterC has been plotted in Fig.
2.34 for 10simulationsof 10000 samples each. The underlying simulationis the same as
in Figs. 2.32 and 2.33. We see
that the plotted quantity remains within a bandaround
zero, thusthat the averageX indeed converges to the expected value /lx .
In Fig. 2.35 the same convergence parameteris plotted for a simulation which
does not converge. The divergence is clearly visible.
(From sample 2000onward, the
random-numbergeneratorwas given a cycle length of 1000 samples.)
!l 0.5
I
.,
~
~
~
U - 0.5
~ 0.5
I
os
0..
"
g
"e!'
"c>
o
U -0.5 ,
In most studies it is assumed that both failure rate and repair rate are
constant.
The underlyingreasons are a lack of dataand a lack ofevaluationtechniques. At the
moment, only the Monte Carlo simulationis capableof incorporatingnonexponential
distributionsfor nontrivial systems. But despite the lack applicationof
of nonexponen-
tiallifetime distributions, it is still worthwhile to have a closer look at the
variousaging
phenomena.Nonexponential repair time distributions are easier to understand,
althoughequally difficult to incorporatein the reliability evaluation.
To quantify the dependenceof the failure rate on the age of the component,the
so-called"bathtubcurve" is often used. Acommonway of drawingthe bathtubcurve is
shown in Fig. 2.36. The period between 0 and T) is called the wear-in period, after T 2
the wear-out period, and betweenT) and T 2 the useful life or the periodof random
failures. One should realizethat the bathtubcurve is only a stylized version of whatcan
be a rathercomplicatedfunction of time. The actual failure rate as a functionof time
can beof completely different shapealthoughit
, is likely to containat least an initial
wear-in period and an overall increasingfailure rate for oldercomponents[146].
This aging effect can be included in the reliability
evaluationmodels, byrepeating
the calculationsfor different componentage.For each age one assumes that all failure
rates areconstant.From the expressionsobtainedby usingMarkov models in Section
2.5.4, we knowthat the timeconstantwith which the system reacts to changes is of the
order of the repair times. For such s hort time scales we can safely assume the failure
rate to be constant.That way one can assess the aging of the system, e.g., the inter-
ruption frequency as afunction of time. When performing such a study one should
Section 2.5 • Basic Reliab ilityEvaluationTechniques 99
t
• Avejrage A COlmpo~ent I
..
••
.
, ,'t ..
.'
. : ",1: ..0:
,',' o·
"" .
0.
• 0
ee
Figure 2.38 Failure rate versus time for two
Time----+ components.
Similar reasoningsas given formaintenancecan be used for failure, with the difference
that the failure instantsare lessregularly positionedthan maintenanceinstants.
As-bad-as-old
i As-good-as-new
t=O i
Age of thecomponent-e-->
Repairor Figure 2.39 Repair as-good-as-new and as-
maintenance bad-as-old.
one has to take this intoaccountone way or the other. Alsod uring maintenancethe
chance of anoutage of anothercomponentis increased: itsloading is higher and
there is activity in theneighborhoodwith the associatedrisk of errors.
Many aspects of aging are extremely difficult quantify,
to but shouldat least be
consideredin a qualitative way in reliability evaluationstudies. A serious difficulty in
includingcomponentaging is the lackof availabledata:not just componentfailure data
is needed, but alsorepair and maintenancerecordsof all the components.
.....Reliability costs
- - . Buildingcosts
- Totalcosts
The cost of aninterruption consistsof a number of terms. Each term has its own
difficulty in being assessed. Again simply adding the terms toobtain the total costs
of an interruptionis not the right way,but due to lackof alternativesit is often the only
feasibleoption.
1. Direct costs.These are the costs which are directly
attributableto the inter-
ruption. The standardexample fordomesticcustomersis the lossof food in
the refrigerator. For industrial customersthe direct costs consist,among
others, of lost raw material, lost production, and salary costs during the
non-productiveperiod. For commercialcustomersthe direct costs are the
Section 2.6 • Costsof Interruptions 103
loss of profit and the salary costs during the non-productiveperiod. When
assessing the direct costs one has towatchfulbe of double-counting.One
shouldat first subtractthe savings made duringthe interruption.The obvious
savings are in the electricity costs, but for
industrial processes there is also a
saving in useof raw material.An example ofdouble-countingis addingthe
lost salesandthe salary costs (as the priceof the productalreadyincludes the
salarycosts). Also to besubtractedfrom the costsof interruptionis the lost
productionwhich can be recovered later. Some plants only run part of the
time. Extra salaryduring overtime needed to recover lost productionshould
be addedto the direct costs.
2. Indirect costs. Theindirect costs are muchharderto evaluate,and in many
casesnot simply to express inamountof money. Acompanycan losefuture
orderswhen aninterruptionleads to delay in delivering paroduct.A domes-
tic customercan decide to take an insuranceagainstlossof freezercontents.
A commercialcustomermight install a battery backup. A large industrial
customercould even decide to move plant a to an area with less supply
interruptions.The main problem with this cost term isthat it cannot be
attributed to a singleinterruption, but to the (real or perceived) quality of
supply as a whole.
3. Non-material inconvenience. Someinconveniencecannot be expressed in
money. Not being able to listen to the radio for hours 2 can be a serious
inconvenience,but the actual costs are zero. Inindustrial and commercial
environments,the non-materialinconvenience can also be big without con-
tributing to the director indirect costs. A wayof quantifyingthese costs is to
look at theamountof money acustomeris willing to pay for not having this
interruption.
C;(d)
(2.126)
L;
and are expressedin $jkW. For a group of customersexperiencingthe same
interruption,the costsper interruptedkW are defined as theratio of the total
costsof the interruptionand the total load in casetherewould not havebeen
an interruption:
(2.127)
C;(d)
(2.128)
st;
andis constantunderthe assumption.T hecostper kWh is expressedin S/kWh.
For a group of customersthe cost per kWh not deliveredis defined as
L; C;(d) (2.129)
dL;L;
Someutilities obtain an averagecost per kWh not deliveredfor all their cus-
tomers.This value isassumedconstantand used as areferencevaluein system
operationand design. The term "value of lost load" is sometimesusedfor the
cost per kWh not deliveredaveragedover all customers.
• Costsof interruption rated to the peak load. A problem in surveysis that the
actual load of individual customersin case there would not have been an
interruption is often not known. One should realize that surveys consider
hypotheticalinterruptions,rarely actual ones. For industrial and commercial
customersthe peak load is much easierto obtain, as it is typically part of the
supplycontract.Thecostof an interruptioncanbe divided by the peakload, to
get a value in$jkW. Somecare is neededwhen interpretingthis value, as it is
not the same as the cost per kW interrupted (also in $/kW). For planning
purposesthe cost of interruption rated to the peak load can still be a useful
value. The design of a systemis basedfor a large part on peak load, so that
rating the cost to the peak load gives adirect link with the design.
• Costsper interruptionratedto the annualconsumption.For domesticcustomers
it is easierto obtain the annualconsumptionthan the peak load. Rating the
Section 2.6 • Costs ofInterruptions lOS
120
0 2 min
•
0
I hour
4 hours -
• 8 hours
~ 60
o
1 40
20 f---
r--"
f - - - - """ f---
-
-
Figure 2.41 Int erru ption costs in S/kW for different customers, for forced
interruptions . Results from a Swedish stud y 1993in [200).
120
0 2 min
• I hour
0 4hours -
• 8 hours
~ 60
8
§
}40 r-r-
20
o ---
Domestic
..r
f-------
Agriculture
•
Trade and
services
--f
Small
industry
~ J
Textile
industry
Chemical
industry
...
Food
industry
'A,r
At,r,
Figure2.43 Example ofreliability
calculation:primaryselectivesupply.
~ Adverseweather
Adverse
weather
Averagefailure rate
Normalweather
A21---------------'
Ap2 == 2'2A~
= 0.0003566per year (2.138)
Normal weatheris presentduring a fraction T2 = ~~~~ of the year, which gives for the
expectednumberof interruptionsper year due to normal weather:
T2A p2 == 0.0003525interruptionsper year (2.139)
The adverseweatherinterruption rate is
This is a very high value, but normal weatheris only presentduring a fraction T I =
8170~O = 0.0114of the year. The contribution of adverseweatherto the annualinterrup-
tion frequencyis
TIApl = 0.73 interruptionsper year (2.141)
(2.147)
-=4I[
A 0 A(t)dt = 0.16 outagesper year (2.148)
rate due to overlappingoutages.The only difference with the previous case isthat
the outageratesare timedependenta nd thereforethe interruption rate as well:
Aoo( l ) = A(I)22r = 2.28 x 10- 6 16 interruptionsper year (2.151)
3
The averageinterruption frequency is 1.334 x 10- interruptions per year, and the
maximuminterruptionfrequencyGustbeforemaintenance)is 9.34 x 10- 3 interruptions
per year.The expectednumberof interruptionsdue to overlappingoutages,during a
4-yearperiod, is equal to 5.34 x 10-3 •
-. = ~ 1 2
Ap(t)dt= 2.18 x 10- interruptionsper year
4
(2.156)
MaintenanceEvery MaintenanceEvery
ConstantFailure Rate 4 Years 2 Years
Interruptionsdue to
overlappingoutages 2.34 x 10-3 per 4 years 5.34 x 10-3 per 4 years 0.85 x 10-3 per 4 years
Interruptionsdue to failure
during maintenance 3.65 x 10-3 per 4 years 7.31 x 10-3 per 4 years 1.83X 1-0-3 per 4 years
Short Interruptions
3.1 INTRODUCTION
A short interruptionhas the same causes as a long interruption: fault clearing by the
protection,incorrectprotectionintervention,etc. When thesupplyis restoredautoma-
tically, the resulting event is called short
a interruption. Long interruptionsand very
long interruptionsresult when the supply is restoredmanually.Automatic restoration
can take place by reclosing the circuit breakerwhich cleared the fault or by switching to
a healthy supply. The former takes place mainlyoverhead in distributionnetworks,the
latter is a typical solution in industrial systems.
Shortinterruptionsin the public supply are due to a ttemptsby the utility to limit
the duration of interruptions.We sawalreadyin Section 2.3that the duration of an
interruptionis an importantaspectof distribution and transmissionsystem design.By
using automaticreclosing theduration of an interruption can bebrought back from
typically about 1 hour, to typically lessthan 1 minute. For many yearsinterruptions
shorterthan severalminuteswerenot consideredas a causeof concernto most custo-
mers. Recently this has changed: more and more equipmentis sensitive to veryshort
duration events, and more and more customers(domestic as well asindustrial) view
short interruptionsas a seriousimperfectionof the supply. This ispart of the trends
mentionedin Section 1.1 for the increased interestin power quality in general.Short
interruptionsalso occur inindustrial power systems due to the operationof automatic
transferswitches. We discuss this in Chapter7.
3.2 TERMINOLOGY
115
116 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
• EN 50160
- Long interruption: longer than three minutes.
- Short interruption: up to threeminutes.
• IEEE Std.1159-1995
This standardis consideredby many as providing the basic power quality
definitions. It distinguishesbetween momentary, sustained,and temporary
interruptions. Note.the overlap between sustainedand temporary interrup-
tions.
- Momentaryinterruption: between0.5 cyclesand 3 seconds.
- Sustainedinterruption: longer than 3 seconds.
- Temporaryinterruption: between3 secondsand I minute.
• IEEE Std.1250-1995
This standardwas publishedat about the same time asIEEE Std.1159-1995,
but it usessomewhatdifferent definitions. The differenceis especiallystriking
for interruptions.
- Instantaneousinterruption: between0.5 and 30 cycles(half a second).
- Momentaryinterruption: between30 cyclesand 2 seconds.
- Temporaryinterruption: between2 secondsto 2 minutes.
- Sustainedinterruption: longer than 2 minutes.
• IEEE Std.859-1987
This somewhatolder standarddocumentgives definitions for terms relatedto
power system reliability. A distinction is made between different types of
outagesbased on theduration of the outage. This standarddoes not give
specific timerangesbut uses therestorationmethodto distinguishthe different
types. Although outages and interruptions are different phenomena(see
Section2.1.3) they arerelatedclosely enoughto comparethe terminology.
- Transientoutagesare restoredautomatically.
- Temporaryoutagesare restoredby manualswitching.
- Permanentoutagesare restoredthrough repair or replacement.
overheadline. The lightning stroke injects a very highcurrentinto the line causinga
very fast rising voltage. The lightning current varies between 2and 200 kA in peak
value. Thetypical lightning currenthas apeakvalue of [peak = 20 kA which isreached
within IlJ,s after its initiation. If the wave impedanceZ",ave of the line is 2000, the
voltage cantheoreticallyreach a valueof
Vpeak = -2-Ipeak
Z"'ave = 1000 x 20 kA = 2 MV (3.1)
The voltagewill never reach such a value in reality (with the possibleexceptionof
transmissionsystems withoperatingvoltagesof 400 kV or higher), because flashovera
to groundor betweentwo phaseswill resultlong before thevoltagereachessuch a high
value. The result is anarcing fault betweenone phaseand ground or between two or
morephaseswith or without ground.Soonafter the protectionremoves thefaultedline
from the system, the arc disappears.A utomatic reclosingwill restorethe supplywithout
any permanentd amageto the system.
Also, smallerobjectscausinga temporarypath to groundwill only cause atran-
sient shortcircuit. The object(e.g., a smallb ranchfallen from a tree) willeitherdrop to
the ground or evaporatedue to the highcurrentduring the fault, leaving only an arc
which disappearsagainsoonafter the protectionintervenes.The durationof an inter-
ruption due to a transient fault can thus be enormouslyreduced by automatically
restoringthe supply after an interruption. In caseof a fault somewhereon the feeder,
the circuit breakeropensinstantaneouslyand closesagainafter a "reclosinginterval"
or "dead time" ranging from lessthan one second up to several minutes.There is of
coursea risk that the fault wasnot a transientone but permanent.In that case the
protectionwill againnotice a largeovercurrentafter reclosureleadingto a secondtrip
signal.Often the reclosergives the fault a second chanceat extinguishing,by meansof a
longer tripping time and/ora longer reclosinginterval.
3.3.2 Fus.Saving
/Lateral
Recloser
J
Distribution
substation
f---- 1
Voltage sag
r •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1
~
-
Short
interruption Figure 3.2 RMS voltageduring a recJosure
sequence on the faulted feeder (solid line) and
+----..~
A
-------.
B
Time on thenonfaultedfeeder(dashedline). A =
fault-clearingtime; 8 = reclosing interval.
Section 3.3 • Originof Short Interruptions 119
120~ E I
i :ft!
Duration
~[C
0.050 s
Min 65.80
I
Ave 90.10
Max 100.5
60 0- -0.05-0-'-.1--0......
L
' - 15 0.2 0.25 0.3
Time(seconds)
150
lIOO
'~ 50
f 0
~ -50 ~
-1000 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
Time(milliseconds)
(a) Uplinemonitoringlocation
~100
o I
J
Jil_.. . ._..,.. . .~ :
120[ lJ
234 5 6
Duration
4.983 s
Min 2.257
Ave 8.712
Max 100.2
Time(seconds)
J_;; I
When comparingFig. 3.2 and Fig. 3.3, note t hat the horizontalaxis of Fig. 3.2 is
not to scale, B is much largerthan A. This is the typicalsituation. The fault-clearing
time (A) is only a few cycles, whereas the reclosing time (B) can be up to several
minutes.
Anotherexample of theinitiation of a shortinterruptionis shown in Fig. 3.4 [3].
We seethat the voltagemagnitudeinitially drops to about 25% of nominal and to
almost zero after three cycles. The spikes in the voltage are due to the arc becoming
instablearoundthe currentzero-crossing.Apparentlythe arc gets more stable after two
cycles.
The momentthe circuit breakerin Fig. 3.1 opens, the feeder and the load fed from
it are no longer supplied. The effect of this normally
is that the voltagedrops to zero
very fast. There are, however,
situationsin which the voltagedrops to zero relatively
slow, or even remains at nonzerovalue.
a Thelatter would strictly speakingnot be an
120 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
150
100
,-... 50
e 0
~
l!
~ -50
-100
-150
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
Time inmilliseconds
Figures 3.5, 3.6, and 3.7 show some results of analysis ofdataobtainedby
the a
large North American survey [68]. Figure 3.5 gives theinterruption frequency as a
function of theinterruptionduration. Each vertical bar gives the average
numberof
interruptionsper year, with aduration in the given interval. The average
numberof
interruptionshas beenobtainedas follows:
3.5
j
>. 3
!
~ 2.5
5
~ 2
tt=
8
',= 1.5
~
-- .
B I
~
•
-
0.5
o O-Ie - -
2-3c 4-5c 6-IOc 20e-0.5s 1-2s 5-108
II
30-60s 120s-
Durationof interruption
Figure 3.5 Interruption frequency (number of interruptions per year) as a function
of interruption duration. (After data obtained from Dorr
[68].)
122 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
(3.2)
where Nfl') is the numberof events in ranger observedby monitor i during a monitoring
interval T;, and FIr)
the resulting averageas plotted in Fig. 3.5. We see from Fig. 3.5
that the typical eventhas aduration between 1and 30 seconds.Eventsshorterthan six
cycles (100 ms) are very unlikely. These "very short interruptions"are most likely due
to short-circuit faults close to themonitor position. One should realize that in this
survey anevent is recordedas an interruption if the rms voltage somewhereduring
the eventdrops below 100~ of nominal. Note also that the horizontal scale is non-
homogeneous.F rom the data shown in Fig. 3.5 one cancalculate the probability
densityfunction of the interruption duration by dividing each value by the sum of all
values:
N(r)
(k)
The resultingprobability distribution function is presentedin Fig. 3.6. This curve gives
the fraction of interruptionswith a durationnot exceeding theindicatedvalue. We see
that 10% of interruptionslasts lessthan 20 cycles,and 80% of interruptionslessthan 2
minutes(thus 20% morethan2 minutes).From an equipmentpoint of view the reverse
dataare of more interest,the fraction of interruptions(or the absolutenumber)lasting
longer than a given duration. This will give information about the numberof times a
device will trip or (for a givenmaximum trip frequency)about the immunity require-
mentsof the device.Figure3.7 plots the numberof interruptionsper yearlastinglonger
than the indicatedvalue. Apart from a small shift (due to thediscretizationof the data)
1.2,..------------------..-,
s=
o
.~
.&J 0.8
'Een
:.a
~0.6
:.0
.se 0.4
c..
0.2
O................
-==~:::...J----'-___L.---L---Jl.._._.L...._.J..._...L._....L_..J......_.J
Figure 3.6 Probability distribution function
Ic 3e 5e JOe 0.5s 2s lOs 60s info of interruption duration. (From the data in
Duration Fig. 3.5.)
Section 3.4 • Monitoring of Short Interruptions 123
18,..--------------------,
16
r------ __
~ 14
g.~ 12
~ 10
5
.~ 8
j 6
4
2
OL--..a...-....&..-_'___....I----£--L..---L.-L----.I~J..__..&.___'___~_.I_.-L..___I
Figure 3.7 Number of interruptions lasting
longer than the indicated value. (From the
Oc 2c 4c 6c 20c Is 5s 30s 120s
data in Fig. 3.5.) Durationof interruption
TABLE 3.1 Interruption Frequency (number of events per year) for Three
Points in the U.S. Distribution System
Duration
Survey 1-6c 6-IOc lo-20c 20-30c 0.5-1 sec 1-2 sec 2-10 sec> 10 sec
EPRI substation 0.2 0.1 0.4 0.8 0.5 0.9 1.1 1.3
EPRI feeder 1.6 0.1 0.2 0.6 0.5 1.1 2.3 1.7
NPL low voltage 0.2 0.3 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.5 3.3 4.2
Duration
Survey 1-6c 6--IOc 10-20c 2Q-30c 0.5-1 sec 1-2 sec 2-10 sec > 10 sec
CEA primary side 1.9 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.7
CEA secondaryside 3.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.5 2.1
Duration
Survey 0.01-0.1 sec 0.1-0.5sec 0.5-1.0sec 1-3 sec 3-20 sec > 20 sec
Time
i
~
Q
Time Time
Go)
C)O
~
~
Figure3.8 Effect of a"five-minute filter" on
the voltage magnitude events. The figures on
Q
the left show the recorded rmsvoltages;the
figures on the right show the equivalent event
after thefilter. Time Time
Duration
Survey 1-6c 6-IOc 1(}-20c 2(}-30c 0.5-1 sec 1-2 sec 2-10 sec > 10 sec
slow down, that screensturn blank, etc. All this only lasts for a few seconds, but the
consequences can last much longer:disruptionof productionprocesses, lossof contents
of computermemory,evacuationof buildings due to fire alarms going off, and some-
times damagewhen the voltage comes back (uncontrolledstarting).
For most sensitiveequipment,there is no strictborderbetween a voltage sag and
an interruption:an interruptioncan be seen as a severe sag, i.e. one with remaining
zero
voltage. The effecto f voltage sags onequipmentis discussed in detail inChapter5.
Many of the conclusionsin thatchapteralso hold forshortinterruptions.In this section
only some general aspects of the load behaviorare pointedout.
• The low-impedancepath between the faulted phase and ground (the fault) is
still presentso that the voltage in the faulted phase remains zero or close to
zero. We will call this the"during-fault period."
• The fault hasextinguished,the short circuit has now become an o pencircuit
because thebreakerin that phase is still open. This we will call the
" post-fault
period."
Vb = (-~-~jJ3)E (3.5)
V(' = (-~+~jJ3)E
with E the magnitudeof the pre-eventvoltage. It has been assumed here that the pre-
event voltages form a balancedthree-phaseset,andthat the voltage in thefaulted phase
is exactly equal to zero. We will in most of the remainderof this book use per unit
voltages, with thepre-eventvoltagemagnitudeas base. Inthat case we getE = 1 and
(3.5) becomes
128 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
VlI=O
Vb =- ~ - ~jvS (3.6)
V =
c
_!+!J·vS
2 2
Va
........................•
(3.7)
The factor .J3 is needed because 1 puof the line(phase-to-phase)voltage is.J3 times as
big as I pu of the phase(phase-to-neutral)voltage. Themultiplication withj results in a
rotationover 90° suchthat the axisof symmetryof the disturbanceremainsalongphase
a and along the real axis. The transformationin (3.7) will be the basisof a detailed
analysisof unbalancedvoltage sags in theforthcomingchapters.When we leave away
the prime " weobtain the following expressions for the voltages due to single-phase
tripping at the terminalsof delta-connectedequipment:
Section 3.6 • Single-PhaseTripping 129
~
\ .•..
~~:
A
Vb /
/ .../.
Figure 3.10Phase-to-phase
voltages for
single-phase tripping. ,l
Va = 1
Vb = _!_!jJ3 (3.8)
2 6
Vc = -~+~jJ3
Figure 3.10 again shows the voltages at the equipment terminals in phasor-
diagramform. Using the definitions given in the variousstandardsthis shouldnot be
called ashort interruption but a voltage sag. It would again bring up the discussion
betweenconsequence-based terminologyand cause-based terminology.In the first case
this event would have to be called a voltage sag, in latter
the case it would be ashort
interruption. But no matterwhich name is given to the event, it is clearly less severe
than the effect ofthree-phasetripping, when all three phase voltages go down to zero.
An exception to this might have to be made for inductionmotors.The voltagesduring
single-phasetripping contain a large negative sequence voltage component(0.33 pu)
which may lead tooverheatingof induction motors. With a negative sequence impe-
dance 5through 10 times as small as the positive sequence impedance,the negative
sequencecurrent would become 170through 330% of the rated (positive sequence)
current.It is unlikely that inductionmotor load is able towithstandsuch anunbalance
for longer than several seconds.
Low-voltage customersalso experience the voltages in Fig. 3.10. None of the
customersexperiences a zero voltage, but two-thirds of the customersexperience an
event with aduring-eventvoltage of 580/0 magnitudewith a change in voltage phase-
angle of 30°.
3.8.2 Voltage-Poet-Pault
Period
When the fault extinguishes, the situation in the faulted phase changes from a
short circuit to an open circuit. In many cases a change in voltage occurs, thus the
resulting voltage is no longer equal to zero. The voltage in the faulted
phasedependson
the typeof load connected. Tocalculatethis voltage we need to considerthe coupling
between the phases or use the theory of symmetricalcomponents.The latter, which is
normally used for the analysis of nonsymmetricalfaults, isdescribedin detail in many
reference books. A good and detailed descriptionof the useof symmetricalcomponents
for the analysis ofnonsymmetricalfaults is, e.g., given in reference [24], and is not
repeatedhere.
To analyze an open circuit, the system has to be modeled as seen from the open-
circuit point. This results in three
equivalentcircuits: for the positive sequence, for the
130 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
s, ~V:J
c~V2:J
6. Vb =0
6. Vi' = 0 (3.9)
III =0
II + 12 + /0 = 0
6. VI = 6.V2 (3.10)
6. VI = 6. Vo
1
6. VI = 6.V 2 = 6.Vo = 1 + 2 Ll +ZS) + Z LI +2
SI
(3.11)
3
~ Va = ~ VI + ~ V2 + ~ Vo = 1 + Z Ll + ZSI + ZLl + ZSJ (3.12)
V -1- 3 (3.14)
a-I 2 Ll ZLI
+-+-
ZLO ZL2
Va = I - 1 hI (3.15)
3(YL 1 + YL2 + YLO)
From (3.15) the voltage experienced by the load during the interruptioncan be found
for different types of load. As can be seen it is the ratio between the sequence impe-
dancesof the load whichdeterminesthe voltage. The source impedancedoes have a
small influence as the load c urrent will give a voltage drop between the load and the
open-circuitpoint. This influence was neglected when going from (3.12) to (3.13).
va . -- .....••••••••••·•••••
Figure 3.13Phase-to-groundvoltagesduring
single-phase reclosure with
delta-connected
load .
..
.. :
3.6.2.3 Motor Load. For motor load, a typical load inindustrial systems and
in some public systems, the
zero-sequenceimpedanceis again infinite, and the nega-
tive sequenceimpedanceis smaller than the positive-sequenceimpedance: YL2 > YLI
and YLO = o. The resulting expression for the open-phase voltage is, with
YL2 = YYLI
y-2
V =-- (3.18)
a y+ I
For y = 1, whichcorrespondsto staticdelta-connectedload, we againobtain Va = -!,
for y = 2 we obtain Va = O. A typical rangeof the-ratiobetween positive and negative
sequenceimpedanceis: y = 3··· 10 resulting in Va = 0.25···0.73. When theinduction
motors slow down, the negative sequence impedancestays about the same while the
positive sequenceimpedancebecomes smaller, until they are equal when motor the has
come to astandstill.From equation(3.18) we canconcludethat the open-phasevoltage
decays wheny gets smaller, thus when the motorsslow down. Theopen-phasevoltage
0AJ and 700/0 of the pre-faultvoltage,
for a system withmotor load is initially between 50
Section 3.6 • Single-Phase
Tripping 133
Va = V
Vb = _!_!jY'3 (3.19)
2 2
Vc = _!+!jY'3
2 2
Using the transformationas defined by (3.7), we get for the line voltages (i.e., the
voltages experienced by delta-connected
a load)
(3.20)
I 2
Va =-+-V
3 3
Vb = - -1(1-+-V
2 ) --jY'3
I (3.21)
2 3 3 2
1 (1-+-V
V.=-- 2 ) +-jY'3
1.
c 2 3 3 2
The resulting voltages fordifferent types of load are summarizedin Table 3.5. The
transferof this kind of voltage events to lower voltage levels is discussedmuchmore
in
detail in Section 4.4.Therewe will denotethe voltage events in(3.19), (3.20),and (3.21)
t
as sags of type B withmagnitudeV, of type C with magnitude + ~ V, and of type D
with magnitude!+ ~ V, respectively.
134 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
Va = J Va = J Va = I Va = J
Va =! Va=0 Va =~ Va =!
As we have seen in the previous section, the voltage in the faulted phase
duringthe
post-fault period is not necessarily zero. Anonzerovoltage after fault extinguishing
implies a nonzerocurrent while the fault is present. This makes fault extinguishing
more difficult.
To calculate the fault current after single-phasetripping but before the fault
extinguishes, weconsider the circuit in Fig. 3.15. Source and load impedancesare
indicatedby the same symbols as before. Voltages and currentsat the system side of
the openpoint are indicatedas Va' Vb, etc., and at the load side asV~, V;" etc.
The electricalbehavior of this system can be described through 12 equations,
three equationsdescribing the source (with again £] = 1):
l-ZSlI] = V]
-Zs212 = V2 (3.22)
-ZsoIo = Vo
r; = ZLll{
V~ = ZL2I~ (3.23)
Vo = ZLolo
Section 3.6 • Single-Phase
Tripping 135
ZS2
Zso
Figure 3.15 Single-phase tripping with the
short circuit still present.
V~ =0
v; = Vb (3.24)
V; = Ve
and threecurrentequationsat the open point:
fa =0
fb =Ib (3.25)
t, = l~
If we neglect thesourceimpedances,the voltagesat the systemside of the open point
are equalto the sourcevoltages:
VI =1
V2 =0 (3.26)
Vo =0
From (3.24) relationscanbe obtainedbetweenthe componentvoltageson both sidesof
the openpoint:
I 2 I 1
VI = 3" VI -"3 V2 - "3 Vo
I 1 2 1
V2 = -"3 VI +"3 V2 - "3 Vo (3.27)
I 1 1 2
Vo = -"3 VI -"3 V2 + "3 Vo
With (3.26), thecomponentvoltagesat the load side of the open point can be found.
Togetherwith (3.23) and I~ = I~ + 11 + 12we obtain an expressionfor the fault current
after single-phasetripping:
, 2 1 1
I a =- - - - - - - - (3.28)
3ZL1 3ZL2 3ZLO
We seethat the currentdependson the load impedancesin positive, negative,and zero
sequence.As these impedancesare significantly larger than the source impedances
(typically a factor of 10 to 20) thecurrent becomesmuch smaller than the original
fault current.This certainlyhelps theextinguishingof the fault, but still the fault is most
likely to extinguishwhen thecurrentis close tozero,thuswhen: 2YLt ~ YL2 + YLO with
YL l = -Zl,
LO
etc. Not surprisingly this is also thecondition for which the voltage after
fault extinguishingis zero, accordingto (3.15).
136 Chapter3 • Short Interruptions
• The failure rate of the main feeder is:0.1 faults per year per kmof feeder.
• The failure rate of the lateral conductorsis: 0.25 faults per year per kmof
feeder.
• The success rate o f the first reclosureis 75%; thus, in25% of the cases asecond
trip and reclosureare needed.
• The success rate o f the secondattemptis 100/0 of the numberof faults. Thus,
for 15% of the faults thesecondattemptdoesnot clear the fault.Thosefaults
are "permanentfaults" leadingto a long interruption.
Lateral0: 3 km Lateral C: 7 km
Recloser l----
]] km of main feeder
• --Fuses
Each fault will lead to a voltage magnitudeevent. There are four different events
possible:
• 750/0 = 5.0 per year needone trip, leading to one short interruption for all
customers.
• 100/0 = 0.7 per year need two trips,
leadingto two short interruptionsfor all
customers.
• 15% = 1.0 per year arepermanent,leadingto two shortinterruptionsfollowed
by a voltagesag or followed by a longinterruption.
5.0/yearof 1 secondduration.
0.7/yearof 1+ 5 secondsduration.
• main: 0.17/year
• lateral A: 0.17 + 0.3 = 0.47/year
• lateral B: 0.17 + 0.15 = 0.32/year
• lateral C: 0.17 + 0.26 = 0.43/year
• lateral D: 0.17 + 0.11 = 0.28/year
• main: Lljyear
• lateral A: 3.1/year
• lateral B: 2.I/year
• lateral C: 2.9/year
• lateral D: 1.9/year
4.1 INTRODUCTION
Voltage sags areshort duration reductionsin rms voltage, caused by short circuits,
overloads, andstartingof largemotors.The interestin voltage sags is mainly due to the
problems they cause on several typesequipment:adjustable-speed
of drives, process-
control equipment,and computersare notoriousfor their sensitivity. Some pieces of
equipmenttrip when the rms voltagedrops below 900/0 for longer than one or two
cycles. In this and the two following chapters,it will become clearthat such a piece of
equipmentwill trip tens of times a year.I f this is theprocess-controlequipmentof a
papermill, one can imaginethat the damagedue to voltage sags can be enormous.Of
course a voltage sag is not damagingto
as industryas a (long orshort)interruption.But
as there are far more voltage sags thaninterruptionsthe total damagedue to sags is still
larger. Short interruptionsand most longinterruptionsoriginatein the localdistribu-
tion network. However, voltage sags at equipmentterminalscan be due toshort-circuit
faults hundredsof kilometers away in thetransmissionsystem. A voltage sag is thus
much more of a"global" problem than an interruption. Reducing the number of
interruptionstypically requiresimprovementson one feeder.Reducingthe numberof
voltage sags requires improvementson several feeders, and often eventransmission
at
lines far away.
An exampleof a voltage sag due to short-circuitfault
a is shown in Fig. 4.1. We
seethat the voltageamplitudedropsto a valueof about20% of the pre-eventvoltage
for abouttwo cycles. After these two cycles the voltage comes back aboutthe
to pre-sag
voltage. Thismagnitudeand duration are the maincharacteristicsof a voltage sag.
Both will be discussed in more detail in the forthcomingsections. We can also conclude
from Fig. 4.1that magnitudeand durationdo not completelycharacterizethe sag. The
during-sagvoltage containsa rather large amount of higher frequencycomponents.
Also the voltage shows a small overshootimmediatelyafter the sag.
Most of the currentinterestin voltage sags isdirectedto voltage sags due to short-
circuit faults. These voltage sags are the ones which cause majority
the of equipment
trips. But also thestartingof inductionmotorsleads to voltage sags. Figure4.2 gives an
139
140 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
--~--~-~--~-·- - ·r ·- ·- -· · _ · - · --,
Phase A voltage
106
..
: :
.. , ,
.... Min:
'1'.......... Max: 93.897
I-
5 102
t
104 ..
~
---_ .
I- . .. . . ... ........ ... ... . .+...........- . . ... . . ..
............-...................1"....................-..........-...... 101.46 .....
-
e
CI) 96 I- . . .. . .. .. .... .........."":;;';;;;- ... -------- - --- ----~ ._ ._.- -- - -- --_ ._ -- - _. __ ._-_._-.-_.-.-----
~ ...............j.........................................j.........................................
94 I- ..... ~
50 100 150
Time-cycles
example of such a voltage sag [19]. Comparingthis figure with Fig. 4.1 shows that no
longer theactualvoltage as afunction of time is given but the rms voltage versus time.
The rms voltage is typicallycalculatedevery cycle or half-cycleof the power system
frequency. Voltage sags due induction
to motor startinglast longerthan those due to
short circuits. Typicaldurationsare seconds to tens of seconds. The remainderof this
chapterwill concentrateon voltage sags due to shortcircuits. Voltage sags due to
motor
startingwill be discussed inshort in Section 4.9.
4.2.1 Monitoring
1 N
-Lv?
N ;=1 I
(4.1)
where N is the numberof samples per cycle and V; are the sampled voltages in time
domain.
The algorithm described by (4.1) has been applied to the sag shown in . 4.1.
Fig
The results are shown in Fig..34and in Fig. 4.4. In Fig. 4.3 the rms voltage has been
calculated over a window of one cycle, which was 256 samples for the recording used.
Each point in Fig. 4.3 is the rms voltage over the preceeding 256 points (the first 255
rms values have been made equal to the value for sample: 256)
1.2,--~--,---
0.8
5..
.S
~ 0.6
S
~ 0.4
0.2
1.2,--~--.,.---
0.8
5..
.S
~ 0.6
~
~
.,. 0.4 '
, .
2 3 4 5
Figure4.4 Half-cycle rms voltagefor the Time in cycles
voltage sagshownin Fig. 4.1.
142 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
i=k
Vrmik) = N L
i=k-N+t
1?; (4.2)
with N = 256. We see that the rms voltage does not immediatelydrop to a lower value
but takes one cycle for thetransition.We also seethat the rms value during the sag is
not completelyconstantand that the voltage does not immediately recover after the
fault. A surprisingobservationis that the rms voltage immediately after the fault is only
about90% of the pre-sag voltage. We will come back to this phenomenonin Section
4.9. From Fig. 4.1 one can see that the voltage in time domain shows a small over-
voltage instead. In Fig. 4.4 the rms voltage has been calculated over the preceeding 128
points, N = 128 in (4.2). Thetransition now takes place in one half-cycle. sAhorter
window than one half-cycle is not useful. The window length has to be an integer
multiple of one half-cycle. Anyother window length will produce an oscillation in
the result with a frequency equal to twice the
fundamentalfrequency.For both figures
the rms voltage has been calculated after each sample. In power quality
monitors,this
calculationis typically made once a cycle:
i=kN
VrmikN) = N L
i=<k-l)N+l
v~ (4.3)
It is thus very likely that themonitor will give one value with anintermediatemagni-
tude before its rms voltage value settles down. We will come back to this when discuss-
ing sagduration.
, , I
Figure4.5 Magnitudeof the fundamental 2 3 4 5 6
Time in cycles
componentof the voltage sag in ig.
F 4.1.
This algorithm has beenapplied to the voltage sagshownin Fig. 4.1, resultingin Fig.
4.6. The transition from pre-fault to during-voltageis clearly fasterthan in Fig. 4.5.
Note that this method assumesthat there is no de voltagecomponentpresent.The
presence of a de voltagecomponentwi11lead to anerror in the fundamentalvoltage.
An alternativemethod of obtaining the fundamentalvoltage componentis dis-
cussed in Section 4.5.
Vpeak = 0 <max
r < T v(t - r) I I (4.7)
6.
.S
I
==l
1lc:
8. 0.8
E
o
<.>
~ 0.6
~
(
Figure 4.6 Magnitudeof the fundamental
.E
....o
]'"
.~
0.4
1.2 I,---~--~-~--~-~~--,
0.8
50
.5
~ 0.6
L
~
~
0.4
0.2
234 5 6
Time in cycles Figure4.7 Half-cycle peak voltage for the
voltage sag shown i n Fig. 4.1.
with v(t) the sampled voltage waveform andT an integer multiple of one half-cycle. In
Fig. 4.7, for each sample the
maximum of the absolutevalue of the voltage over the
preceding half-cycle has been
calculated.We seethat this peak voltage shows sharp
a
drop and asharprise, althoughwe will see laterthat they do not coincide with com-
mencement and clearing of the sag.
Contraryto the rms voltage, the peak voltage shows
an overshootimmediately after the sag, which correspondsto the overvoltage in time
domain. The two methods are comparedin Fig. 4.8. We seethat the peak voltage tends
to be higher most of the time with the exception of the end of the deep
part of the sag.
,,
,
,,
:::l 0.8 ,
0. ,,
.5 ,
~ 0.6 ,,
s ,
,,
~ 0.4
0.2
Figure4.8 Comparisonbetweenhalf-cycle
peak (solid line) andhalf-cycle rms voltage
2 3 4 5 6 (dashed line) for the voltage sag shown in
Time in cycles
Fig. 4.1.
f-:~
al ~
~ 0 I 2 3 456
al0 ~
c:
.;;
OIl I '
~- I l ' , ~
0123456
~I VVV\IVYJ
';;
OIl
0
19 - )
Figure 4.9 Time-domainplot of a one-cycle ~
sag, plots of the three phase voltages
. (Data 0) 23456
Time in cycles
obtainedfrom [16J.)
io:~:
~ 00 I 2 3
.:I
4 5 6
1:l l ~
~ I
0
-'I
:
o 2 3 4 5 6
ko:I======
~~-~'-~,~~,
o 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 4.10Half-cycle rms voltages for the Time in cycles
voltage sag shown in Fig. 4.9.
I.2 f
:> 0.8
0..
.5
1iI> 0.6
S
~ 0.4
0.2
a I [_ ~ -- '
.5 !
C
~
8. 0.8
E
o
o
'3 0.6
eE
.jg
~ 0.4
e-
o
]" 0.2
.~
~ 0 L
: . ~~_~ _ _ ~ _ _ ~ _ _ ~_--'
234 5 6
Time in cycles Figure 4.12 Half-cyclefundamentalvoltage
for phase bof the sag shown in ig.
F 4.9.
A fault at position 3 will cause a very deep sag for customer D, followed by a
short or longinterruption when theprotectionclears the fault.CustomerC will only
experience a deep sag. If fast reclosure is used indistribution
the system, customer C
will experience two or more sags shortly after each other forpermanentfault.
a
Customer B will only experience a shallow sag due to the fault at position 3, again
due to thetransformerimpedance.CustomerA will probably not notice anything from
this fault. Finally, fault 4 will cause a deep sag for customer C and a shallow one for
customer D.For fault 5 the result is just the other way around: a deep sag for customer
D and a shallow one for customer C. Customers A and B will not be influenced at all by
faults 4 and 5.
To quantify sag magnitude in radial systems, the voltage divider model, shown in
Fig. 4.14, can be used. This might appeara rather simplified model, especially for
transmission systems. But as we will see in the course of this and further chapters, it
has turned out to be a rather useful model to predict some of the properties of sags. In
Fig. 4.14 we see two impedances: Zs is the source impedance point-of-common
at the
coupling; and ZF is the impedance between the point-of-commoncoupling and the
fault. The point-of-commoncoupling is the point from which both the fault and the
load are fed. In other words: it is the place where the load
currentbranches off from the
fault current. We will often abbreviate"point-of-commoncoupling" as pee, In the
voltage divider model, the load current before as well as during the fault is neglected.
There is thus no voltage drop between the load and the pee. The voltage at the pee, and
thus the voltage at the equipment terminals, can be found from
ZF
(4.8)
v.rag=Z
s+ Z F E
In the remainder of this chapter, we will assume that the pre-event voltage is exactly 1
pu, thus E = 1. This results in the following expression for the sag magnitude
v = ZF (4.9)
sag ZS+ZF
Any fault impedance should be included in the feeder impedanceZF' We see from (4.9)
that the sag becomes deeper for faults electrically closer to the customer ZF (when
Zs becomes larger).
becomes smaller), and for systems with a smaller fault level (when
Note that a single-phase model has been used here, whereas in reality the system is
three-phase. That means that thisequationstrictly speaking only holds for three-phase
faults. How the voltage divider model can be used for single-phase and phase-to-phase
faults is discussed in Section 4.4.
Equation(4.9) can be used to calculate the sag magnitude as a function of the
ZF = Z x E, with z the impedance of
distance to the fault. Therefore we have to write
£ the distance between the fault and the pee, leading to
the feeder per unit length and
E
Fault
v _ z£
(4.10)
sag - Zs + z£
The sagmagnitudeas afunction of the distanceto the fault has been calculatedfor a
typical 11kV overheadline, resulting in Fig. 4.15. For the calculationsa 150mnr'
overheadline was used and fault levels of 750 MVA, 200 MVA, and 75 MVA. The
fault level is used tocalculatethe sourceimpedanceat the pee, the feederimpedanceto
calculatethe impedancebetween the pee and the fault. It was assumed that the source
impedanceis purely reactive, thusZs =jO.161 n for the 750 MVA source. The impe-
dance of the 150mrrr'overheadline is 0.117+ jO.315 Q per km [10].
As expected, the sag magnitudeincreases (i.e., the sag becomes less severe) for
increasingdistanceto the fault and forincreasingfault level. We also see t hat faults at
tensof kilometersdistancemay still cause a severe sag.
0.8 1
:s
e,
75MVA
I
.5
-8 0.6
a
.~
e 0.4
fI)
~
0.2
0.8
)9---T~
300
.5
6- 1/
] 0.6
.~
e0.4
f
fI)
0.2
50
0.8 150
8-
.5 300
~ 0.6
a
.~
e 0.4
~
en
0.2
Figure4.17 Sagmagnitudeversusdistance,
5 10 15 20 25 for II kV undergroundcableswith different
Distance to the fault in kilometers cross sections.
Impedance
pee 132kV
132 kV line
Load
Figure 4.18Powersystem with faults at two
voltage levels. 33 kV line
Faultsat 33 kV
0.8
Faultsat 132kV
0.2
4.2.2.3 Fault Levels. Often the sourceimpedanceat a certain bus isnot imme-
diately available, but insteadthe fault level is. One canof coursetranslatethe fault
level into a sourceimpedanceand use (4.9) tocalculatethe sagmagnitude.But one
may calculatethe sagmagnitudedirectly if the fault levelsboth at the peeand at the
fault position are known. LetSFLT be the fault level at the faultposition and Spec at
the point-of-commoncoupling. For a rated voltage Vn the relationsbetween fault le-
vel and sourceimpedanceare as follows:
(4.11)
152 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
SPCC=-
V,; (4.12)
Zs
With (4.9) the voltage at the pee can be
written as
Vsag -- I _ SFLT
(4.13)
Spec
400 V 20 MVA
11 kV 200 MVA
33 kV 900 MVA
132 kV 3000 MVA
400 kV 17000MVA
Considera fault at a typical11 kV bus, i.e., with a fault levelof 200 MVA. The voltage
sag at thehigh-voltageside of the 33/11kV transformeris from (4.13)
200 MVA 0
v,wg = 1 - 900 MVA = 78Yo
In a similar way the wholeof Table 4.2 has been filled. The zeros in this table
indicatethat the fault is at the same or at a higher voltage level. The voltage
dropsto a
low value in such a case. We can see from Table 4.2 that sags are significantlydamped
when theypropagateupwardsin the power system. In a sagstudy we typically only
have to take faults one voltage level down into account.And even those are seldom of
seriousconcern.An exceptionherecould be sags due to faults at 33kV with a pee at
132kV. They could lead to sags down to 70o~.
Point-of-CommonCoupling
(4.14)
-._ - ---_._ - --
. USA [II]
• USA [12]
• UK [13]
x Norway [16]
- Theory
Slines 8 lines
r - - -_ _
P
---.
J\O-400
--ill
EGG-400
3 feeders
TABLE 4.3 Source Impedance for the Supply Shown in Fig. 4.21, at a 100
MVA Base
TABLE 4.4 Feeder Data for the Supply Shown in Fig. 4.21
TABLE 4.6 Critical Distance Calculation for the Network Shown in Fig.
4.21, According to (4.14)
)
11 kV faults
,.-----...---,
33 kV faults
I:
0.5
I'\v Local
generation
Load
Figure 4.23 Connection of a local generator
to a distribution bus.
Section 4.2 • Voltage Sag Magnitude 157
Vmin =2 3Z3
+2
4
(4.17)
For the above-mentioned system, where the local generatoris responsiblefor 50%
of the fault level at thegeneratorbus, the lowest sagm agnitudedue to a fault at a
higher voltagelevel is 50% • During a fault not only local generatorscontributeto the
fault but also induction motors. Using the abovereasoningwe can concludethat the
minimum voltage at the plant bus equalsthe relative fault levelc ontribution of the
induction motors. We will discussinduction motorsin more detail in Section 4.8.
pee--'---.---'--
Load
Public supply
66 kV, 1700MVA
Faulted
---a._..........._....--a_.L--1_1_k_V,_720 MVA feeder
0.: ~::-er-a--'t~-rs-----r----.----
i
.~a 0.6 I
Without generators
"'0'
'1 ~
~
0.4
V}
0.2
oO~--w- 20 30 4'0
--.J
50 Figure 4.26 Sagmagnitudeversus distance,
Distanceto the faultin kilometers with and without on-site generator.
Section 4.2 • Voltage Sag Magnitude IS9
EXAMPLE Another exampleof the useof (4.16) is given bymeansof Fig. 4.27. This
figure representshalf of the transmissionsystem part of the examplein Fig. 4.21, containing
the substationsPAD-400 and EGG·400,plus 30 km of overhead400kV line in betweenthem.
The impedanceshave thefollowing values (in % at a 100 MVA base), withE the distancebe-
tween EGG-400and the fault:
Zt = 1.4%
Z2 = 0.OI8% / k m x £
2 3 = 0.54%
Z4 == 1.940/0
The impedance2 4 representsthe sourcecontributionfrom PEN-400at PAD-400; 2 3 represents
the impedanceof 30 km line (0.018%/km); 2 2 the impedancebetweenEGG-400and the fault,
and Zt the contribution through the non-faultedlines at EGG-400(excluding the contribution
from PAD-400) during the fault. The latter impedanceis likely to be different for faults on
different lines. In this study we assumedit to be simply equal to the contribution of all lines at
EGG-400minusthe line toPAD-400.As thereare atotal of nine linesconnectedto EGG-400the
error madewill not be very big.
Fault
Figure 4.27 Circuit diagramrepresentation
of two transmissionsubstations.The sensitive
load is fed from thesubstationon the left. Load
For faults to the right of EGG-400we can use (4.16) tocalculatethe voltageat PAD-400,
knowing the voltageat EGG-400.The latter can be obtainedfrom the voltagedivider equation
with the sourceimpedanceformed by the parallel connectionof 2, and 2 3 + Z4' Note that we
still neglect all loadcurrents,so that both sourcevoltagesare equal in magnitudeand in phase
and can bereplacedby one source. For faults betweenPAD-400 and EGG-400'the voltage
divider model will give the required voltage directly. The sourceimpedanceis now formed by
2 4; the feederimpedanceis O.018% / k m x C. with E the distancebetweenPAD-400and the fault.
The resultingsag magnitudeas afunction of the distanceto the fault isshown in Fig. 4.28. For
0.8
5.
.S
] 0.6
'ts 0.4
~
r.n
0.2
I
I
Figure 4.28 Sagmagnitudeas afunction of , I ----1.-------':
the distanceto the fault, for transmission 20 40 60 80 100
systems. Distance to the fault in kilometers
160 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
distances up to 30 km the sagmagnitudechanges with distance like in a radial system; for larger
distances themagnitudeincreases faster. Thus, the sag is less severe than for a fault at the same
distance in a radial system.
Subtransmission
To calculate the sagmagnitudewe need to identify the load bus, the faulted
branch, and the non-faulted branch. Knowing these theequivalent scheme in Fig.
4.30 isobtained,where Zo is the sourceimpedanceat the bus from which the loop is
fed; Zl is the impedanceof the faulted branchof the loop; Z2 is the impedanceof the
non-faulted branch; and p is the position of the fault on the faultedbranch (p = 0
correspondsto a fault at the bus from which the load is fed, p = 1 correspondsto a
fault at the load bus).
From Fig. 4.30 the voltage at the load bus can calculated,resulting
be in the
following expression:
v _ p(l-p)Zr
(4.18)
sag - ZO(ZI + Z2) + pZ t Z 2 + p(l - p)Z?
Fault
pZl 1 (I - p)ZJ
Load
Figure 4.30 Equivalent circuit for
subtransmission loop.
Section 4.2 • Voltage Sag Magn
itude 161
EXAMPLE Consider the system shown in Fig . 4.31: a 125-km 132kV loop connect-
ing a number ofsubstations.Only the substationfeeding the load of interest is shown in the
figure. This substationis located at 25 km from the main substation. The fault level at the
point-of-supply is 5000 MVA and the feeder impedance 0.3 Qjkm. Faults occur both in the
25 km part and in the 100 km part of the loop , so that both may form the faulted branch . For
a fault on the 25 km branch we substitutein (4.18): Z\ = 25zand Z2 = 100z, with z the feeder
impedance per km. For a fault on the 100 km branch , we get Z\ 100z andZ2 25z. = =
132 kV
5000MVA . .....100km
......... .....:
J--- - ---,
0.8
So
=
~ 0.6
~ 0.4
e
~
en ,,
r
0.2 r
,,
,
' ~--
00 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Figure 4.32 Sagmagnitudesfor faults on a
Fault position
132kV loop.
We see from Fig. 4.32 and Fig. 4.33that each fault on the loop will cause the
voltage todrop below 50%of the nominal voltage. A sag due to a fault on a loop is
always lower than due to a fault on a radial feeder.
Faultsclose to thepoint-of-supply
will lead to a deep sag
. Faultsclose to the load too
. Somewhere in between there is a
162 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
5-
I':
:g 0.6
2
'10.41 ::: .:
ell
C':.'I
. •
: ,
en .,. ,
maximum magnitudeof the voltage sag due to a fault. The longer the line the higher the
maximum . We see from the figure that this maximumis not necessarily in the middle of
the branch. The maximum voltage has beencalculatedas a function of the system
parameters . The results are shown in Fig. 4.34 and in Fig. 4.35.obtainTo thesegraphs
(4.18) has been rewritten as a function of ZI = and Z2 = ¥ ¥;
Zt is the relative impe-
dance of the faulted branch and Z2 of the non-faulted bran~h. Figure 4.34 gives the
maximum voltage as afunction of Z2 for variousvalues of Zl and Fig. 4.35 theother
way around. From both figures it follows that the sags become less severe (higher
maximum) when the faultedbranch becomes longer (higherimpedance)and when
the non-faulted branch becomesshorter. This can be explained as follows. A longer
faulted branchmeansthat the fault can befurther away from both busses. Ashorter
non-faultedbranchgivesstrongervoltage supportat the load bus. These relations can
easily beunderstoodby consideringa fault in the middleof the faulted branch.
The rangeof values used forboth ZI and Z2 is between I and 10.For smaller
z,
valuesof the sagmagnitudebecomes very small. Larger values do not give realistic
systems. One has to realize i
that is proportional to the fault level at thepoint-of-
supply. Thus,Z\ and Z2 indicate the variation in fault level for different points in the
system. A valueof 10 impliesthat there is at least faactor of six between the highest and
the lowest fault level.(Note that the twobranchesareoperatedin parallel.)Such a large
4.2.4.3 Branches from Loops.W hen a load is fed from a loop, like the ones
discussed above, a fault on branch
a away from that loop will also cause a sag. In
that case it is often possible to model the system as shown in Fig. 4.36. The feeder to
the fault does not necessarily have to be a single feeder, but could,represent
e.g., the
effective impedanceof another loop. The equivalentcircuit for the system in Fig.
4.36 is shown in Fig. 4.37: 21 is the sourceimpedanceat the mainsubtransmission
bus; 22 is the impedancebetweenthat bus and the bus from which the load is fed;
2 3 is the impedance between the bus from which the load is fed and the bus from
which the fault is fed; 24 and 25 are the impedancesbetween thelatter bus and the
main subtransmissionbus and the fault, respectively. The voltage at the load bus is
found from
~~+~~+~~+~~
Vsag -- (4.19)
2 122 + 2,23 + 2\24 + 2 522 + 2 523 + 2 524 + 2 422 + 2 423
Subtransmission
Fault
Figure4.38 Industrial system withbreakerat
intermediatevoltagelevel closed (left) and
Load Load open(right).
ZI =0.048(2
Z2=4.75Q
Z3 = 4.36Q
2 4 = 0.388(2
Z5 = 0.3 Q/km x £,
Section4.2 • Voltage Sag Magnitude 165
Normally open
Normally closed
with £, the distancebetweenthe 11 kV busand the fault, and a feederimpedanceof 0.3 Q/km.
When the 11 kV breakeris closed,the systemcan be treatedlike a radial systemwith a source
impedanceequal to Z. +!
Z4 and a feederimpedanceequalto Z5' A comparisonbetweenthese
two ways of systemoperationis given in Fig. 4.39.Bus-splitting(operatingthe systemwith the
11 kV breaker normally open) clearly limits the influence of 11 kV faults on the load. The
improvementis especiallylarge for nearby faults. For faults further away from the 11 kV sub-
stationthe effectbecomessmaller.But industrialmedium-voltagesystemsare seldomlargerthan
a few kilometers.We will come back to this and other ways of mitigating sagsthrough system
design and operationin Chapter7.
4.2.4.4 Parallel Operation across Voltage Levels. In many countries the sub-
transmissionsystem is not fed from thetransmissionsystem at onepoint but at a
number of points, resulting in a systemstructuresimilar to the one shown in Fig.
4.40. Thenumberof supply points for the subtransmissionsystem varies from coun-
try to country. The 275kV systems in the U.K. are fed like this; also the 130kV sys-
tem in Sweden and the 150kV system in Belgium [23].
This typeof configurationcan betreatedlike a loop thatextends over two voltage
levels.For a fault within the loop we can apply (4.18), for a fault on a feeder away from
the loop (4.19) can be used. The equationsremain the same independentof the voltage
level at which the fault takes place. The only thing that changes are theimpedance
values.
Transmission
Subtransmission
Figure 4.40 Parallel operation of
transmission and subtransmissionsystems.
166 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
When the system becomes more complicatedthan the examples discussed pre-
viously, closed expressions for the voltage during the sag get complicatedand
very
unfeasible to handle.F or meshed systems, matrix calculations have proven to be
very efficient for computer-basedanalysis. Thecalculation of the voltagesduring a
fault is based on two principles from circuit theory:
Thevenin'ssuperpositiontheorem;
and the nodeimpedancematrix. Both are discussed in detail in many books on power
systems. Here we will only give a brief description.
with V the vector of (complex) node voltages and I the vectorof (complex)
node currents.The node voltage is the voltage between a node and the refer-
ence node (typicallyground). The nodecurrent is equal to the sumof all
currents flowing toward a node. For most nodes the node c urrent is zero
according to Kirchhoff's current law. The only exception aregenerator
nodes, where the node current is the currentflowing from the generatorinto
the system.
Considera system withN nodes plus a reference node. The voltages before the
fault are denoted as viO). A short-circuit fault occurs at nodef. According to
Thevenin'ssuperpositiontheorem we can write the voltageduring the fault at any
node k as
(4.21)
and
(4.24)
Section 4.2 • Voltage Sag
M agnitude 167
The pre-fault voltagesare normally close to unity, so that (4.24) can be approximated
by
(4.25)
The node admittancematrix can be built easily from thebranch admittancesor impe-
dances. Anoff-diagonalelement Yk1 of the nodeadmittancematrix is equalto minus the admit-
tanceof the branchbetween nodesk and I. The elementis zero ifthereis no branchbetween these
two nodes. Thediagonalelement Ykk equalsthe sumof all admittancesof branchesto node k
including any branchbetweennode k and the reference node. For the circuit in Fig. 4.41 this
calculationleads to the nodeadmittancematrix
=
Vs = 1 - Z52 = 1 _ 0.2730 0.1836 (4.28)
Z22 0.3344
168 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
Fault at Node
Voltage at Node 2 3 4 5
Table 4.7 gives the voltage at any node due to a fault atothernode.
any We see, e.g.,
that for node
5 a fault at node 2 is more severe than a fault at node 1. This
understandable
is as the source at
node 2 isstrongerthan the source at node l.
We have seen inSection4.2 that the drop in voltageduring a sag is due to a s hort
circuit being presentin the system. Themomentthe short-circuitfault is clearedby the
protection,the voltagecan return to its original value. Thedurationof a sag ismainly
determinedby the fault-clearingtime, but it may belongerthan the fault-clearingtime.
We will come back to thisfurther on in this section.
Generallyspeakingfaults in transmissionsystems arecleared fasterthanfaults in
distribution systems. Intransmissionsystems thecritical fault-clearing time is rather
small. Thus, fast protectionand fast circuit breakersare essential.Also transmission
and subtransmissionsystems arenormally operatedas a grid,requiring distancepro-
tection or differential protection,both of which are ratherfast. The principal form of
protectionin distribution systems isovercurrentprotection.This requiresoften some
time-gradingwhich increasesthe fault-clearingtime. An exceptionare systems in which
current-limiting fuses are used.Thesehave theability to clear afault within one half-
cycle [6], [7].
An overview of the fault-clearing time of various protectivedevices is given in
reference [8].
From this list it becomesclear that the sag duration will be longer when a sag originates
at a lower voltage level. Many utilities operatetheir distribution feedersin such a way
that most faults are clearedwithin a few cycles. Such a way of operation was discussed
in detail in Chapter 3. But even for those feeders,a certain percentageof faults will lead
to long sags. The difference between the two ways of operation is discussedin more
detail in Section 7.1.3.
1. Transmissionsystem faults
2. Remote distribution system faults
3. Local distribution system faults
4. Starting of large motors
5. Short interruptions
6. Fuses
lOO%
80%
0% ,,7---
Figure 4.42 Sags of different origin in a 0.1s Is
magnitude-duration
plot. Duration
170 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
Transmission network
due to the limitedlength of distribution feeders. When the fault occurs in remotea
distribution network, the sag will be much moreshallowdue to thetransformerimpe-
dancebetween the fault and the pee. For a fault in anydistribution network, the sag
durationmay be up to a few seconds.
Transmissionsystem faults are typically cleared within 50 to 100rns, thus leading
to short-durationsags.Current-limitingfuses lead to· sag d urationsof one cycle or less,
and rather deep sags if the fault is in the local distribution or low-voltage network.
Faultsin remotenetworks,clearedby current-limitingfuses, lead toshortand shallow
sags,not indicatedin the figure. Finally the figurecontainsvoltage sags due to m otor
starting,shallowand long duration(see Section 4.9)and shortinterruptions,deep and
long duration(seeChapter3).
t t f
Calculated X X
rmsvalues
Calculation
interval
~ Figure 4.44 Estimationof sag duration by
,,,
I I I power quality monitor for a two-cycle sag:
overestimationby one cycle(uppergraph);
Calculation instants correctestimation(lower graph).
Section 4.3 • Voltage Sag
D uration 171
1.2r - - - - r - - - - , - - - - - - - , - - - - - - - r - - - r - - - - - ,
I
'~I ",'\
;'~
I ,\
~ 0.6' :: :::
I , I " ::
,, '
I I I
I
,
\,
: :: : ,I I
S r I I I I I I I I " ,I '
~ :'::: , I' I I I I I
I • I I I I
It' ,
04 1 I I I t
,,'
.1
,, " ,I •
I
• ;:' I
,f """
" : ,\'l\:II,:
i
0.2 L .: :I~: "
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
I
I
oU
~ II : "~
, ~
'~.
" "
"
"
"
Figure 4.45 Half-cycle rms voltage together I
I
_---a....'_'-L..---L.~--...L--___L_:..____:._...:.J._l.___U.__---L-__:.J
with absolutevalue of the voltage(dashed o 1 234 5 6
line) of the sag shown inFig. 4.1. Timein cycles
172 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
Duration monitor 1
Time Figure 4.46 Error in sag
durationdue to
Duratio n monitor 2 post-fault sag.
Section 4.3 • Voltage SagDu ration 173
0.5
-0.5
- IL ~----:'=-----;';=---'
Figure4.47 Measuredsagwith a clear post- 5 15
fault component(Data obtainedfrom
o 10
Timein cycles
ScottishPower.)
0.8
6-
.S
ll>
;> 0.6
~
en
~ 0.4
0.2
5 10 15
Figure 4.48 The rms voltagesversustime for Timein cycles
the sagshownin Fig. 4.47.
12
10
c:
0
'p
8
~eo
oS
6
'"
-e
~
.~
e 4
\l.l
(4.30)
(4.31)
The voltagesin the threephasesat the peeduring the fault are obtainedby transform-
ing back from sequencedomain to phasedomain:
Va = VI + V2 + Vo
2
Vb = a VI + aV2 + Vo (4.32)
Vc = aVI + a2 V2 + Vo
For the faulted phasevoltage Va we get
Note that the expressionfor Va has been slightlyrewritten to explicitly obtain the
voltagedrop as aseparateterm.
Thesevoltagesare shownas aphasordiagramin Fig. 4.52. The voltagedrop in
the non-faultedphasesconsistsof three terms:
- a2ZS2 -aZsl
-zso \..\
\\Vc
(4.35)
Va = 1 _ Zso+ 2Zs1
(2Z F1 + 2 FO) + (2ZS1 + ZSO)
Vb = a2 _ ZSO - 22s 1
(2ZFJ + ZFQ) + (2Zs1 + Zso) (4.37)
V
c
=a _ Zso - 2Zs1
(22F1 + ZFO) + (22s 1 + ZSO)
The voltagedrop in .the non-faultedphases onlycontainsa zero-sequence component
(it is the same inboth phases). We will see later
that the zero-sequence componentof
the voltage is rarely ofimportancefor the voltage sag as experienced equipment
at
terminals. Sags at the same voltage level asequipment
the terminals are rare.During the
transfer of the sag down to lower voltage levels, thetransformersnormally block the
zero-sequence componentof the voltage. Even if the fault occurs at the same voltage
level as the equipment terminals, the
equipmentis normally connected in delta so it will
not notice the zero-sequencecomponentof the voltage. Thus the voltage drop in the
non-faultedphases is not ofimportancefrom an equipmentpoint of view. We can
therefore add a zero-sequence voltage to (4.37) suchthat the voltagedrop in the non-
faulted phases disappears. The resulting expressions are
The expression for the voltage in the faulted phase is somewhat rewritten, to enable a
comparisonwith (4.36):
(4.39)
178 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
Neutral
point Figure 4.53Three-phasevoltage divider
model.
EXAMPLE Consider again the system shown in Fig. 4.21, and assume that a single-
phase fault occurs on one of the 132 kV feeders. The 132 kV system is solidly grounded, there-
fore the positive- and zero-sequence source impedances are similar. For the feeders, the zero-
sequence impedance is about twice the positive- and negative- sequence impedance. Positive-
and negative-sequence impedance are assumed equal.
ZSI = ZS2 = 0.09+j2.86%
0.8 Single-phasefault
Three-phasefault
By using the above-given equations, the voltages in the three phases have been calculated for
single-phase as well as for three-phase faults. The results for the faulted phase are shown in Fig.
4.54. The difference is mainly due to the difference in feeder impedance. Note that it is assumed
here that the feeders are at least 50km long, where they are in reality only 2 km long. The zero-
sequence feeder impedance increases faster than the positive-sequenceimpedance, with increasing
distance to the fault. Therefore single-phase faults lead to slightly smaller voltage drops than
As we saw from the equations above, it is the average of the three sequence
three-phase faults.
impedances which determines the voltage drop due to single-phase faults. The voltages in the non-
faulted phases showed only a very small change due to the single-phase fault.
EXAMPLE The voltages due to single-phase faults have been calculated for the II
kV system in Fig.4.21. As this system is resistance grounded, the zero-sequence source impe-
dance is considerably larger than the positive-sequence impedance.
Note the large zero-sequence source impedance, especially its resistive part. The voltage in the
faulted phase for three-phase and single-phase faults is shown in Fig. 4.55 as a function of the
distance to the fault. The larger source impedance for single-phase faults more than compensates
the larger feeder impedance, which makes that single-phase faults cause deeper sags than three-
phase faults.
0.8 Three-phasefault
[
.S Single-phasefault
.s 0.6
·1
~ 0.4
f
tI)
0.2
1.8,..-----r------.,..-------r------,
1.6
~ 1.4
.S 1.2
t
Non-faultedphases
E 0.8
«)
I 0.6 Faultedphase
'0
:> 0.4
0.2 Figure 4.56 Voltage in the faulted and non-
faulted phases for a single-phase fault on an
0 20 11 kV feeder in Fig. 4.21, as a function of the
0 5 10 15
Distanceto the fault in
kilometers distance to the fault.
1.5...---....---........-----.----r----r----r-------.
,
~
«)
~,. 1\ ,
\
\
<a 0.5
\
\
,
i \
\~
~ 0 I .>
·st , I
I
E
....-0.5 /
I
v _ Va - Vb
ab - .J3
Vb - Vc
VIn· = .J3 (4.41)
_ V - Va
Vca - c.J3
1.05r - - - - - , - - - - - - r - - - - - - . - - - - - - - ,
a
.8
QJ
~
.~ 0.95
e
j
~ 0.9
1'-- -
0.8
a
.8
~ 0.6
.~
t 0.4
e I
/
/
f I
,,
I
(/)
0.2 ,,
,
,
,
I
Figure 4.59Phase-to-ground(dashed) and
phase-to-neutral
(solid) voltages due to single- 5 10 15 20
phase faults on an II kV feeder in Fig. 4.21. Distanceto the fault inkilometers
182 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
very small. As explained before, this is due to the large zero-sequence source impe-
dance. Also notethat the lowestphase-to-neutral
voltage occurs for anon-zerodistance
to the fault.
VI =E-E ZSI
(ZSl + 2 S2) + (2£1 + 2£2)
V - ZS2 (4.42)
2- (ZSI + ZS2)+ (Z£I + Z£2)
Vo =0
The phase voltages can be found from (4.42) by using (4.32). This results in the follow-
E = 1:
ing expressions, again with
Va = 1 _ ZSI - ZS2
(ZSl + ZS2)+ (2 F1 + 2£2)
2ZS1
V 2 a - aZS2
(4.43)
b =a - (2s1 + ZS2)+ (2F1 + 2 F2)
2ZS2
V =a _ aZSI - a
(ZSI + ZS2) + (2 F t
C
+ 2£2)
In thecalculationof the componentvoltages andcurrents,it has been assumed
that the
fault is between the phases
bandc. Thus a is thenon-faultedphase, andbandc are the
Section 4.4 • Three-Phase
Unbalance 183
faulted phases.F rom (4.43) we seethat the voltagedrop in the non-faulted phase
depends onthe difference between the positive and negative-sequence source impe-
dances. As these arenormally equal, the voltage in the
non-faultedphase will not be
influenced by the phase-to-phasefault. Under the assumption, ZSI = ZS2 (4.43)
becomes
Va = 1
2
Vb = a2 _ (a - a)Zsl
22s 1 + 2ZF1 (4.44)
(a2 - a)Zsl
Vc=a+-----
2Zs 1 +2ZF 1
We seethat the voltagedrop in the faulted phases is equal magnitude
in 2Z z;~z but
drop iss~loJg the
opposite in direction. The direction in which the two phase voltages
pre-fault phase-to-phase Vb - VC •
voltage between the faulted phases,
From (4.43) we can derive the following expression for the voltage between the
faulted phases
The resulting complex voltages are shown in Fig. 4.61. The circles and the arrows indicate the pre-
fault voltages; the cross indicates the voltages in the faulted phases for a fault at the 33 kV bus.
, ,,
I',' .
u ,
, 0.5 ,,
,,
~
~
,,
o ,
i 0 \------------~~_:.o
, ..
,,
.i
~-0.5 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• I
I,
1///
We see how the voltages in the two faulted phases movetowardeach other. Thedeviationof their
path from astraight line is due to the difference in
X /R ratio between source and feeder impe-
dance. This is a subject to be discussedfurther
in detail in Section 4.5.
A~
. · \· · B ~
~ -.
-. B·· .
V
FN
= _ (Zso + ZFO) - (ZSI + ZFt)
(4.50)
2(Zso + ZFO) + (ZSI + ZFI)
186 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
4----------- VF
-:
Figure 4.64 Three-phasevoltagedivider
model for a two-phase-to-groundfault.
r
VF~ =--
1 (4.52)
2
The latter expressioncorrespondsto the expressionobtainedfor phase-to-phase faults.
This isratherobviousif we realizethat a largezero-sequence i mpedanceimplies that the
fault currentthrough the earthreturn is very small.Thus, the presenceof a connection
with earthduring the fault does not influence thevoltages.
Pathof Vcn
Pathof Vbn
The intermediatecase, whereZSI < Zso < 00, gives a voltage at the faultpoint
somewhere in between these two extremes:
1
- - < VFN < 0 (4.53)
2
This voltage and theresultingvoltages at the pee can be obtainedfrom Fig. 4.65. The
voltage at the faultp oint is locatedbetween the origin and thepoint -!:
the former for
equal positive- negative-, and zero-sequence impedances,the latter for very large zero-
sequenceimpedance.The voltage at the pee for a faulted phasesomewhere is between
the voltage at the faultp oint and thepre-fault voltage in that phase. This knowledge
o f three-phaseunbalancedsags.For calculating
will later be used for the classification
sagmagnitudesthis constructionis not of practicaluse, as thefault-to-neutralvoltage
VFN dependson the fault position.
The voltage sags due to the various types of faults have been discussed in the
previous sections:three-phasefaults in Section 4.2, single-phase faults in Section 4.4.1,
phase-to-phase faults in Section 4.4.2, and finally
two-phase-to-ground faults in Section
4.4.3.For each typeof fault, expressionshave been derived for the voltages at the pee.
But as alreadymentioned,this voltage is not equal to the voltage at the equipment
terminals. Equipmentis normally connectedat a lower voltage levelthan the level at
which the fault occurs. The voltages at the equipmentterminals, therefore,not only
dependon the voltages at the pee but also on the windingconnectionof the transfor-
mers between the pee and the equipmentterminals. The voltages at theequipment
terminalsfurther dependon the loadconnection.Three-phaseload is normally con-
nected in delta butstar-connectionis also used.Single-phaseload isnormallyconnected
in star (i.e., between onephaseand neutral) but sometimes indelta (between two
phases).Note that we considerhere the voltage sag as experienced at terminals the
of end-userequipment,not the voltage asmeasuredby monitoring equipment.The
latter is typically locatedat distribution or even attransmissionlevel.
In this section we will derive a classification forthree-phaseunbalancedvoltage
sags, based on the following assumptions:
Va = V
1 I
Vb = ----j~ (4.54)
2 2
1 I
V = --+-J'~
c 2 2
188 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
>------. Va
(4.55)
(4.56)
\ \.
\
\ ...\ ..
\
Va = I
Vb = _!_! VjJ3 (4.57)
2 2
V
c
= _!+!
2 2
V)'J3
Like before, (4.55) can be used to calculate the voltages experienced by a phase-to-
phase connected load, resulting in
Va = V
Vb = _!2 V - !2jJ3 (4.58)
1 1
Vc = --
2 V +-j"J3
2
The correspondingphasordiagramsare shown in Figs. 4.68 and 4.69. Due to a phase-
to-phasefault a star-connectedload experiences adrop in two phases, a delta-
)-- - - - - - . va
i/
//
Figure 4.68Phase-to-neutralvoltages before
(dashed line) and during (solid line) a phase-
to-phase fault.
,.<
190 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
"-\ Vc
..•.\\-,
} - - - - . . .............................•Va
the time axis which of course has no influence on equipment behavior. The three
transformertypes can be defined mathematicallyby meansof the following transfor-
mation matrices:
[1 0
T1 = 0 1
o 0 ;] (4.59)
T2 = ~ [-~
-1
2 -1 -1] (4.60)
-1 -1 2
T
3
= ~[-: 0
-1
1
-i] (4.61)
1 2
Va = 3+3 V
Vb = - -61 - -31V - -]v'3
2
1.
(4.62)
1 1 1.
Vc = ----V+-jv'3
6 3 2
This looks like a new typeof sag, but we will seelater that it is identical to the
one experiencedby a delta-connectedload during a phase-to-phase fault. But
for now it will be referredto as sag X3.
192 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
TransformerType
Sag Type 2 3
Xl Xl X3 X2
X2 X2 X2 X3
X3 X3 X3 X2
X4 X4 X4 X5
X5 X5 X5 X4
Section 4.4 • Three-PhaseUnbalance 193
Vb = -~-
2
(!+!
6 3
V)1J3 (4.63)
2 (~+~
Vc = .i, 6 3 V)'iJ3 J
(4.64)
V
c
= _!+!
2 2
V)·J3
Comparingthese two setso f equationsshowsthat (4.63) can beobtainedby replacing
V in (4.64)by! + j V. Ifwe define themagnitudeof sag X4 asV, then sag X2 is a sag
of
type X4 with magnitude!+ j V.
In the same way we can c omparesag X3:
I 2
Va =3+3 V
Vb = -~ -~ V -~jJ3 (4.65)
6 3 2
V
c
= -~-~
6 3
V+~joJ3
2
and sag X5:
Va = V
I 1.
Vb = - - V - - j J 3 (4.66)
2 2
V
c
=--21 V +_joJ3
1
2
t
Again we obtain (4.65) by replacing V in (4.66) by + ~ V. The result isthat only
three types remain:X l , X4, and X5. A fourth type of sag is the sag due to three-
phasefaults, with all three voltagesdown the sameamount. The resulting classifica-
tion is shownin Table 4.9 in equationform and in Fig. 4.70 in phasorform. All sags
in Fig. 4.70 have amagnitudeof 500/0. From the discussionabout sags due to single-
phaseand phase-to-phasefaults, togetherwith the definition of the four types, the
origin and the propagationof the sags becomess traightforward. The results are
summarizedin Table 4.10 for theorigin of sagsand in Table 4.11 for their propaga-
tion to lower voltagelevels. Thesuperscript(") behindthe sag type inTables4.10 and
194 Chapter 4 • Voltage
Sags-Characterization
Type A Type 8
Va = V Va = V
Vb = -!
V - !jV J3 Vb = -!-!jJ)
Vc = -t V +!jvJ3 Vc = -! +!jJ3
Type C Type 0
Va = 1 Va =V
Vb = -! -!jV~ Vb =- V -!jJ3
Vc = -!+!jvJ3 Vc = - V +!jJ)
TypeB
...............
~ T~C
TypeD
...............
Transformer
Connection Sag Type A Sag Type B Sag Type C Sag Type D
Va = 1
Vb = _! V _! Vj-IJ (4.67)
2 2
Vc = -~ V +~ Vj../3
After a Dy transformeror any other transformerof type 3, thevoltagesare
Va = V
1 1V 1
Vb = --j../3
3
- - - - Vj-IJ
2 6 (4.68)
I. 1 1.
V
c
= + -J../3-
3
- V +- V)../3
2 6
After two transformersof type 3 or after one transformerof type 2, we get
2 1
Va =3+3 V
Vb = - -31 - -61 V - 1
- Vj../3
2
(4.69)
V
c
= _!_~
362
V +! Vj'-IJ
Thesethree sags aredifferent from the four types found earlier. It is not possibleto
translateone into the other. Two-phase-to-groundfaults lead tothree more types of
sags,resulting in a total of seven. Thethree new types areshown in phasor-diagram
form in Fig. 4.71and in equationform in Table4.12. Sags due totwo-phase-to-ground
faults andsags due tophase-to-phase faults are comparedin Fig. 4.72.For a type C sag
the voltageschangealong the imaginaryaxis only, for type 0 along the real axis only.
TypeF
..............
Type E Type F
Va = I Va = V
Vh = -! V - ! VjJ3 Vh = -ijJ3 - V- Vjv"j
Vi' = -! V +! Vjv'3 Vc = +ijv1 - V + Vjv1
Type G
Va = j+i V
Vh = - ~V-i- ! Vjv'3
v(' = - i - ~ V +! VjJ3
D
~
c
"·""N
...-.-
............
G
.. DF
.....~ Figure 4.72Comparisonof three-phase
c . . unbalancedsags due totwo-phase-to-ground
faults (F and G) withthree-phaseunbalanced
For types F and G the voltages drop along both axis. The resulting voltages at the
equipmentterminalsare lowerduring a two-phase-to-groundfault. An additionaldif-
ference isthat all three voltagesdrop in magnitudefor a type G sag.N otealsothat for a
type D and type F sag the drop in the worst-affectedphase is the same, whereas for a
type C and a type G sag the drop in voltage between the two worst-affectedphases is
the same. Thispropertywill be used when defining themagnitudeof measuredthree-
phaseunbalancedsags.
Sag types F and G have been derived by assuming that positive-, negative-, and
zero-sequenceimpedancesare the same. If the zero-sequence impedanceis larger than
the positive-sequence impedance,the resulting sag will be somewhere in between type C
and type G, or in between type D and type F.
YNyn A B C D E F G
Yy, Dd, Dz A D* C D G F G
Yd, Dy, Yz A C* D C F G F
lower voltage levels isshown in Fig. 4.73. A fault at 33 kV causes thevoltage at the
peeto drop to 50% of the nominal voltage. For a three-phasefault the situation is
easy: at any leveland for any load connectionthe sag isof type A and with a magni-
tude of 50%. For a phase-to-phasefault the voltage betweenthe faulted phasesat
the peedrops to 50%. For star-connectedload the resulting sags are typeC, 50% at
33 kV; type D, 50% at 11 kV; and again type C, 500/0 at 660 V. In case thefault is a
single-phaseone, thevoltage in the faulted phasedrops to 50% at the pee,This cor-
respondsto a sagof type B and magnitude50% at 33 kV. After the first Dy trans-
former the zero-sequencecomponent of the voltages has been removed. Star-
connectedload at 11 kV will experiencea sagof type C with a magnitudeof 67%.
Delta-connectedload will experiencea sagof type D with a magnitudeof 670/0. For
load fed at 660 V thesituation is just the other way around: star-connectedload ex-
periencesa sagof type D; delta-connectedload one of type C.
The latter two types can beconsideredas distortedversions of type C and D. Sags of
type C and D are also distorted by the presenceof inductionmotor load. The presence
of inductionmotor load makesthat positive- and negative-sequence source impedances
are no longer equal. One of the effectsof this is that the voltage in the"non-faulted
phase"for a type C sag is no longer equal to 100%. This has been the basis for a
classification andcharacterizationof three-phaseunbalancedsags into three types,
correspondingto our types A, C, and D[203], [204].
0.5
-0.5
0.5
-0.5
4.5.1 Monitoring
(4.75)
0.8
a
.5
~ 0.6·
2
.~
~ 0.4
0.2
Figure 4.76 Amplitude of the fundamental
voltage versus time for the voltage sag shown
234 5 6 in Fig. 4.I-a half-cycle window has been
Timein cycles used.
20,-----,.------,-----r----,-----r-----,
10
fI)
~
~ 0....-----'
-8
.S -10
Q..
§ -20
'--'
.!!
, -30
~
] -40'
A.4
-50 Figure 4.77 Argument of the fundamental
voltage.versustime for the voltage sag shown
234 5 6 in Fig. 4.I-a half-cycle window has been
Timein cycles used.
0.8
a
.5
-8 0.6
-I
~ 0.4
20..---~--~--,.---.,.-------r-
10
l
f'J
Ol-----..J
-8
.5 -10
Q.
§ -20
."""\
u
l-30
u
=-40
Figure 4.79 Argument of the fundamental if -sof
, , .
voltage versus time for the voltage sag shown -60O'-------'------"----L------"--~ I
-V ----
ZF (4.76)
sag r: ZS+ZF
Let Zs = R s + jXs and ZF = R F + jXF . The argumentof V.mg , thus the phase-angle
jump in the voltage, is given by the following expression:
Or----..----~----:==:::!::::=:==:::c:=====~
-5
g -10
~ -15
"'t' 75MVA
.5
~ -20
.; -25
bb
~ -30
Go)
~
f -35
-40 Figure 4.80Phase-anglejump versus
2
distance, for faults on a 150 mm 11kV
-45 50 overheadfeeder, withdifferent source
0 10 20 30 40
Distance to the fault in kilometers strength.
_______
- - -.-: ..... -:.-:.-:.-:~:-.:-.-:-.:-.7.
g-10
tc:: -20 '
.-
.[
~ -30':'
=
~
. .
G) .
,
.
~ -40:
-soL , , '
o 5 10 15 20
Distance to the fault in kilometers
25
Figure 4.81Phase-anglejump versus
distance,for overheadlines with cross section
300mm2 (solid line), 150mm2 (dashedline),
and 50mm2 (dottedline).
50 mrrr' line, 2.7 for the 150 mm", and 4.9 for the 300 mm-; the phase-anglejump
decreases for larger X/R ratio of the feeder.
The results forundergroundcables are shown in Fig. 4.82. Cables with a smaller
cross section have a larger phase-anglejump for small distances to the fault, but the
phase-anglejump also decays faster for increasing distance. This is due to the (in
absolutevalue) larger impedance per unit length. The correspondingsag magnitudes
were shown in Fig. 4.17.
Sagmagnitudeand phase-anglejump, i.e., magnitudeand argumentof the com-
plex during-faultvoltage, can beplottedin onediagram.Figure 4.83 shows the voltage
pathsin the complex plane, where the pre-sag voltage is in the direction of the positive
real axis. Thefurther the complex voltage is from + 1 jO, the larger the change in
complex voltage due to the fault. The difference between the pre-sag voltage and the
actual voltage is referred to as the missing voltage. We will come back to the concept of
missing voltage in Section 4.7.2.
Insteadof splitting the disturbanceinto real andimaginary parts one may plot
magnitudeagainst phase-anglejump as done in Fig. 4.84.F rom the figure we can
conclude that the phase-anglejump increases (inabsolutevalue) when thedrop in
voltage increases (thus, when the sag magnitude decreases). Both an increase in
Section 4.5 • Phase-AngleJumps 203
Or------y---~---.__--__r_--__,
-10
1-20
-8
.6 -30 ,/
Q. ' ,
§ -40
.~ .,
.•
I-50 1::1
~
..c:
-60 'f
'
Q.. :
-70
Figure 4.82Phase-anglejump versus
-80 distance, forundergroundcables with cross
0 5 10 15 20 25 section 300mm 2
(solid line), 150mm2 (dashed
Distance to the faultin kilometers line), and 50mm2 (dottedline).
O-----,..---~----r-----r---___,
,\
I
'\
'\
" ,
,,
/:'
.s
:s
-0.1 '. ,,
"
,
',
/
, I
I'
:
.
,,
, \
t
] -0.2
\
\
I
,
c.e..
o
i- 0.3
~
.s
e
t)I)
-70
Figure 4.84Magnitudeversus phase-angle
-80 I.-----'--------'----~-------------' jump, for undergroundcables with cross
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 section 300mm2 (solid line), 150mm2 (dashed
Sagmagnitudein pu line), and 50mnr' (dotted line).
204 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
12s1
2
= IZs + zL:1 2 + IzL:1 2 - 212s + zL:llz£1 cos(-t/J) (4.82)
Substituting(4.81) into (4.82) and some rewriting gives an expressionfor the phase-
angle jump as afunction of distance
Ar.) A + cosa
cos('P = --;::::====== (4.83)
Jl + A2 + 2Acosa
where A = z£/Zs is a measureof the "electrical" distance to the fault and a the
impedanceangle. Note that it is not so much the differencein X/R ratio which deter-
mines the sizeof the phase-anglejump but the actualangle betweensourceand feeder
impedance.For example, a source with X s/ Rs = 40 and a feeder withXF / RF 2 gives =
an impedanceangle of
=
where a source withX s /Rs 3 and a feeder withXF / RF = 1 gives animpedanceangle
of a = -26.6°. The latter will result in more severephase-anglejumps.
The maximum angulardifference occurs forundergroundcables indistribution
systems.F or a sourceX/R of 10 and a cableX/R of 0.5 weobtainan impedanceangle
of about-60°. In the forthcomingsections the value of-60° is used as theworstcase.
Although this is aratherrare case, it assists in showing the
variousrelationships.Small
positive phase-anglejumps may occur in transmissionsystems whereX/R ratio of
source and feeder impedanceare similar. Impedanceangles exceeding+ 10° are very
unlikely. For mostof the forthcomingstudies we will assumethat the impedanceangle
varies between0 and -60°.
From (4.83) we can concludethat the maximum phase-anglejump occurs for
[, = 0, A = 0 and that it is equalto the impedanceangle a.
The magnitudeof the sag isobtainedfrom (4.79)as
v _ Iz£1 (4.85)
sag- Iz.c + Zsl
V _ _A_
sag -(1 + A) -;:===== (4.86)
1 _ 2A(l-COS a)
(t+A)2
Note that the first factor in the right-handsideof (4.86) gives the sag
magnitudewhen
the difference inX/R ratio is neglected(a = 0). This is the sameexpressionas (4.9) in
Section4.2. The error in makingthis approximationis estimatedby approximatingthe
secondfactor in (4.86) for small valuesof a:
1 A A 2
~ A(1-cosa)~l+ 2(1-Cosa)~1+(1+')2a (4.87)
1- 2A(l-cosa) 1- (1+,)2 - (1 + A) I\,
(l+A)2 A
rJ
~ -10
o
-.---- ---., --7l
10, . . - - - - : : : : - - - - - - r - - -
-~ ~
.... ' .' ... _---~--~.~.~;>;
-8
.8 -20
Q.,
§ -30
'",,"",
-- I
l-40
Cl)
Cl)
~ -50
f
-60
Figure 4.86 Relation between magnitude and
phase-angle jump for three-phase faults:
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 impedance angles: -60 (solid curve);-35
0 0
o --------
-'- - - - - =:: = = =---":'"--------- -:. ~.= ... _-....----- -0
rJ
j..., -5
.5
Q.,
~ -10
'",,"",
u
bo
~ -15
Cl)
~
~ -20
Figure 4.87 Magnitude and phase-anglejump
for three-phase sags in the example supply in
Fig. 4.21-solidline: II kV; dashed line:
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 33kV; dotted line: 132kV; dash-dot line:
Sagmagnitudein pu 400kV.
definition, despite theproblems with actually obtaining the rms value.For three-
phase unbalancedsags theproblem becomes morecomplicated as there are now
three rms values to choose from. The most commonly used definition is: The magni-
tude of a three-phase unbalanced sag is the rms valueof the lowestof the three vol·
tages.Alternativessuggested earlier are to use the average
of the three rms values, or
the lowest valuebut one [205]. Here we willproposea magnitudedefinition based on
the analysisof three-phaseunbalanced.sags.
First we need todistinguish between three different kindso f magnitudeand
phase-anglejump. In all casesmagnitudeand phase-anglejump are absolutevalue
and argument,respectively, of a complex voltage.
It is easy to see from theexpressionsgiven earlier,that this will give the valueof IVI as
used for the definitionof the three-phaseunbalancedsags. Anexceptionare sagsof type
B and type E.For sagsconformingto (4.54) and (4.67) the m ethodwould still give the
208 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
exact value for themagnitude.But the difference between zero-sequence and positive-
sequence source that
impedancemakesthat the actualsags can deviate significantly. In
case themethodis likely to give acompletelywrong picture.Anotherproblemis that
for these sags the
magnitudechanges when they propagateto a lower voltage level. This
makes measurementsat a medium voltage level not suitable forpredicting the sag
magnitudeat the equipmentterminals.This problem can be solvedby removing the
zero-sequencec omponentfrom the voltage andapplying the methodto the remaining
voltages. The completeprocedureproceeds as follows:
(4.88)
(4.90)
EXAMPLE This procedure has been applied to the voltage sag shown in Fig. 4.1. At
first the rms values have been determined for the three measured
phase-to-groundvoltages, re-
sulting in Fig. 4.88. The rms value has been determined each half-cycle over the preceeding
128 samples (one half-cycle). We see the behavior typical for a single-phase fault on an over-
head feeder: a drop in voltage in one phase and a rise in voltage in the two remaining phases.
After subtractionof the zero-sequence component,all three voltages show a drop in
magnitude (see Fig. 4.89). The phase-to-groundvoltages minus the zero-sequence are indicated
through solid lines, thephase-to-phase voltagesthrough dashed lines. The lowest rms value is
reached for aphase-to-groundvoltage, which indicates a sag of type D. This is not surprising as
the original sag was of type B (albeit with a larger than normal zero-sequence component). After
removal of the zero-sequence voltage a sag of type D remains.characteristic
The magnitudeof
this three-phase unbalanced sag630/0.
is
Section 4.6 • Magnitudeand Phase-Angle Jumps for Three-Phase
UnbalancedSags 209
0.4
0.2
0.8
a
,
.S 0.6
o
~ 0.4
voltage for sag types Cand D does not changewhen they aretransformeddown to
lower voltage levels, sothat the characteristiccomplex voltage remainsequal to the
initial complex voltage.
Va = 1
Vh Jt
= 4- + -43 V 2 - -1 V Vrx3 sln(f/J)
2
: (4.95)
1/2
2 3 4 5
Distancetothe fault
f
....., rJ
50
~.s -50~~_.__
phase-to-phasefaults. Dashedline: zero
- - - I ._ _- - . . . I_ _----.J impedance angle (no characteristicphase-
o I 2 3 4 5 angle jump). Solid line:- 600 impedance angle
Distanceto thefault (largecharacteristicphase-angle jump).
tPa =0
tPh = -60 + arCSinGJ3~ COS(tP»)
0
(4.96)
tPc = 60 0
- arCSinGJ3~ COS(tP»)
Combining(4.95) and (4.96) with (4.83) and (4.86) gives themagnitudeand phase-
anglejump in the three phases asfunction
a of the distance to the fault. This is done in
Fig. 4.91 forimpedanceangles equal to 0 and - 60°. The horizontalscalecorrespondsto
A = ~£ as in (4.83). We seet hat the severity of sags decreases with increasing distance
whenSthereis no characteristicphase-anglejump. The introductionof a characteristic
phase-anglejump creates asymmetry between the faulted phases. We see, that
e.g.,
the
voltage in oneof the phases initially decreases with increasing distance to the For fault.
one of the phases the phase-angle jump drops to zero ratherquickly, whereas for the
other phase thephase-anglejump remains high much longer.
Figure4.92 plotsmagnitudeversus phase-angle jump for four values of the impe-
dance angle. We can see that the characteristicphase-anglejump significantly disturbs
the symmetry between the two faulted phases. Also the voltagedrop can well below
50% , which is not possiblewithout characteristicphase-anglejump.
60 I:'
8 40 ," :''. \ ,
:
.s
e,
20
~
\
\
\
\
§
...... 0
u
"EO
; -20
I
M , I
f -40
Rewriting theseexpressionsresults in
Va =V
Vb = ~+~ V2 +~ V,J3sin(lj) (4.101)
Vc = ~ + ~ V2 - ~ VJ3sin(lj)
-------------------------------
2 3 4 5
Distanceto thefault
cPa = cP
60
" "
I
':', \
\ '. \
...........' ,
" .... .:...:'.
- - - - - - - - - - - _. - - - - - - - - ~ ..-. ,-~. ~ . .:'. .:.:~:.-.: I
/ .' ,
I
.:
.'
,I
I~'~'" '"
60
lj 40
~
~
.9 20
~
.~
0 .-------~
u
-;0
; -20
~
f -40
-60
Figure 4.96 Rangeof sags due tophase-to-
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 phase faults, as experienced
by single-phase
Sag magnitude in pu equipment.
to type D sags (Fig. 4.95) gives the whole range of sags experienced by single-phase
equipmentduring phase-to-phase faults. The merger of the twomentionedfigures is
shown in Fig. 4.96, where only the outercontourof the area isindicated.
Sags due tothree-phasefaults areautomaticallyincluded in Fig. 4.96. A three-
phase fault gives a sag with the initial
magnitudeand the initialphase-anglej ump, in all
the three phases. Such a sag alsoappearsin one of the phases for a type D sag due to a
phase-to-phase fault. This is the largetriangulararea in Fig. 4.96. Sags due to single-
phase andtwo-phase-to-ground faults havenot yet been included. These will be
treated
below.
For a three-phaseload, we can use the classification introducedin Section 4.4 tocharacterizethe
sag. Themagnitudeand phase-angle j ump of thesethree-phaseunbalancedsags are the same as
those of sags due to three-phasefaults. The only difference is the type of sag.phase-to-phase
A
fault at 11 kV will, for delta-connectedload at 11kV, lead to a sag of type D. The Dy transformer
between the fault (at11 kV) and the load (at 660 V) will change this into a type C sag. Thus, the
delta-connectedload at 660 V will, due to aphase-to-phase fault at 11kV, experience a sag of type
C. Thecharacteristicmagnitudeand phase-angle j ump of this three-phaseunbalancedsag will be
equal to themagnitudeand phase-angle j ump of the voltage (in any phase) due tothree-phase
a
fault at the same position as the phase-to-phase fault. Using the same reasoning we find that
phase-to-phase faults at 33kV lead to type0 sags and faults at132kVand400kV to sags of type
C. The results of thecalculationsare shown in Fig. 4.97:characteristicmagnitudeand phase-
anglejump of three-phaseunbalancedsags due tophase-to-phase faults. Note the similarity with
Fig. 4.87. The curves are at exactly the same position; the only difference thatis
the ones due to
33 kV faults are of type D and the others are of typeThree-phase
C. faults at any voltage level will
lead to a sag of type A.
Section 4.6 • Magnitudeand Phase-Angle Jumps for
Three-PhaseUnbalancedSags 215
5r-----r-----r-----r------r-----~__.
~ 0
~
-8 -5
.5
Q..
.[ -10
.£
bO
~Go) -15
]
~ -20
Figure 4.97 Characteristicmagnitudeand
phase-anglejump for sags due tophase-to-
phase faults in theexamplesupply in Fig.
4.21-solidline: type C sags,d ashedline: type 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
D sags. Sagmagnitudein pu
60 I
,
f
I 40 \
12:
i-20~
= •••••••• _ ._~_:~ ~~ ~~~
,//
Figure 4.98 Magnitudeandphase-angle j ump b
~
V
at the equipmentterminalsdue to phase-to- f -40
"
"
phasefaults in thesupply in Fig. 4.21, I "
experiencedby single-phaseload connected -60 , I
with V the initial magnitudeand </J the initial phase-anglejump. When this three-phase
unbalancedsag propagatesto lower voltage levels, the zero-sequencevoltage is lost.
The zero-sequence c omponentfor (4.103) is
(4.104)
(4.105)
Note that this expressioncan also beobtainedby substitutingV = V cos</J + jV sin </J in
(4.62). For three-phaseunbalancedsags due to single-phasefaults the characteristic
magnitudebecomes
2 / 2 1
Vchar= IVai = 3'1 V +.Vcos</J+4 (4.106)
with V and t/J the initial magnitudeand phase-anglejump, and Va accordingto (4.105).
The characteristicphase-anglejump is
2Vsin<fJ )
tPchar = arg(Va) = arctan( 1 + 2V costP (4.107)
Section 4.6 • Magnitudeand Phase-Angle Jumps for Three-Phase Unbalanced Sags 217
Figures 4.99 and 4.100 show the error made by using theapproximatedexpressions
(4.108)and (4.109). Theerror has been defined as-~.1 The calculationshave been
performed forimpedanceangles equal to-60°, -40°,ci'itd -20°. Even for a system
with large phase-anglejumps, an impedance angle of -60°, the errors are not very
big. Only for calculatingthe characteristicphase-anglejump with deep sags mightit
be needed to use the exact expression. One should realize, however, that the
0.08....----.,.-----r---...,.-
u 0.07
]
.1 0.06
~
.~
0.05
.j 0.04
(J
j 0.03
'" - - .... ,
(J
.~ 0.02
~ I
Figure 4.99Transformationof sags due to <;
~ 0.01 "
single-phasefaults--errorin approximate I •••• •••••••••• .. •••
Impedance angle: -600 (solid line); -400 o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
(dashed);- 20 (dotted).
0 Initial magnitudein pu
0.2r----~----r------.,.-----r-----,
~
.~
1 0.15
4)
t(J
'i
0.1
J(J
.s
0.05 \ \
...
or - - - - - - - r - - - r - - r - - - - - - r - - - -.------r-----.
\
\
\
-10
(/)
8
~ -20·
~
= -30
.~
§
:£-40
~
~ -50
f
-60
Figure 4.101 Relation betweenphase-angle
jump and magnitudeof sags due to single-
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 phase faults:characteristicvalues(dashed
Sag magnitude in pu curve) and initial values (solid curve).
60
rJ 40
~
"'0
.5 20
.[ 0
u
bb
fa -20
~
f -40
Figure 4.102 Rangeof sagsexperiencedby
-60 single-phaseequipmentfor sag type C and
single-phasefault, impedanceangle: _60°
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 (solid line), _40° (dashed),-20 (dotted),
0
60 ~
I 40
~ 20
~
\ :.\. ,
~---
.[ 0 ..:-.- - -- '-'~'
. -~.~.~.~.~ - -~.:
- --~'~'~'~'~'- ----,.~:j. ~..:~>'.
..-:.;.
..2
eo /.;. ...
~ -20
~
f -40
Figure 4.103 Range of sags experienced by
single-phaseequipment for sag type D and -60
-600
single-phasefault, impedance angle:
0 0
(solid line), -40 (dashed),- 20 (dotted), o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Sagmagnitudein pu
o(dash-dot).
60 ... '1
,
, ,I
\
! 40 ,
I
I
I \
,,
.... .,
~ I \
.S 20
\
,
\
~
.--. 0
u ,
\
,
bb
; -20
f
~ -40
.... -
....
I
-,
I
z
I
,I
-60 . . t,..'"
5..-----.------r----...----.----..-
o _------------- _ . ---6
l
~ -5
.S
Qc
g-10
.""""
~
; -15
j Figure 4.105 Characteristic magnitude and
phase-angle j umpfor sags due to single-phase
~-20~ faults in the example supply in Fig. 4.21,
experienced by three-phase load-connected
-25 . _,
0.2 _---'-_ -..L.. --L-_ _.....L---'
phase-to-phase at660V-solid line: II kV,
0 0.4 0.6 0.8
dashed line: 33kV, dotted line: 132kV, dash-
Sagmagnitudein pu
dot line: 400kV.
ground voltages at the pee, and apply a type 2 transformerto these.A type 2 transformerre-
moves the zero-sequence voltage and results in a three-phase unbalancedsagof type D. Mag-
nitude and phase-angle jump of the worst-affected phase are equal to characteristic
the values.
In other words, thecharacteristiccomplex voltage can be obtained by subtractingthe zero-
sequence voltage from the voltage in the faulted phase atpee. the
The results are shown in Fig. 4.105. We seethat single-phase faults at11 kV and 33kV
cause only a smalldrop in voltage, but amoderatephase-angle jump. This is due to the resistance
groundingapplied at these voltage levels, Sagsoriginating in the 132kV and 400 kV networks
show a much largerd rop in voltage magnitudebut a smaller phase-angle jump. Note that the
curves for sags due to 400 Vkfaults do notstartat 33°A. voltage as expected for solidly-grounded
systems. The reason that
is the source impedance in PAD-400 mainly consists of overhead lines.
Therefore the zero-sequence impedance is larger thanthe positive-sequence impedance. For faults
in the direction of PEN, the source impedances ZSI are = 0.084+ jl.061, Zso =0.319+ j2.273,
which gives for the initialphase-to-neutralvoltage duringa terminal fault:
3ZS1 •
Van = 1 - 22 Z = 0.2185+JO.0243 (4.110)
Sl + so
The characteristicmagnitudeat a lower voltage level is found from
For single-phase faults in thedirection of EGG we find: Van = 0.3535 - jO.0026 and
Vchar = 0.571. This is amoderateversion of the effect which leads to very shallow sags in
resistance-grounded systems. Notethat we still assume the system to be radial, which gives an
erroneousresult for single-phase faults at 400 kV. This explains the difference in resulting voltage
sags for a terminal fault in the two directions. The actual value is somewhere between 0.519 and
0.571. The difference is small enough to be neglected here.
Figure 4.105 does not plot the sag type: faults atkV33lead to a type C sag; faults at 11kV,
132kV, and 400 kV cause a sag of type D at theequipmentterminals for delta-connected load. At
the equipmentterminals it is not possible to distinguish between a sag due to a single-phase fault
and a sag due to phase-to-phase
a fault: they bothcause sags o f type C or type D. Therefore, we
have merged Figs. 4.97 and 4.105 into one figure. The result is displayed in Fig. 4.106, showing
characteristicmagnitudeand phase-angle j ump of all three-phaseunbalancedsags due to single-
phase andphase-to-phase faults, as experienced bydelta-connected
a three-phase load at 660 V.
We seethat the equipmentexperiences the whole range of magnitudes and phase-angle jumps.
These have to be considered when specifyingvoltage-tolerance
the requirements of equipment. To
Section 4.6 • Magnitudeand Phase-AngleJumpsfor Three-PhaseUnbalancedSags 221
~ 0 \\ _--------- == 0
~
tt -5
.9
c.
§ -10
.~
i
; -15
Figure4.106Characteristicmagnitudeand
J ~ -20
phase-angle jump for three-phaseunbalanced
sags in Fig. 4.21, experienced by three-phase - 25O'------.L---L-----'. J __ - . - -
be able to fully interpret these results, twomore dimensionsare needed. At first, one has to
realize that not all sags areof equalduration. Typically sags due to11 kV and 33 kV faults are
of longer duration than those due to 132kV and 400kV faults. What is also different for
different sags is itslikelihood. Roughly speakingone can say that deepersags are less likely
than shallower sags. We will come back to probabilities in detail in Chapter 6. To include
magnitude,phase-anglejump, duration,and probability in one, two-dimensional,figure is very
difficult if not impossible.
60
~
Go)
40
~
~
.S 20
~ 0
'~
Go)
~
S -20
I
60 , I
~ 40 ,
I
j
\
.S 20 \"" (\
' ...... : .......... \'"
~~ 0 --- .~_---- ~~'_-_--~~~ ~ ~------=-,-~~~'~~-~J~--
Ii - 20 ---- ,, , / /
M
I
/~ ~ ~
~ V Figure 4.108 Magnitudeand phase-angle
f -40 / jump for all sags in theexamplesupplyin Fig.
I
I 4.2), experiencedby single-phaseload-
-60 I
connectedphase-to-groundat 420 V-solid
line: I) kV, dashedline: 33 kV, dotted line:
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 132kV, dash-dotline: 400kV.
(4.112)
(4.113)
f/Jc = -30
0
+ arcsin{V~Sin(120° - f/J)} (4.115)
The same rules can be applied to the lower triangle, which leads to the following
expressionsfor magnitude Vb and phase-anglejump rPb:
(4.116)
224 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
60
l 40
~
.S 20
~
...., 0 ---------'::
u
tih
fa -20 .
~
~
f -40
Figure 4.110Magnitudeand phase-angle
-60 jump at theequipmentterminals for a type F
sag, due to atwo-phase-to-groundfault. The
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 curves are given for an impedance angle of 0
Sag magnitude in pu (dashed line) and_600 (solid line).
(4.117)
The cosine ruleand the sine ruleapplied to the triangle on the right give the
following expressions:
2 4 12 2 V
V = -
a 9
+ -9 V - 2 x - x - cos( 180 + cP)
3 3
0
(4.118)
(4.120)
(4.123)
The resultsfor type G sags areshownin Fig. 4.112. We seethat the type G sag is
somewhatsimilar to the type C sag, as
s hown in Fig. 4.92. Unlike the phase-to-phase
60 \
\
\
\
\
\
,
/
/
I
I
Figure4.112Magnitudeand phase-angle I
I
4.6.4.3 Rangeof Magnitude and Phase-Angle Jump. Merging Fig. 4.110 and
Fig. 4.112 gives the whole rangeof magnitudesand phase-anglejumps experienced
by a single-phaseload due totwo-phase-to-groundfaults. In Fig. 4.113 the area due
to two-phase-to-groundfaults (solid curve) iscomparedwith the area due to phase-
to-phasefaults (dashedcurve). We seethat there arecertaincombinationsof magni-
tude andphase-anglejump which can occur due tophase-to-phase faults but not due
to two-phase-to-groundfaults, but also theother way around. These curves have
beenobtainedunder the assumptionthat zero-sequence and positive-sequence impe-
dances are equal.For a zero-sequenceimpedancelarger than the" positive-sequence
sourceimpedance,the resulting sags due totwo-phase-to-groundfaults are closer to-
ward sags due tophase-to-phasefaults. The results arethat even a larger rangeof
magnitudeand phase-anglejumps can be expected. An increasing zero-sequence im-
pedance will meanthat the area enclosed by the solid curve in Fig. 4.113 will shift
toward the area enclosed by the dashedcurve. Thelatter is reached for an infinite
zero-sequence impedancevalue.
60 / ,
... 1
\
\
~ 40 \
~ ,
\
008
- ....
\
.5 20 \
\
,
~ Ot----~----·,
'''''''''\
«>
bo
; -20
o
]a.- -40 I
I
EXAMPLE: TWO-PHASE-TO-GROUNDFAULTS,SINGLE-PHASELOAD
For the same example system as used before (Fig. 4.21) the complex voltages at the equipment
terminals due totwo-phase-to-groundfaults have been calculated. Characteristicmagnitude
and phase-angle j ump due to atwo-phase-to-groundfault are the same as due to a phase-to-
phase fault.For three-phasedelta-connectedequipmentwe can directly use the results obtained
for phase-to-phase faults in Fig. 4.97.For two-phase-to-groundfaults, the solid lines refer to
sags of type G, the dashed lines to sags of type F. two-phase-to-ground
A fault at 1I kV leads
to a sagof type F for delta-connectedload, according to Table 4.13. The Dy IlkV/660 V
transformerchanges this into a sag of type G, according to Table 4.14.Two-phase-to-ground
faults at 33 kV lead to sags of type F, and faults at 132kV and 400kV to type G.
Section 4.6 • Magnitudeand Phase-Angle Jumps for Three-Phase
UnbalancedSags 227
60
In all the previouscalculationsin this chapter,we have assumed the fault impe-
dance to be zero. The a rgumentationfor this wasthat the fault impedancecould be
incorporatedin the feederimpedance,ZF in (4.9). Thisargumentstill holds as long as
the magnitudeof the sag isconcerned,but the phase-anglejump can be significantly
affected. We will first addressthree-phasefaults and after that single-phasefaults.
High-impedancefaults are more likely forsingle-phase-to-groundfaults than for
three-phasefaults.
V _ ZF+Rfll
(4.126)
sag - Z s + Z F + Rfll
and feeder plus fault impedance gets close to 90°, which can lead to very large phase-
angle jumps.
« Rfll' thus for
The fault resistance only noticeably affects the voltage ifF I12
faults close to thepoint-of-commoncoupling with the load.For zero distance to the
Zs =}Xs):
fault we get for the complex voltage (with
V - ~t (4.127)
sag - }Xs + Rflt
The fault resistance is normally not more than a fraction of the source reactance, in
which case the sag magnitudeis the ratio of the fault and the source impedances with a
phase-anglejump equal to almost 90°.
To quantify the influence of the fault resistance, the complex voltage
during the
sag was calculated as a function of the distance to the fault for three-phase faults at
11 kV in Fig. 4.21.The calculationshave beenperformedfor a zero fault resistance and
10%,200/0, and 300/0 of the (absolutevalueof the) source
for fault resistances equal to
impedance. The sag magnitude(the absolutevalue of the complex voltage) plottedin
is
Fig. 4.115as a function of the distance to the fault. As expected the influence on the sag
magnitudeis limited to small distances to the fault. The fault resistance increases the
impedance between the pee and the fault, and thus reduces the voltage drop at the pee.
The phase-anglejump is much more influenced, as shown in Fig. 4.116. The
phase-anglejump reaches values up to 80°. For increasing fault resistance the maximum
phase-anglejump does not reduce much.
0.8
~
.5
~ 0.6
.E
ie 0.4
ee
~
o
8-10
-8~ -20
.8 -30
-
I
e, I .
, I I •
§ -40
."""'\
,
I
, ,
u
~-50 I
; I
M -60 , I
,
I
f -70 I
I
Figure4.116Sagmagnitudeversus phase- I
30
\
,
,, , ,
en
Q)
20 \
tb , , '\ ,
~ " '"
.5 10 ......
'..<:~':..,
~ ... "":~ ..
e
::s 0
.'""'\
Q)
bi>
; -10 "/~~.
I /1,
Figure 4.117Magnitudeversusphase-angle
~
,1'-
" 1,-
jump at theequipmentterminals for single- f -20 I':
III,"
30
(I)
u 20
~
\
'\ \
u ",\\
"T;:)
10 . ',\\
.. ~,~
.S ,
5r----,-----.....--------.--------.
.. :--.~~~'?o'
/ " ..
,. ~.
/~:"
,1.-
1/'
/, :
i, : :'" \ "
\ \ " Figure 4.119 Magnitude versus phase-angle
\
\
"...' . jumps at the equipment terminals for single..
phase faults in a resistance-grounded system,
sag type D; fault resistances equal to zero
-10 '------'--------'-------'-------' (solid line), 50% (dashed line),100% (dash-
0.9 0.95 t 1.05 1.1 dot line), and150°A. (dotted line) of the source
Sag magnitudei
....pu impedance.
The influence of the fault resistance is small in this case, as can be seen in Fig. 4.119.
The magnitudeand phase-angle j ump at theequipmentterminalsare plottedfor a type
D sag. Due to the small fault
currentsarc resistances can reach much higher values in a
resistance-groundedsystemthanin a solidly-groundedsystem. In thecalculationslead-
ing to Fig. 4.119 fault resistancesequal to 50%, 1000/0, and 1500/0 of the positive-
sequence source impedanceWere used. The main effectof large fault resistances is
that the sag becomes less severemagnitudeand
in in phase-anglejump.
All calculationsin Sections 4.4and 4.5 were based on the assumptionthat the
system is radial; thusthat we canuniquelyidentify a point-of-commoncoupling(pee), a
sourceimpedanceZs, and a feederimpedanceZF, as were shown in Fig. 4.14. From
Fig. 4.14 weobtainedthe basicvoltagedivider equationfor the complex sag voltage:
V-I _ Zs (4.129)
sag- ZS+ZF
Section 4.7 • OtherCharacteristicsof Voltage Sags 231
after voltage maximum, at least in the phase with the largest voltage drop. In other
phases the event startsat anotherangle comparedto the fundamentalvoltagein that
phase.
When quantifying the point-on-wavea referencepoint is needed. Theupward
zero crossingof the fundamentalvoltage is anobvious choice. One is likely to use
the last upward zero crossing of the pre-event voltage as reference, as this closely
resembles thefundamentalvoltage. The sag shown in Fig. 4.1 partly is repeatedin
Fig. 4.120: one cycle (1/60o f a second)startingat the lastupwardzero crossing before
sag initiation. We seethat the point-on-waveof saginitiation is about 275°. A closer
look at the data learns that this point is between 276° and 280°. The slope at the
beginningof the sagactually takes 4°, orabout 185 j.LS. This is probably due to the
low-passcharacterof the measurementcircuit.
Figure 4.12I plots all three phases of the sag for which one phase plotted
was in
Fig. 4.120.For each phase, the zero point of the horizontalaxis is the lastu pwardzero
crossingbefore thestart of the event inthat phase. We see t hat the point-on-waveis
different in the three phases. This obviousif
is one realizesthat the eventstartsat the
samemomentin time in the three phases. As the voltage zero crossings are 120° shifted,
2 --r-·_···~----·r--·---r----'-----r-1
1.5
0.5
; 0 F--------~-----ft--~--t
~
-0.5
-1
-1.5
- 2 '----_-'--- - A . - - _ - - ' - - _ - - - ' - _ - - ' -_ _ -L..J
Figure 4.120Enlargemento f the sag shown
o 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 in Fig. 4.1indicatingthe point-on-waveof sag
Angle of voltage wave in degrees
initiation.
1.5
0.5
j 0
s
- 0.5
-I
Figure 4.122 Enlargement of Fig. 4.1
showing thepoint-on-waveof voltage - 1.5
recovery. The smoothcurve is the
continuationof the pre-sagfundamental o 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
Time in degrees
voltage.
234 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
4.7.2.1 The Complex Missing Voltage. One can thinkof the missing voltage as
a complex voltage (aphasor),being the difference in the complex plane between the
pre-event voltage and the voltageduring the sag. Theabsolutevalue of this complex
missing voltage can be directly read from a plot like shown in Fig. 4.83. In Fig. 4.83
the missing voltage is the
distancebetween the complex voltage during the sag (which
is on one of the three curves) and the top-right corner of the diagram (the point
I + jO).
4.7.2.2 The Missing Voltage in Time Domain. The conceptof missing voltage
can become much more useful by extending it to time domain. A very first step
would be to look at the difference between the fundamentalpre-event voltage and
the fundamentalduring-eventvoltage. Butthat would not give any extra information
comparedto the complex missing voltage.
Section 4.7 • Other Characteristicsof Voltage Sags 235
2 .-----.,..---.,.------r----,------,-----,
i~ 0
-1
234 5 6
Timein cycles
2.---r---,-----.-----r-----r-----.
u
01)
~ 0 ..............."'--'~
Figure 4.123·T ime-domainvoltage ~
measurementtogetherwith pre-event -1
fundamentalvoltage(top curve) andthe time-
-2
domainmissing voltagebeing thedifference 0 234 5 6
of those two(bottom curve). Time in cycles
In the top part of Fig. 4.123 the sag from Fig. 4.1 has been plotted again.
Togetherwith the actualtime-domainvoltage wave, thefundamentalpre-event voltage
has beenplotted.The latter is obtainedby applyinga fast-Fourier-transformalgorithm
to the first cycle of the voltage wave form.From the complex coefficient for the funda-
mental term in theFourierseries Ct , the (time-domain)fundamentalcomponentof the
voltage can becalculated:
(4.138)
This missing voltage isplottedin the bottompart of Fig. 4.123. Before theinitiation of
the sag 'there isobviously no fundamentalcomponentpresent; during the sag the
fundamentalcomponentof the missing voltage is large; after the principal sag (after
fault clearing) a smallfundamentalcomponentremains. The reason for this becomes
clear from theuppercurve: the voltage does not immediately fully recover to its pre-
event value.
Figure4.124repeatsthis for the voltage in oneof the non-faultedphases, for the
same event as in Fig. 4.123 and Fig. 4.1. In the top curve wethat seethe during-event
voltage has alarger rms valuethan the pre-eventvoltage. In termsof rms voltages, we
would call this an increase in voltage: a voltage swell. looking
But at the missing voltage
it is not possible to saywhetherthe underlyingevent is a swell or a sag. This might be
seen as adisadvantageof the missing voltage concept. But one shouldrealizethat this
conceptis not meant to replace theother ways of characterizingthe sag;instead,it
should giveadditionalinformation.
Finally, Fig. 4.125 plots the missing voltage in all three phases. As expected for a
single-phase-to-ground fault, the missing voltage in the two non-faultedphases is the
same and in phase with the missing voltage in the faulted phase. After the fault the
missing voltages in the three phases form a positive sequence set. This probablydue
is
to the re-accelerationof induction motorsfed from the supply.
236 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
t:~
- 20 1 2 3
Time in cycles
4 5 6
f_: ~
-2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 4.124 Measured voltage with pre-
event fundamentalvoltage (top curve) and
missing voltage(boltom curve) during a
Time in cycles
voltage swell event.
~.:~
-2 0 I 2 3 4 5 6
~:~
-2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
~.:~
- 20 I 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 4.125 Missing voltage for the three
Time in cycles
phasesof a sag due to a single-phase fault .
2r----..---r------r----~--,-------,
II)
11.5
o
> 1
.Ef
.~ 0.5
~
°0 234 5 6
Timein cycles
2 r-----r---..----r---~--
Cl r------r-----r---.------.---·-..----l
1.5
.2
:s
~
fI'.I
1
~
;
~ L
.S 0.5 '- .. "" '-_'- -
fI'.I - - - _--
fI'.I - _ '_',-,
~ .. ....,
~,
ZM = s,+jXL + RR
s
(4.141)
\
I:
,: \
\
\
8 :\ \
-ae 0.8 \
I ",
, "
Jg
\
\
\
\
I \
\
0.6 ,
\
~ \
\
~ 0.4 \
'i
~
0.2 Figure 4.118Induction motor impedance
versusslip; the impedanceat nominal slip is 1
pu; 3 hp 220 V (solid line), 50 hp 460 V
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 (dashedline), 250 hp 2300 V(dotted line),
Motor slip 1500 hp 2300 V(dash-dotline).
o.-------,.------r----~----..
-I '"
""
" ,
"
"
\
\
"
" \
: \
, I
,
,
I
1.0
0.9
0.8
::l 0.7
0.
.S 0.6
~ 0.5
~
'0 0.4
::> 0.3
0.2
0.1
, 1 , ,, , 1,,,,1,,,,1
0.0 +-r-..,...,...-.-+-..,...,...- r-rr-+-r--,--,-r+-,--,-,--,-h- -r-rr-T+-r-rr--r-r-rl
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Time in seconds
3.5
3.0 ..: .
C 2.5
~
8. 2.0
.S
.9- 1.5
U;
;:§ 1.0
0.5
Figure 4.130 Voltage sag ( top) and induction
motor slip (bottom) for three busses in an 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
industrial power system.(Reproducedfrom Time in seconds
Yalcinkaya (136).)
One should realizethat this is a somewhat exceptional case, as motor the load
connected to the system is very large. Similar but less severe effects have been noticed in
othersystems.A notherphenomenonwhich contributesto the post-fault voltage sag is
that the fault occurs in one of two parallel transformers. The protectionremoves the
faulted transformer,so that only onetransformeris available for the supply after fault
clearing. Thepost-fault fault level is thus significantly less than its pre-fault value. A
similar effect occurs for a fault in one of two parallel feeders. The post-fault sag,
described here for three-phase faults, has also been observed after single-phase faults.
• During the first one or two cycles after fault initiation the
induction motor
contributesto the fault. This causes an increase in positive-sequence voltage.
Negative- and zero-sequence voltage are not influenced.
• The induction motor slows down, causing a decrease in positive-sequence
impedance. This decrease in impedance causes an increase in current and
thus adrop in positive-sequence voltage.
242 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Char
acterization
- _.~--~--~--~----,
3000
., 2000
_$
1000
~ 111111111/\/\/\
'" 0 11v v v v v v v v v v v
~ - 1000
..d
p... - 2000
- 3000
o'----o.~I---O.~2---0-
.3--~---'
0.4 0.5
3000
E 2000
'0 1000
>
.0 0
~ -1000
..d
e, -2000
-3000
oL----lL.:...:--:----::'-:----:--:-- --::''-:'''''- - : '
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.\ 0.4
Section 4.8 • Load Influence on Voltage Sags 243
Due to the induction motor load, the positive-sequencev oltage will not immediately
dropfrom 1 pu to 0.67pu. The negative-sequence voltagewill jump from zeroto its new
value immediately. The consequenceis that the resulting voltage amplitude slightly
exceeds itspre-fault value. After a few cycles theinduction motor no longer keeps up
the positive-sequencevoltage. The voltage in the non-faultedphasesdrops below its
pre-eventvalue due to negative-and positive-sequencevoltagesbeing less than 33%
and 67%, respectively.
The currentstaken by the induction motorsare shown in Figs. 4.132and 4.133.
Figure 4.132showsthe motor currentsfor a motor with a small decreasein speed.The
slip of this motor increasesfrom 2% to 6% during the sag.The motor shownin Fig.
4.133 experienceda much largerdecreasein speed: its slipincreasedfrom 3% to 19°A>.
This behavioris difficult to explain without consideringsymmetricalcomponents.But
generallywe canobservethat the currentincreasesinitially in the faulted phase,rises to
a higher value in one of the non-faultedphases,and initially drops in the other non-
faulted phase.The current in the secondnon-faultedphaserises again after a certain
time, determinedby the slowing down of the motor.
For the motor shownin Figs. 4.131 and 4.132the componentvoltagesand cur-
rentshavebeen plotted in Figs. 4.134and 4.135. From Fig. 4.134we seethat negative
and zero-sequencevoltage remain constant during the sag, but that the positive-
sequencevoltageshowsa steadydecay,due to the decreasein positive-sequence impe-
dancewhen the motor slows down. Figure 4.135clearly showsthe increasein positive-
sequencecurrentwhen themotor slows down. The zero-sequence c urrentis zero as the
motor windings are connectedin delta. From Figs. 4.134and 4.135the positive- and
negative-sequence i mpedanceof the motor load can be calculated,simply through
dividing voltage by current. The resultsare shown in Fig. 4.136,where we seeagain
that the negative-sequence impedanceremainsconstant,whereasthe positive-sequence
impedancedrops.When the motor reachesstandstill,it is no longera dynamicelement,
and positive- and negative-sequence impedancebecomeequal.
244 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
150
J I~~
tlS
M 0
~ -50
i- IOO
-150 --------'~----'''--_.-'--- '---_--J
150
= 100
~
~~ 500 ~ "11""
~ ~ "JII'1,HflJIJlI1IJlIIlI
~ j~A~~~~1
-a -50 ~ V~ , ~ ~ ~ ~ V~ ij.
~-100
-150 ~--"--- ,,--_ _a . - - _ - - J
o 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
4000
=
g 3000
=' 2000
~ 1000
]-10~
': -2000
~
:E - 3000
-4000 L -_ _--'--_ _- - ' " """'--_ ____'__ _- I
4000
= 3000
~ 2000
.rJ 1000
c: ~2000
~ -3000
- 4000 L . . -_ _..o.--_ _ -'--_~__'__ ____'___ ___I
4000
= 3000
~ 2000
~1000
M 0
..d -1000
Figure 4.133Induction motor currents ':' - 2000
~
during and after a single-line-to-groundfault ~ -3000
in the supply. Thismotor showeda large -4000 L . -_ _- ' - -_ _---" ~
80 , . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Positive-sequence
voltage
ijo 60
~
e,
.5 40 Zero-sequence
voltage
i -----------------
~ 20 ....................... -
Negative-sequence
voltage
.
Figure 4.134Symmetricalcomponentsfor Ot------+-----+-----+-----&-....J
the voltagesshown in Fig. 4.131. 50 100 150 200 250
(Reproducedfrom Yalcinkaya[136].) Timeinmilliseconds
170·.,..------------------.
fj J50 Negative-sequence
current
~
&J30
.S .,.""...--
-_.....-.----
1: 110 ____ -- -' Positive-sequence
current
.,.,..".--
8t: 90
Figure 4.135 Symmetricalcomponentsfor 70 .....-_+-_--.-._-+-_ _--+---+---o.....--._~
the currentsshown in Fig. 4.132. 90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
(Reproducedfrom Yalcinkaya[136].) Timeinmilliseconds
246 Chapter 4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
6 80
()
[ 60
c=
.;; 40
s
i 20 ~gativ~s~~n~m..£e~a~e_
~ O~---i---+--+--+--+---+--+--+----' Figure 4.136 Positive- andnegative-sequence
90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250 impedance for an induction motor during a
Timeinmilliseconds sag. (Reproduced from Yalcinkaya [136].)
:::s
a.
=
.;; 0.8
J
~ 0.6
5
i= 0.4
o
o
0.2
The negative-sequence v oltage is constantduring the fault, but lower than without
induction motor load. To quantify the effect of induction motors, we use atwo-step
calculation procedure.At first we calculate positive- and negative-sequence v oltage
(V~no), V~no» for the no-load case. As we sawbefore this will lead to voltage sags of
type C or type D with different characteristicmagnitude.We assumeda' zero charac-
teristic phase-angle. jump. As a secondstep the influence of the induction motor is
incorporated.For this we model the supply as a sourcegeneratinga type C or type
D sag, with a finite sourceimpedance.Note that this is a three-phaseTheveninsource
representationof the supplyduring the fault. Theeffect of the inductionmotor load is a
difference betweenthe sourcevoltagesand the voltagesat the motor terminals, for
positive as well as for negative-se~uence components.T he voltageat the motor term-
inals are denotedas V}/oaa) and V 2/oad). For the three above-mentioned"stages"these
relationsare assumedto be as follows:
The voltages at themotor terminals are calculated from the positive- and negative-
sequence voltagesV~load) and V~load). The resulting phase voltages for the three stages
are shown in Figs. 4.138 and 4.139. For sag type C the voltages are shown for one
of
the phases with a deep sag, and for the phase with a shallow sag. The more the
motorsslow down, the more the voltage in this phase drops. The voltage in the worst-
affected phase is initially somewhat higher due to induction
the motor influence, but
dropswhen themotor slows down and the positive-sequence voltage dropsin value as
well. For type D we seethat the voltage in the least-affected phases
dropsduring all
stages of the sag. The voltage in the worst-affected phase increases initially but
decreases later.
~ o.~!~~;~~-~~---~~---------~-----I
~Q~
~ tOt - . .
i
1
Figure 4.139 Voltages at the equipment
terminals, for three stages of induction
motor
influence for type D sags. The solid lines are
j ~=I
O.5~_
without induction motor influence, the 00 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 I
dashed tines with. Characteristicmagnitude
248 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
inductionmotors. Also the switching on o f otherloads will cause a voltage sag, just like
the switching offof a capacitorbank. But in thoselatter cases thedrop in voltage is
rather small, and the voltage onlyd rops but does not recover.Thereforethe term
"voltagemagnitudestep" would be moreaccurate.
During start-upan induction motor takes a largercurrentthan normal, typically
five to six times as large. This
currentremainshigh until themotor reaches its nominal
speed, typically between several seconds and one minute.drop Thein voltage depends
strongly on the system parameters.Considerthe system shown in Fig. 4.140, where Zs
is the sourceimpedanceand ZM the motor impedanceduring run-up.
v _ ZM
(4.144)
.wg - ZS+ZM
Like with most previouscalculations,a source voltage of 1 pu has been assumed. When
a motor of rated powerSmotor is fed from a source withshort-circuitpower Ssourc:e,we
can write for the source impedance:
vn_
Zs = __
2
(4.145)
Ssource
_ Vn2
ZM--- - (4.146)
fJSmotor
v _ S.fOurc:e
(4.147)
sag - S.'iOurc:e + /3Smotor
Of course one needs to realize
that this is only anapproximation.The value can be used
to estimate the sag due inductionmotorstarting,but
to for anaccurateresult one needs
a power system analysis package. The latter will also enable the user to
incorporatethe
effect of othermotorsduring startingof the concernedmotor. The drop in voltage at
the other motor's terminals will slow them down and cause an additional increase in
load currentand thus anadditionaldrop in voltage.
250 Chapter4 • VoltageSags-Characterization
_ 100MVA _ ° (4.148)
Vrag - 100MVA + 6 x 5 MVA - 77Yo
In case the voltageduring motor starting is too low for equipmentconnectedto the
same bus, one can decide to usededicatedtransformer.This
a leads to thenetwork
shown in Fig. 4.141.
Let again Zs be the sourceimpedanceat the pee,ZM the motorimpedanceduring
fun-up, and ZT the transformerimpedance.The magnitudeof the voltage sag experi-
encedby the sensitive load is
v _ 2 T+ZM
(4.149)
sag - Zs + ZT + 2 M
Introducing,like before, theshort...circuit power of the sourceS.'iource,the rated power of
the motor Smolor and assumingthat the transformerhas the same rated power of the
motor and animpedancef, we get from (4.149):
v _ (1 + 6€)Ssource
(4.150)
sag - (1 + 6f)Ssource+ 6Smotor
From these examplesit will be clear that large voltagedrops are not only a
problem for sensitive load, but that they also lead tounacceptablylong run-up
times. The situation becomes even worse if more motors are connectedto the same
bus, as they willf urther pull down the voltage. Voltaged ropsdue to induction motor
startingare seldom deeper than 85%.
Voltage Sags-
Equipment Behavior
5.1 INTRODUCTION
253
254 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
100% .
95% j
I
t
:
0% "--_ _---'- I
.....t.-- _
Voltage Tolerance
Equipment Upper Range Average Lower Range
PLC 20 ms,75% 260 ms,60°A» 620 ms,450/0
PLC input card 20 ms,80% 40 ms,55°A» 40 ms, 30%
5 h.p. ac drive 30 ms,800/0 50 ms,75% 80 ms,600/0
ac control relay 10 ms,75% 20 ms,65% 30 ms, 60%
Motor starter 20 ms,600/0 50 ms,50°A» 80 ms,400/0
Personal computer 30 ms,800/0 50 ms,60% 70 ms,500/0
Duration in Cyclesof 50 Hz
Magnitude 0.5 5 10 25 50
ruptions,within one second. But the desktopcomputer'strip might lead to the lossof 1
hourof work (typically less), where the
process-controlcomputer'strip easily leads to a
restartingprocedureof 48 hours plus sometimes a very dangeroussituation.It is clear
thatthe first is merely an inconvenience, whereaslattershould
the be avoided at any cost.
Nonregulateddc voltage
Regulated
de voltage
1
230 Vac
Voltage
controller
Figure 5.2Computerpower supply.
I , , ,
I ~ ~ ~ ~ I I , , I
:' I: ': ,: : ,: ,~ f ~ (~
, I, " " II
" II " II
0.8 :: :: :: : ~ ~ :: :: : ~ ::
, ' " , 1'1 """,' ,
I" """ , II
""" I I,
, I" 'I"",' ,
0.6 : : : ~: ~: : "","'" ,
" " I' ,'"
Due to the voltage drop, the maximum ac voltage becomesless than the de
voltage. Theresultingdischargingof the capacitorcontinuesuntil the capacitorvoltage
drops below the maximum of the ac voltage. After that, a new equilibrium will be
reached.Because aconstantpower load has beenassumedthe capacitordischarges
fasterwhen the de busv oltageis lower. This explainsthe largerdc voltageripple during
the sag.
It is importantto realize that the dischargingof the capacitoris only determined
by the load connectedto the de bus,n ot by the acvoltage.Thus all sagswill causethe
same initial decay in devoltage. But the duration of the decay is determinedby the
magnitudeof the sag.The deeperthe sag thelonger it takesbeforethe capacitorhas
dischargedenoughto enablechargingfrom the supply. In Fig. 5.4 the sags in ac andde
voltage are plotted for voltagesagsof different magnitude.The top curveshave been
calculatedfor a sag in acvoltagedown to 50%, the bottomonesfor a sag in acvoltage
down to 70% • The dottedlines give the rmsvoltageat ac side(thesag in acvoltage).We
seethat the initial decay in de busvoltageis the samefor both sags.
5.2.2.2 Decayof the DC Bus Voltage. Within a certain rangeof the input vol-
tage, thevoltage regulator will keep its output voltage constant,independento f the
input voltage. Thus, the output power of the voltage regulatoris independento f the
input voltage. If we assumethe regulator to be lossless theinput power is indepen-
dent of the devoltage. Thus, the load connectedto the de buscan be consideredas a
constantpower load.
Section 5.2 • Computersand ConsumerElectronics 259
u
EO.5
~
0
2 4 6 8 10
Time in cycles
.i~ 0.5
Figure 5.4 Voltage sag at ac side(dashedline)
and at the de bus (solid line) for a sag down to 0
50% (top) and for a sag d own to 70% 2 4 6 8 10
(bottom). Time in cycles
1 2
-CV2=1-CVo - Pt (5.1)
2 2
where Vo is the de bus voltage at sag initiation and P the loading of the de bus.
Expression (5.1) holds as long as the de bus voltage is higher than the absolute value
of the ac voltage, thus
during the initial decay period in Figs. 5.3 and 5.4. Solving (5.1)
gives an expression for the voltageduring this initial decay period:
(5.2)
During normal operation,before the sag, the variation in de bus voltage is small, so
that we can linearize (5.2)around V = Vo, resulting in
(5.3)
(5.5)
I - V;';n T
tmax = - - - (5.6)
4E
When theminimum de bus voltage isknown, (5.6) can be used to calculatehow long it
will takebefore tripping. Or in otherwords: what is themaximumsagdurationthat the
equipmentcan tolerate. The dc busvoltage at which the equipmentactually trips
dependson the designof the voltage controller: varying between 50% and 90% de
voltage, sometimeswith additional time delay.Table 5.3 gives some values of voltage
tolerance,calculatedby using (5.6).
Thus, if a computertrips at 50% de bus voltage, and as the normal operationde
voltage ripple is50/0, a sagof lessthan four cycles indurationwill not cause amaltrip.
Any sag below50°A, for more than four cycles will trip thecomputer.A voltageabove
50% can bewithstood permanentlyby this computer.This results inwhat is called a
"rectangularvoltage-tolerancec urve," as shown in Fig. 5.5. Each voltage regulatorwill
have anon-zerominimum operatingvoltage. The row for zerominimum de bus voltage
is only insertedas a reference. We can see fromTable5.3 that the performancedoes not
improve much by reducing the minimum operatingvoltage of the voltagecontroller
beyond50%. When the dcvoltagehas droppedto 50°A" the capacitorhas alreadylost
75°A, of its energy.
Minimum steady-statevoltage
~ Vmin -._-_.. -------
.~
~
Maximumduration
Figure 5.5 Voltage-tolerancecurve of a ,/ of zerovoltage
computer:an exampleof a rectangular
voltage-tolerancecurve. Duration
Slightde offsetrelated
to instrumentation
Regulated
de voltage
(l V/div)
Unregulated
de voltage
Figure 5.6 Regulatedand non-regulatedde (100V/div)
voltages for a personalcomputer,during a
200 ms sag down to500/0: (top-to-bottom)ac
voltages; accurrent; regulatedde voltage;
non-regulatedde voltage.(Reproducedfrom
EPRI PowerQuality Database[28].) Time(SO milliseeonds/div)
262 Chapter5 • Voltage Sags--·EquipmentBehavior
IOO,------r----.-----r-------,
80
20
100..----,------r-----.-----,
80
20
100 . . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CBEMA
,
80 +--------.---------~
--- ... I
--.------~
ITIC
20
O-----._-..l.--------"'--------L.-------J
0.1 10 100 1000
Durationin (60 Hz) cycles
100
80
5e
8. 60 I
/
I
---------
.5
~ 40
/
~
~
20
:/ 5 10 15 20
Figure 5.10Voltage-tolerancecurves for
programmablelogic controllers(PLCs).
Duration in cycles (Data obtainedfrom [39].)
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 265
100.------r-----,..-----r--------,
80
6
20
3
• Device 2 is the more complicated version of device 1. Despite the higher com-
plexity, device 2 is clearly less sensitive to voltage sags than device 1.
• Device 4 is a newer and more advanced version of device 3. Note enormous
the
deteriorationin voltage tolerance.
• Devices 5 and 6 come from the same manufacturer,but show completely
different voltage tolerances.
After a trip some drivesrestartimmediatelywhen the voltage comes back; some restart
after a certaindelay time andothersonly after a manualrestart.The variousautomatic
restartoptionsare only relevantwhen the processtoleratesa certainlevel of speedand
torquevariations.In the restof this section we will first look at the results
of equipment
testing. This will give animpressionof the voltagetoleranceof drives. The effecto f the
voltage sag on the de bus voltage, the main cause of equipmenttripping, will be dis-
cussed next.Requirementsfor the sizeof the de buscapacitorwill be formulated.The
effect of the voltage sag on the ac
currentand on themotor terminalvoltagewill also be
discussed, as well as some aspects of automaticrestart. Finally, a short overview of
mitigation methodswill be given.
Variable
50 Hzr-------.. de link frequency
ac
ac dc
dc ac
Controlsystem
nom
Rotational speed
nom . ,-- - -- - - -
... .. .. ._. .
The driveperformanceduring the event was classified based on the three types
of speed
curves shown in Fig.5.15;
The test results aresummarizedin Tables 5.4 and5.5. Eachof the columns in the
tables gives thenumberof drives with the indicatedperformance.For a 500/0, lOOms
sag, fourof the 20 h.p. drives showed performance
a accordingto curve II in Fig. 5.15
and sevenof the drivesaccordingto curve III. Table 5.4 gives the results for drives at
full load; a distinctionis made between 3 h.p. and 20 h.p. drives.
Table5.5comparesthe
drive behaviorat full load with the drivebehaviorat half-load. These results include
20 h.p. as well as 3 h.p. drives.
Nominal speed
1············.···········.······..··-.-.·.··.···.·····...
I
I II
II
I
I
I
I!
Stand-I
still i I III
···············t···········t··············.L.---......L--------- Figure 5.15 Three types
of motor speed
..--.' Time behaviorfor an adjustable-speed
drive due to
Sag duration a sag.
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 269
Drive Performance
I II III I II III
00/0 33 ms 4 2 5 12
50% 100 ms 4 7 3 5 4
70% 1000 ms 5 6 1 7 4
Drive Performance
I II III I II III
0% 33 ms 7 I 2 8 I I
50% 100ms 2 4 4 3 4 3
700/0 1000 ms 1 5 4 1 4 5
• 3 h.p. drives are less sensitivethan20 h.p. drives. This does not necessarily hold
in all cases,a lthougha comparisonof 3 h.p. versus 20 h.p. drives for the same
manufacturer,the same voltage sag, and the same drive loadinggives in 25of
the cases abetterperformancefor the 3 h.p. drive; in 20 cases the performance
is the same (i.e., in the same class accordingto the classification above); and
only in three cases does the 20 h.p. drive perform better.
• Thereis no significant difference between the full load and the half-load vol-
tage tolerance.F or some loads theperformanceimproves, forothersit dete-
riorates,but for mostit doesnot appearto have any influence. Doing the same
comparisonas before shows t hat in two casesperformanceis betterat full load,
in four cases it isbetterat half-load,and in 24 cases theperformancefalls in the
sameperformanceclass.For drives falling inperformanceclass I it may bethat
at full load thedrop in speed is more severe thanat half-load,but the study did
not report this amountof detail.
• Very shortinterruptions(0%, 33 ms) can behandledby all 3 h.p. drives and by
a largepart of the 20 h.p. drives.
of 100 ms and longer,
• Adjustable-speeddrives have severe difficulties with sags
especially as one
considersthateven response I could mean a seriousdisruption
of sensitivemechanicalprocesses.
270 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
The resultsof a similar set of tests arereportedin [32]: two different voltage sags were
applied to 17 drives:
Their results are shown in Table 5.6. The classification used is fairly similar to the one
used inTables 5.4 and 5.5, with the exception t hat a class"drive kept motor speed
constant" is included. This driveperformanceis indicated as class 0 inTable 5.6.
Responseclasses I, II, and IIIcorrespondto the ones used before.
From these studies, it is possible toobtain a kind of "averagevoltage-tolerance
curve" for adjustable-speed drives. The resulting curve is shown in Fig. 5.16, with the
measurementpointsindicatedas circles.Toleranceis defined here asperformance0 or
I. Note that the actual drives show a largespreadin voltage tolerance: some drives
could not tolerateany of theappliedsags, where one o f the drivestoleratedall sags. It
has further beenassumedthat the drives couldoperateindefinitely on 85% voltage.
Conrad et al. [48] obtained voltage tolerancedata for adjustable-speeddrives
througha survey of drivemanufacturers.The voltagetolerancestatedby the manufac-
turers is shown in Fig. 5.17. The circles indicate manufacturerswhich gaveminimum
voltage as well asmaximumsagduration.The othermanufacturers,indicatedby trian-
gles in Fig. 5.17, only gave a value for the
maximumsagduration.Note that 10 out of 13
manufacturersindicatethat their drives trip for sagso f three cycles or less ind uration.
100%
85% .............................
~
a 70% .........................
/
.~
(l;S
~
50%
100 I.M.. . I
Voltage not stated
u
00
80 - •
• •
•
~> 60
§
.5
.s 40 '-
~
20 -
I I I
0
0 10 20 30
Maximum duration in cycles
Figure s.t 7 Adjustable-speeddrive voltage tolerance,accordingto the drive
manufacturer.• = Magnitudeand duration; A = durationonly. (Data
obtainedfrom [48].)
AcceptanceCriterion
A B C
Specific performance No changewithin the Noticeablechanges,self- Shutdown,big changes,n ot
specified tolerance recoverable self-recoverable
Torque-generating Torque within tolerances Temporarydeviation Loss of torque
behavior outsideof tolerances
Operationsof power No maloperationof a Temporarymaloperation Shutdown,triggering of
electronicsand driving power semiconductor which cannotcause protection
circuits shutdown
Information processing Undisturbedcommuni- Temporarydisturbed Errors in communication,
and sensingfunctions cation and data communication loss of dataand
exchange information
Operationof display and No changeof visible Visible temporarychanges Shutdown,obviously wrong
control panel display information of information display information
272 Chapter 5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
Many trips of ac drives are due to a low voltage at the de bus. The trip or
maloperationcan be due to thecontroller or PWM inverter not operatingproperly
when the voltage gets too low. But it can also be due tointerventionof
the undervoltage
protectionconnectedto the dc bus. ·Most likely, the protectionwill intervene before any
equipmentmalfunction occurs.
The de bus voltage is
normallyobtainedfrom the three ac voltages througha diode
rectifier. When the voltage at ac side drops, the rectifier will stop conductingand the
PWM inverterwill be powered from thecapacitorconnectedto the de bus. This capa-
citor has only limited energyc ontent(relative to the powerc onsumptionof the motor)
and will not be able to supply the load much longer than a few cycles. Animproved
voltage toleranceof adjustable-speed drives can be achieved by lowering the setting of
the undervoltageprotectionof the de bus. One shouldtherebyalways keep in mindthat
the protectionshould trip before anymalfunction occurs and beforecomponentsare
damaged.N ot only is theundervoltagea potentialsourceof damagebut also the over-
currentwhen the ac voltage recovers. If the drivenot is equippedwith additionalover-
current protection, the de bus undervoltage should also protect against these
overcurrents.Many drives areequippedwith fuses in series with the diodes, against
large overcurrents.Theseshouldnot be used toprotectagainstthe overcurrentafter a
sag.Havingto replace the fuses aftera voltage sag only causes additionalinconvenience.
V(t) = J 2;
V6 - t (5.8)
(5.9)
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-Speed AC Drives 273
EXAMPLE 'Consider the example discussed[42]:in a drive with nominalde bus vol-
tage Vo = 620V and de buscapacitanceC = 4400j.tF powers an acmotor taking an active
power P = 86 kW. The drive trips when thede bus voltagedrops below Vmin = 560V. The
time-to-trip obtainedfrom (5.9) is
4400j.tF ( 2 2) (5.10)
t = 2 x 86kW x (620V) .- (560 V) = 1.81ms
The minimum ac bus voltage for which the drive will not trip is 560/620 = 90%. This drive will
thus trip within 2 ms when the ac bus voltage drops below 900/0.
Supposethat it would be possible to reduce the setting of the undervoltageprotectionof
the de bus, to 310 V(50°tlc»). That would enormouslyreduce thenumberof spurioustrips of the
drive, because thenumberof sags below500/0 is only a small fraction of thenumberof sags
below900/0. But the time-to-trip for sags below50% remains very short. Filling inVmin = 310V
in (5.9) givest = 7.38 ms. In fact, bysubstituting Vmin = 0 we can seethat the capacitanceis
completely empty 9.83 ms after sag initiation, assumingthat the load power remains constant.
We can concludethat no matter how good the inverter, the drive will trip for any voltage
interruption longer than 10 ms.
100 ~ ...
ij
[ 80
.5
.tg 60
\
,,
\
\
-.
e 40
\
\
.~
\
\ \
\
, \
\
~ 20 \ \
\ \
,
\ \
sizes.
speed drives for different capacitor \
We seethat even for very lowvaluesof the settingof the de busundervoltage,the drive
will trip within a few cycles.
This exampleis used in [42] tocomparedifferent ways of improving the drive's voltage
tolerance,including the costsof the variousoptions.The total costsof 1.12 F capacitance,with
enclosures,fuses, bars, and fans, would be about$200,000 and to place these capacitorswould
2
require a space 2.5 x 18 m and 60 em high. Abattery backupwould cost "only" $15,000 and
requirea spaceof 2.5 x 4 x 0.6 rrr'. Howeverthe batteryblock would requiremore maintenance
than the capacitors.
Assumethat an undervoltageprotectionsetting of 310 V (50%) is feasible, andthat the
drive shouldbe able totoleratevoltagesags up to 200 ms in d uration.Equation(5.13) can again
be used to give therequiredcapacitance,which is 119 mF.
This is only one-tenthof the required capacitancefor the original inverter. The costs of
installing capacitancewould still be higher than for the batteryblock but the lowermaintenance
requirementsof the capacitorsmight well tip the balancetoward them. Making an inverter that
can operatefor even lowervoltageswould not gain much ridethroughtime or savecapacitors.
This is because the s toredenergy in acapacitoris proportionalto the squareof the voltage. It
would, however, increase the current through the inverter significantly. Bringing theminimum
operatingvoltage down to 25% would doublethe requiredcurrentrating of the inverter but still
require95 mF of capacitance;a reductionof only 20%.
I "", :----,~--"o~-""""~-r"__~---r<:------,,
,, ,,
,, ,
0.98 " : I I
, ' ,I
,,
, I
, ,I
g, 0.96 \ :
,,
\
,
, '
I
'
, ,,
,
I , '
,, ,'
I
I
.8 ", 'I ,, ,,
\ I
*' 0.94
, I
. "
': ""
,,
"
~ "i
] 0.92
g 0.90
Figure 5.19 DC bus voltage behind a three- 0.88
phase rectifier during normaloperation,for
largecapacitor(solid line), smallcapacitor
(dashed line)
, and nocapacitorconnected to 0.2 0.8
the dc bus (dotted line)
.
Where with a single-phase rectifier the capacitoris only charged twice a cycle , it is
chargedsix times every cycle for athree-phaserectifier. Figure 5.19 shows the de bus
voltage behind athree-phaserectifier, for variouscapacitorsize. The load fed from the
de bus was assumed to of bethe constant-powertype. The size of thecapacitanceswas
chosen as follows: for the largecapacitanceand a de bus voltage o f 100%, the initial
rate of decayof the voltage is 10% per cycle when the ac side voltage drops; for the
small capacitancethe initial rate of decay is 75% per cycle. We will relate this to the
drive parametersfurther on.
We saw in Section 4.4 that the most commonsags experienced by three-phase
a
load are type A, type C, and type . DFor a type A sag all three phases drop in
magnitudethe sameamount.All six voltage pulses in Fig. 5.19 willdrop in magnitude
and the load will empty thecapacitorconnectedto the de bus, until the de bus voltage
drops below the peak of the ac voltage again . The voltagetolerancefor this case has
been discussed in the previous section.
fO:~
U-0.5
«
- I
o 0.5 I 1.5 2 2.5 3
o
> . .' ..~' .. ~' ",' Figure 5.20 Voltage during a three-phase
gj unbalanced sag of type C: ac side voltage
.o 0.6
U (top) and dc side voltages(bottom) for large
Cl
capacitor (solid line), smallcapacitor(dashed
0.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 line), and nocapacitorconnected to the dc
Time in cycles bus (dotted line).
The initial behaviorremains identical to the one discussed before for the balanced
sag (due to athree-phasefault). The main difference is t hat the de bus voltage recovers
after one half-cycle. This is due to the one phase
that remains atnominal voltage for a
sag of typeC.
5.3.4.2 Sagsof Type D. The voltages on ac side and de side of the rectifier are
shown in Fig. 5.21 for athree-phaseunbalancedsag of type D with characteristic
magnitude50% and nocharacteristicphase-anglejump. The magnitudeof the vol-
tages at the driveterminals is 50%, 90.14%, and 90.14%, with phase-anglejumps
zero, -13.9° and +13 .9°.
For a sag of type D, all three phases
drop in voltage , thus there is no longer one
phase which can keep up the de bus voltage. Fortunatelythe drop in voltage is mod-
erate for twoof the three phases. Even for a terminal fault, where the voltage in one
phase drops to zero, the voltage in theother two phases does notd rop below
4.j3 = 86%. The top curve in Fig. 5.21 shows how one phase drops significantly in
voltage. Theother two phasesdrop less in voltagemagnitudeand theirmaximamove
away from each other. In the b ottomcurve of Fig. 5.21 the effecto f this on the de bus
~ 0.5
~
"0
>
gj
.0
u -0.5
-e
~
"0 0.8
' 1 '1 :
\" .' \
. ..
:' , ,'
I
- ., '\~-..ron--_J'"'...--....j
..
: '...
,
;
,
.' , ,
.
,'
> ",' . ',I Figure 5.21 Voltage during a three-phase
]'" 0.6
" unbalanced sag of type D: ac side voltage
U (top) and dc side voltages (bottom) for large
Cl
capacitor(solid line), smallcapacitor(dashed
0.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 line), and nocapacitorconnected to the dc
Time in cycles bus (dotted line).
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 277
voltage is shown.F or not too small valuesof the dc buscapacitance,the dc bus voltage
reaches a value slightly below the peak value of the voltage in the two phases with the
moderatedrop. Again the effect of the sag on the de bus voltage, andthus on themotor
speed andtorque,is much lessthan for a balancedsag.
5.3.4.3 Phase-Angle Jumps.In Figs. 5.20 and 5.21 it isassumedthat the char-
acteristic phase-anglejump is zero. This makesthat two of the phasevoltages have
the same peak value: the highest phases for a sag of type D (Fig . 5.21); the lowest
phases for a sagof type C (Fig . 5.20). A non -zerocharacteristicphase-angle jump
the higher. The effecto f
makesthat one of these .two voltages gets lower, and other
this is shown in Fig. 5.22 for athree-phaseunbalancedsag of type D, with acharac-
teristic magnitude of 50%. All phase-anglejumps are assumed negative ; positive
phase-anglejumps would give exactly the same effect. When there is capacitance
no
connectedto the de bus(dotted line) the minimum de bus voltage isdeterminedby
the lowest ac side voltage. The effectof the phase-anglejump is that the minimum
de busvoltage gets lower. But for a drive with a largecapacitanceconnectedto the
de bus, it is the highest peak voltage whichdeterminesthe de bus voltage.F or such
a drive, the de bus voltage will increase for increasing phase-anglejump. For a
phase-anglejump of -300 the de bus voltage is even higher than during normal
operation. Note that a -300 phase-anglejump is an extremesituation for a sag
with a characteristicmagnitudeof 50%.
I
~ , , ., ,,
~ ,~
'0 0.8 1 - . ,J - ' .'" 0.8 .
1
1
-, ,
,
:-
] 0.6
"
1 ,
'.
1
0.6
" "
I
o
Q 0.4 0.4
0 0.5 0 0.5
I
Figure 5.22 DCbus voltageduring a three- " ., ,
~
1
. 1 1 1
i
,, ,
phase unbalanced sag of type
characterist ic magnitude50% and
D, with '0 0.8
:- ,I
1
,
,. I
1
, 0.8 •
"
-,
' ,I
1
~ 0.8
.5
~
S
~ 0.6
]
.g 0.4
.1 Figure 5.23 Minimum de bus voltage as a
~ 0.2 function of the characteristicmagnitudeof
three-phaseunbalancedsags of type C. Solid
line: largecapacitance;dashed line: small
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 capacitance;dotted line: no capacitance
Characteristic magnitude in pu connected to the de bus.
line for no capacitanceat all. Figures 5.23 through 5.26 are for three-phaseun-
balancedsags of type C. Figures 5.27 through 5.30 are thecorrespondingfigures
for type D.
Figure 5.23 shows the influence on the minimum de bus voltage. The de bus
undervoltageprotection normally uses this value as a trip criterion. There is thus a
direct relation between theminimum dc bus voltageand the voltagetoleranceof the
drive. We see from the figure t hat the presenceof sufficient capacitancemakesthat the
dc busvoltageneverdropsbelow acertainvalue, nomatterhow deep the sag at ae side
is. This is obviously due to the onephaseof the ac voltage which stays at its normal
value. For a largecapacitance,the drop in de busvoltageis very small. The smaller the
capacitance,the more thedrop in de bus voltage.
Figure 5.24 shows the influenceof sag magnitude and capacitor size on the
voltage ripple at the de bus. The largerthe capacitanceand the larger thecharacteristic
magnitude,the smaller thevoltage ripple. Again a largecapacitancemitigates the
voltage disturbanceat the de bus. Some drives use the voltage ripple to detect mal-
functioning of the rectifier. This ismore used in controlled rectifiers where a large
voltage ripplecould indicate an error in one of the firing circuits. The figure is some-
I00 ~---r------r----'--r-------r-----.,
[ 0.8
.S
i
($ 0.6
;>
j
~ 0.4
~u
Figure 5.25 Average de bus voltage as a .( 0.2
function of the characteristic magnitude of
three-phase unbalanced sagstypeC.
of Solid
line: large capacitance; dashed line: small
capacitance; dotted line: no capacitance 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
connected to the dc bus. Characteristicmagnitudein pu
what misleadingin this sense, as a large capacitancewould also make it more difficult to
detectunbalancesin the rectifier (likeerrorsin the thyristor firing). In thatcase,eithera
more sensitive'setting of the voltage rippledetectionshould be used (which would
overrule.the gain in voltagetolerance)or the rectifiercurrentsshould be used as a
detectioncriterion (which might introducemore sensitivity tounbalancedsags).
The average de bus voltageshownin
is Fig. 5.25, the rms value in Fig. 5.26. These
determinehow themotordriven by the drive slows down in speed. We see that the drop
in average or rmsvoltageis not asdramaticas thedrop in minimum voltage: although
of the capacitance,the less thedrop in speed. Especially for
also here, the larger the size
longer voltage sags, orlow-inertia loads, this could be a decisive difference. Of course
one needs to assume that the inverteris able tooperateduring the voltage sag.That is
more likely for largecapacitance,where the dc bus voltage remains high, thanfor small
capacitance,where the de bus voltage drops to a low value twice a cycle.
The results for athree-phaseunbalancedsag of type D are shown in Figs. 5.27
through5.30. We saw in Fig. 5.21 t hat for large capacitance,the new steadystatedoes
not settle inimmediately.All values for the type D sag have been calculatedfor the
third cycleduring the sag. Theminimum de bus voltage for a sag of type D is shown in
-----------------------------~~~~~~~.
[ 0.8
.S
&>0
~ 0.6
;>
~
..0
.g 0.4
t+-
o
tI.)
Figure 5.26 The rms of the dc bus voltage as
a function of the characteristic magnitude of
~ 0.2
three-phase unbalanced sags of type C. Solid
line: large capacitance; dashed line: small
capacitance; dotted line: no capacitance 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
connected to the de bus. Characteristicmagnitudein pu
280 Chapter5 • Voltage Sags-EquipmentBehavior
::l
0. 0.8
.S
"
OIl
.f!0 0.6
>
ee
::l
or>
o
-e 0.4
E
::l
E Figure5.27 Minimum de bus voltage as a
'2
~ 0.2 function of thecharacteristicmagnitude of
three-phase unbalanced sags of type . Solid
D
line: largecapacitance ; dashed line: small
0 capacitance ; dotted line: nocapacitance
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Characteristic magnitude in pu connected to the de bus .
100
....
;:: 80
"~
"0.
.S 60
"0.
Q.
' 1:
.s" 40
OIl
0
>
o 20
~. ~.. Figure5.28 Voltage ripple at the de bus as a
0
function of the characteristicmagnitudeof
three-phase unbalanced sags of type D. Solid
line: large capacitance; dashed line
: small
00 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 capacitance; dotted line
: no capacitance
Characteristic magnitude in pu
connected to the dc bus.
5. 0.8
.S
~
~ 0.6
:g
or>
.g 0.4
t
~ 0.2 Figure 5.29 Average de bus voltage as a
function of thecharacteristicmagnitudeof
three-phaseunbalancedsags of type D. Solid
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 line: large capacitance; dashed line
: small
Characteristic magnitude in pu capacitance;dotted line: no capacitance
connected to the de bus .
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 28t
a0.8
.s
~
~ 0.6 .
>
]
~ 0.4
C+-t
o
rJ)
Fig. 5.27. Comparisonwith Fig. 5.23 for type C revealsthat for a type D sag the
minimum de busvoltagecontinuesto drop with lower characteristicmagnitude,even
with large capacitorsize. But againan increasein capacitancecan significantly reduce
the voltage drop at the de bus.For the drive with the largecapacitancethe de bus
voltagedoes not drop below 80% , even for thedeepestunbalancedsag.
Figure 5.28 plots' thevoltageripple for type D sags, whichshowsa similar beha-
vior as for type C sags.T he voltage ripple is calculatedas the peak-to-peakripple
related to the normal value. Therefore,the voltage ripple for the drive without capa-
citancedoes not reach 1000/0 for a sagof zero characteristicmagnitude.
In Figs. 5.29and 5.30, showingaverageand rms valueof the de busvoltage,we
seesimilar values as for sags o f type C. Again the differenceis that the de busvoltage
continuesto drop for decreasingcharacteristicmagnitude.Deep sags of type D will
causemore drop in motor speed than sags of the samemagnitudeof type C. For
shallow sags the effect on the m otor speed will beaboutthe same.
!!-{!CV
dt 2
2
} =p (5.15)
dV
CVo-=P (5.16)
dt
282 Chapter5 • Voltage Sags-EquipmentBehavior
EXAMPLE For the same driveparametersas before (620 V, 86 kW) we can use
(5.18) to calculate the required size of the
capacitance.As a first step we have totranslateper-
cent per cycle into volts per second:
or 57.8 /-LF/kW. Similarly we find that 37.3 mF or 433/-LF/kW correspondsto 10% per cycle.
These values need to be comparedto the amountof capacitancepresentin moderndrives, which
is between 75 and 360 JlF/kW, accordingto [138]. We seethat the "largecapacitance"curves are
feasible withmodernadjustable-speed drives.
5.3.4.6 Load Influence. The main load influence on voltage sags is the reduc-
tion in negative-sequencevoltage due to induction motor load, as explained in
Section 4.8. To see w hat the effect is onadjustable-speed
drives, wereproducedtype
C and type 0 sags withreducednegative-sequence voltageand calculatedde bus vol-
tage behind a non-controlledrectifier. The three-phaseunbalancedsags with reduced
negative-sequence voltage were calculatedin the same way as for Figs. 4.138 and
4.139. Theanalysiswas performedfor a three-phaseunbalancedsag with acharac-
teristic magnitudeof 50% and zero phase-anglejump. The voltagesat the equipment
terminalsare for a 50% sag of type C:
Va = 1
Vb = _!2 - !j./3
4
(5.20)
Vc = -~+~j./3
and for a sagof type 0:
(5.21)
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 283
(5.22)
3
VI =-
4 (5.23)
1
V2 =--
4
for a sagof type D. A "distortedtype C" sag iscreatedby keeping the positive-sequence
voltage constant,while reducingthe negative-sequence voltage. This is to simulate the
effect of induction motor load. If we assumethat the negative-sequence voltage drops
by a factor of {J, thus from V2 to (1 - {J) V2, we obtain the phase voltages from
Va = VI +(I-fJ)V2
Vb = VI + a2( 1 - fJ)V2 (5.24)
V(. = VI + a(l - {J)V2
[ 0.8
.S
~g 0.6
j
.g 0.4
.1
Figure 5.31 Induction motor influence on
~ 0.2
minimum de bus voltage for sags of type C.
Solid line: large capacitor; dashed line: small
capacitor; dotted line: no capacitor connected 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
to the de bus. Drop innegative-sequence
voltage
284 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
~ 0.8
.S .
Go)
f 0.6
-0
>
:g
.,D
~ 0.4
Go)
&e 0.8
.5
i
] 0.6
]
~ 0.4
§
:~~ 0.2
Figure 5.33 Induction motor influenceon
minimum de busvoltage for sagsof type D.
Solid line: largecapacitor;dashedline: small
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 capacitor;dottedline: no capacitorconnected
Drop in negative-sequence
voltage to the de bus.
-<
t 0.2
Figure 5.34 Induction motor influenceon
averagede busvoltagefor sagsof type D.
Solid line: largecapacitor;dashedline: small
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 capacitor;dottedline: no capacitorconnected
Drop in negative-sequence
voltage to the de bus.
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 285
5.3.4.7 Powering the Controllers.In older drives thecontrol electronics for the
PWM inverter was powered from the supply. This made the drive very sensitive to
disturbancesin the supply. Inmoderndrives thecontrol electronics is powered from
the de bus which can be more constantdue to the presence of capacitors.But even
here the samereasoningcan be used as for process control equipment.Controllers
are essentiallylow-power equipmentwhich only require a smalla mount of stored
energy to ridethrough sags. The design of the power supply to the drive controller
should be suchthat the controller stays active at least as long as the power electro-
nics or themotor do not require apermanenttrip. It should not bethat the control-
ler becomes the weak p art of the drive. Figure 5.35 shows the typicalconfiguration
for powering the controller. The capacitanceconnected to the de bus between the
rectifier and theinverter is normally not big enoughto supply themotor load and
the controller during a balancedsag longerthan a few cycles. The power supply to
the controller can beguaranteedin a numberof ways:
• By inhibiting firing of the inverter sothat the motor no longer discharges the de
buscapacitance.The power taken by the controlleris so much smallerthanthe
motor load, that the capacitorcan easily power thecontroller even for long
voltage sags. When the supply voltage recovers,controllerthe can automati-
cally restartthe load.
• Additional capacitancecan be installed on low-voltage side of the de-de
switched mode power supply between the dc bus and control the circuitry.
As this capacitanceonly needs to power thecontroller, a relatively small
amountof capacitanceis needed. Also abatteryblock would do the job.
• Some drives use the rotationalenergy from themotor load to power the con-
trollers during a voltage sag orshortinterruption.This causes small additional
drop in motor speed, smallenoughto be negligible. A special control technique
for the inverter is needed, as well as methodto
a detect the sag[33].
Diode PWM
rectifier inverter ac motor
_
OJ}01
.
0: ;
_
0.'
.
0,6
.
J~ 'I Figure 5.36 ACsideline voltages (top) and
currents(phase a, b, and c from top to
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 I bottom) for a three-phase unbalanced sag of
Time in cycles type D.
300
200
100
./
.5 o
~ l \ \ I
3 - 100
u
-200
-300
o 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06
Time in seconds
300,--- , -- ....,.----,---r- ---,,--- ,---,
200 l--tHr-+tHl--1---It-Ir--+---+Ht---l
~ 1001-t-ft-t---HUHH---ttH+---'I-Ht+----i
~
.5 0 H-l...--li-'r-,.....--lo+--t""'4--l-o,--+1p.o1--jloo~
~
3 -100 H---t-\-Itti---t1tt-t--HH--+-IHl
o
- 200 JV---t-+HF-t----ftt+-t--\tPJ-- +-ffi
currents for the drive under normal operating conditions. Only two currents ar e
shown , the th ird one issimilar to one of the other two. The drive is connectedin
delt a, so that each current pulse shows up in two phases. total
A of four pulses in
each of the threephasesimplies 6 pulsesper cycle chargingthe capacitor. Therewas a
small unbalancein the supply voltage leading to the difference between thecurrent
pulses. We see t hat the magnitudeof the currentpulses is between 200 and 250 A.
288 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
400
300
'" 200
~
~
100
.5 o .\
s5 - 100
o
-200
400
300
n n
/\ t\
ru N
i
200
100
.5 o
~ - 100
8 -200
-300
~ lJ\ ~I \~
~ ~ ~ ~ Figure 5.39Input currentfor an ac drive with
-400 voltage unbalance(Reproduced
. from
0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06
Mansoor[27].)
Time in seconds
The resulting output voltage Vout is shown in the lower plot of- Fig. 5.41. It can be
shown that the output voltage consistsof a fundamentalfrequency sine wave plus
harmonicsof the switching frequency[43]. The latter can beremovedby a low-pass
filter after which the requiredsinusoidalvoltageremains.If the de busvoltagevaries,
both the positive and the negativeoutput voltage V+ and V_will changeproportion-
ally. These variations will thus appearas an amplitude modulation of the output
voltage. Let the requiredmotor voltagesbe
I
::s
.e 0.5
~
0
S
0-0.5
::>
-I
o~----::-.L..:-----:-~--~-_.L.--_--J
0.6 0.8
1 r- r--
~
.9 0.5
i 0
0-0.5
Figure5.41 Principle of pulse-width ::> .....-.
modulation:carrier signal with reference -1 '-- ~
'----
signal (dashed)in the top figure; the pulse- o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
width modulatedsignal in the bottom figure. Timein cycles
290 Chapter 5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
=
Va Vm cos(2rrfmt)
Vb = Vm cos(2rr.fmt- 120°) (5.26)
Vc = Vm cos(2rrfmt+ 120°)
Va = Vdc(t) X Vmcos(2rrfmt)
Vb = Vdc(t) X Vmcos(2rrfmt- 120°) (5.27)
Vc = Vdc(t) X Vmcos(2rrfmt+ 120°)
j 0.5
'0
>
]
.~ 0
B
~ -0.5
~
~-: o 2 4 6 8 10
~ -: o 2 4 6 8 10
0.9 ...------r----~------..---------.
0.8
::s 0.7
Q..
.s 0.6
.t
~
0.5
H0.4
g.0.3
Figure 5.45 Positive- (solid) and negative- rI} 0.2
sequence component (dashed) of the motor
terminal voltages as a function of the motor 0.1
,,'--- .....
speed. A sag of type C with a characteristic °O~---.....::a....:-.;:l-----"""'O---~-~--_--J-_-----J
magnitude of500/0 was applied at the supply 50 100 150 200
terminals of the adjustable-speed drive. Motorfrequencyin Hz
292 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
Negative-sequence
Positive-sequence
voltage voltage de busvoltage
speedsaround50 Hz. For low,speed theunbalanceis very small.Note that the voltage
at the supply terminals of the drive (i.e., the type C sag)
contains25% of negative-
sequence and75% of positive-sequence voltage. Even for a small de buscapacitorthe
unbalanceat the motor terminalsis significantly lessthan at the supply terminals.
The resultsof the calculationsare summarizedin Table 5.8. Maximum andmini-
mum positive andnegative-sequence voltageshave beenobtainedas in Fig. 5.45. (The
lowestnegative-sequence voltagewas lessthan0.01% in bothcases.) The average de bus
voltage wasobtainedas in Fig. 5.25; the rmso f the de bus voltage as in Fig. 5.26.
For a
large dc buscapacitor,the ripple in the de busvoltagebecomes very small, so that the
motorterminalvoltagesremainbalanced,no matterhow big theunbalancein the supply.
d
dt (12: J w2) = w(Tel - Tm£'ch) (5.28)
The largerthe inertia constantH, the less theincreasein slip. For processessensitive to
speedvariations,the voltage tolerancecan be improved by addinginertia to the load.
Figure 5.46 showsthe increasein slip as afunction of the sagmagnitudeandduration,
for an inertia constantH = 0.96 sec.N ote that an increasein slip correspondsto a drop
in speed.The increasein slip is given for four different sagdurations,correspondingto
2.5,5,7.5,and 10 cycles in a50Hz system.As expectedthe speed willdrop more for
deeperandfor longersags. But even for zero v oltage(PWM disabled)the drop in speed
is only a fewpercentduring the sag.
If the maximum-allowableslip increase(slip tolerance)is equal to tlsmClx , the
minimum-allowablesag magnitude Vmin for a sagduration T is found from
O.I.------r----~--~----..-------..
0.08
~
fI.)
~ 0.06
S
.S
Q,)
~ 0.04
j
0.02 "
......
...... "
Figure 5.46Increasein motor slip as a
function of the sagmagnitudefor different
sagduration: 50ms(solid curve), lOOms 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
(dashed),150ms(dash-dot),200 ms(dotted). Sag magnitude in pu
294 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
vmin. -- J I - 2H f).smax
T (5.35)
A zero voltage, Vmin = 0, can be tolerated for a duration 2H f:1s max' The resulting
voltage-tolerancecurves have beenplotted in Fig. 5.47 for H = 0.96 secand various
valuesof the slip tolerancef:1s max' Theseare thevoltage-tolerancecurvesfor an adjus-
table-speeddrive wherethe drop in speedof the mechanicall oad is the limiting factor.
Note that some of the earlier quoted tolerancesof adjustable-speeddrives are
even abovethe 1% or 2% curves.This is mainly due to thesensitivity of the power-
electronicspart of the drive. Note also that it has beenassumedherethat the drive stays
on-line. Temporary tripping of the drive correspondsto zero voltage at the drive
terminals.This will obviously lead to alarger drop in speed.
5.3.7.2 Unbalanced Sags.The curves in Figs. 5.46and 5.47 have been calcu-
lated assumingthat the voltagesat the motor terminalsform a balancedthree-phase
set. For a balancedsag this will obviously be the case. But as we have seen in the
previous section, for an unbalancedsag themotor terminal voltagesare also rather
balanced.The larger the de buscapacitance,the more balancedthe motor terminal
voltages. The above calculations of the motor slip are still applicable. When the
motor terminal voltage show a serious unbalance, the positive-sequencevoltage
should be used.
The effect of three-phaseunbalancedsags on themotor speed has been calculated
underthe assumptionthat the positive-sequence voltageat themotor terminalsis equal
to the rmsvoltageat the de bus.T his is somewhatan approximation,but we haveseen
that the motor terminalvoltageis only slightly unbalancedeven for a largeunbalancein
the supplyvoltage.This holdsespeciallyfor a drive with a largede buscapacitance.The
de bus rmsvoltageshave been calculatedin the sameway as for Figs. 5.26and 5.30.
Thesewere used tocalculatethe drop in motor speedaccordingto (5.34) and voltage-
tolerancecurveswere obtained,as in Fig. 5.47.T he resultsfor type C sags areshownin
Figs. 5.48, 5.49,and 5.50. Figures 5.48 and 5.49 presentvoltage-tolerancecurvesfor
different values of the maximum drop in speed which theload can tolerate, for no
capacitanceand for a small capacitance,respectively,presentat the de bus.Even the
small capacitorclearly improvesthe drive's voltage tolerance.Below a certaincharac-
teristic magnitudeof the sag, the rms valueo f the de busvoltageremainsconstant.This
100
1%
90
=80
G,) 5%
t
0-
70
]0%
.5 60
G,)
] 50
.~ 40
~
«I
30
C/.)
20
10 Figure 5.47 Voltage-tolerancecurvesfor
adjustable-speeddrives, for three-phase
200 400 600 800 1000 balancedsags, fordifferent valuesof the slip
Sag duration in milliseconds tolerance.
Section 5.3 • Adjustable-SpeedAC Drives 295
100r----r------r-====::::======::::::::~
90 10/0
... 80 2%
[ 70
5%
.S 60
u
] 50 10%
.~ 40
; 30
~
fIl 20 200/0
10
Figure 5.48 Voltage-tolerancecurves for sag
200 400 600 800 1000
type C, nocapacitanceconnectedto the de
Sag duration inmilliseconds
bus, for different values of the slip tolerance.
... 80
5
e
&
.5 60
i.~ 40
e 1% 2% 5%
~
fIl 20
100----r----.,.------r----=~======l
- - -- --
.;
.:--
,',
:,
:
,I
shows up as a vertical line in Fig. 5.49.Figure 5.50 comparesdrives with large, small,
and no de buscapacitancefor a load with a slip toleranceof 1%. The capacitorsize has
a very significant influence' on the drive
performance.
The largeimprovementin drive performancewith capacitorsize for type C sags is
obviouslyrelatedto the onephaseof the acsupplywhich doesnot drop in voltage.For
a largecapacitance,this phasekeeps up thesupply voltage as if almost nothing hap-
pened.For type D sags, this effect issmaller,as even theleast-affectedphasesdrop in
voltage magnitude.Figure 5.51 shows the influence o f the capacitorsize on thevoltage
tolerancefor type D sags.T he threecurveson the left are for a sliptoleranceof 1%, the
ones on the right for10% slip tolerance.The improvementfor the I % casemight look
marginal,but one shouldrealizethat the majority of deepvoltagesags have aduration
around100 ms. The largecapacitanceincreasesthe voltagetolerancefrom 50 to 95 ms
for a 50% sag magnitude. This could imply a serious reduction in the number of
equipmenttrips.
From Figs. 5.48through5.51 it becomesclear that the effectof unbalancedsags
on themotor speed is small. The best way preventspeedvariationsis
to by using a large
de buscapacitorand by keeping the drive online. The small speedvariations which
would result may becompensatedby a control systemin case theycannotbe tolerated
by the load.
100
,~
.;
+J 80
e
Q)
1%
~
8.
.5 60 /'
.sa /
/ /
.~ 40 ,,
eu I
e I
~ :; I
en 20 :: ," 10%
:, ,
:, ,
:''I Figure 5.51 Voltage-tolerancecurves for sag
o :1 , I I I
type D, for two valuesof the slip tolerance,
o 200 400 600 800 1000 large (solid line), small(dashed),and no
Sag duration in milliseconds (dotted)capacitanceconnectedto the de bus.
the spectrumone finds processes which are extremely sensitive to speed varia-
tion. If a very small speedvariation alreadyseverelydisruptsthe process, it is
best tonot restartthe drive. Restartingthe drivecertainlyleads to a speed and
torquetransient,which could makethe situationworse. Safetyconsiderations
could dictatethat a total stoppageis preferableabove anautomaticrestart.
• Some drives wait a few minutesbeforethe automaticrestart.This ensuresthat
the motor load has come to acompletestop. Thecontrol system simplystarts
the motor in the same way it would do for an ormal start. With a delayed
automaticrestart,safety measureshave to betakento ensurethat nobodycan
be injured by the restartof the motor.
• The control system of the drive canapply electrical ormechanicalbraking to
bring the load to a forcedstop, after which a normal restart takes place.
Without specialcontrol measures,it is very hard to restartthe drive success-
fully before it has come to astandstill.Thusforced brakingcan reduce the time
to recovery.The requirementis that the process driven by the drive is able to
toleratethe variationsin speed andtorquedue to braking and reacceleration.
• Most drives are able tostart under full load, which also impliesthat they
should be able to pick up thealready spinning load. The dangerof already
spinningload is that it might still containsomeair-gapflux causingan open-
circuit voltageon themotor terminals.Whenthe drive isrestartedwithout any
synchronizationsevere electricaltransientsare likely to occur due to the resi-
dual flux. The solutionis to delay therestartfor aboutone second to allow this
residual flux to decay. Thisoption will imply that the motor load will be
without poweringfor one or two seconds. In this time the motor speed decays
to a typical valueof 50% of the nominalspeed,dependingon the intertia of the
load. Also at themomentof restartthe inverterfrequency will not beequalto
the motor speed, themechanicaltransientthis causes might not be toleratedby
the process.
• A speedidentification techniquecan be used toensurethat the inverter picks
up the load at the right speed. This reduces mechanical
the transienton restarts
and makesthe motor recoverfaster. Thespeed-identificationprocessshouldbe
able todeterminethe motor speed within a few cycles to enablea fastrestartof
the drive.
• To seriouslylimit the drop in speed and the time to recovery, the drive needs to
restartvery soonafter the voltagerecovers.For this theinvertershouldbe able
to resynchronize.on the residual stator voltages. This requiresextra voltage
sensors,thus increasingthe priceof the drive.
• Insteadof resynchronizingthe drive after the sag, it is possible tomaintain
synchronizationbetween inverter and motor during the sag. This requires a
more complicatedmeasurementand control mechanism.
Motor speed •
. • • •
, ,
. 0- 0 _ . 1.
(445 rpm/div)
, , , . . , . , ,
._----1-------[-------[------r------1-------1-------[-------[-------r------
·..··-j-·.... -l..·.. r·. ·r·..·)'· · . l. . ·.
t···.. ··r....··'j'·..··
.---- . ~ -----_. ~ --_..--r---_•. -l--_ . - - - ~ - - - __ A - ; - -- -- - - ~- --- -_or -------r ---_.-
1 ! 1 1 1 j 1 1 j
, , , I , I , ,
Motor speed Ai
(445 rpm/div)
,
. . .. 4• •I , ..
. _. . . • .
. . ..... _
: ! : ! :
Motor current
(20 A/div) .
--- ~-- - - - -- i - ---· _ · . - - - - - - -~--- _ · - -:.. - ---- ·
.,
! ! ! ! !
! : : : ! Figure 5.53 Drive response with non-
synchronousrestart.(Reproducedfrom
Mansoor[32].)
-----------,
Firing
angle
,--_--J<.---.,. Armature Control
ae system
de
the largeinductanceof the armaturewinding. The field winding takes only a small
amountof power; thus a single-phase rectifier is sufficient. The field winding is pow-
ered from oneof the phase-to-phase voltagesof the supply. In case field-weakening
is used to extend the speed range of the dc motor, a controlled single-phase rectifier
is needed. Otherwise a simple diode rectifier is sufficient. To limit the field
current,a
resistance is placed in series with the field winding. The resulting field circuit is there-
fore mainly resistive, sothat voltage fluctuations result in current fluctuations and
thus in torque fluctuations. A capacitor is used to limit the voltage (andtorque)
ripple. To limit thesetorque fluctuations a capacitor is used like the one used to
limit the voltage ripple in single-phase rectifiers.
(5.37)
where Rt is the resistance in the field circuit (the resistance of the winding plus any
external series resistance). This field
currentcreates theair-gapfield
(5.38)
E = kwmIf (5.39)
a rmaturecurrent fa:
This induced voltage limits the
Va = E+Rafa (5.40)
which accelerates the m otor up to the speed at which m otor torque and load torque
balance.
The designof the motor is typically suchthat the armatureresistance is low and
the field resistance relatively high. Neglecting the
armatureresistance gives the follow-
ing expression for thearmaturevoltage:
(5.42)
Rewriting this, and using field voltage as an independentvariable, gives the basic
expressionfor the speedcontrol of dc motors:
(5.43)
1. Armature voltage control range. The field voltage is kept at its maximum
value and the speedis controlled by the armaturevoltage. This is the pre-
ferred range. The field current is high, thus the armaturecurrent has its
minimum value for a given torque. This limits the armaturelossesand the
wear on the brushes.
2. Field weakeningrange. Above a certain value the armaturevoltage can no
longer be increased.It is kept constantand the speed isfurther increasedby
reducing the field voltage. As there is a maximum value for the armature
current, the maximum torque decreaseswith increasingspeed.
0.8
a
.5
~0.6
~
] 0.4
U
c
Figure 5.56 Output voltageof controlled
rectifier with a firing angleof 50°. No
capacitanceis connectedto the de bus. Note
100 150 200 250 300 350 the differencein vertical scalecomparedto
Time in degrees Fig. 5.19.
Section 5.4 • Adjustable-SpeedDC Drives 303
• Becauseof the voltage sag, the voltage on ac side of the field-winding rectifier
will drop. This will lead to a decay in fieldcurrent. The speedof decay is
determinedby the amountof energystoredin the inductanceand in thecapa-
citance. Typically thecapacitorwill give the dominanttime constantso that the
decay in fieldcurrentcan be expressed as follows:
(5.45)
(5.46)
Ia=
Va -E (l Va - E)
n, + 0 - n, e
_L
f (5.47)
1-.
where Vais the armaturevoltageduring the sag, andT = As we saw before,
the field current remains close to itspre-eventvalue for aDt least a few cycles.
Because themotor speed doesnot immediatelydrop, the back-emfE remains
the same. The effect of a drop in armaturevoltage is thusthatthe currentdrops
toward a large negative value (Va - E)I Ra.
E-V
t, ~ 10 - L at (5.48)
a
t
1 (X
a)
= 21l' Ra 1 - V
1- E (5.50)
t = 10.25 I
_ V (eye es) (5.51 )
For a sag down to75% the currentdropsto zero in one cycle; for a90% sag it
takes 2.5 cycles which is still very fast.T hus for the majority of sags thearma-
ture currentand thetorquewill drop to zero within a few cycles.
2.5
50 2
.5
~::l 1.5
o
e
a
! 0.5
0.5 1.5 2
Figure 5.S8 DCmotor armaturecurrent
dur ing balanced sag.
~
t:: 0.6
::l
o
.",
~ 0.4
0.2
0.5 I
-~~2 1.5 Figure 5.59 DCmotor field current during
Time in seconds
balanced sag.
Section 5.4 • Adjustable-SpeedDC Drives 307
2.5
0.5
1.15
1.1
a
.S 1.05
1
....
~ 0.95
~
0.9
0.85
0.8
Figure 5.61 Speedof de motor during 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
balancedsag. Time in seconds
If the motor aims at keeping themotor speedconstant,the drop in speed (as shown
in Fig. 5.61) will be counteractedthrough a decrease in firing angle of the
thyristor
rectifier. For a deep sag the firing angle will quickly reach its minimum value.
Further compensationof the drop in armaturevoltage would requirecontrol of the
field voltage. But as we saw above, the field voltage is kept
intentionally constantso
that control is difficult.
• SAGI: a sag of type 0 with the large voltagedrop in the phasefrom which the
field winding is powered.The field voltagethus drops to 50%. The results for
sag I are shown in Figs. 5.62 through 5.65.
• SAGII: a sagof type 0 with a small voltagedrop in the phasefrom which the
field winding is powered,making the field voltage drop to about 90%. The
results for sag11 are shownin Figs. 5.66through 5.69.
• SAGIll: a sagof type C with the field windingpoweredfrom the phasewithout
voltage drop. The field voltage thus remains at 100%. The resultsfor sag III
are similar to those for sag11 and thereforenot reproducedin detail.
All plots show two cycles before the sag, 10 cyclesduring the sag, and 48 cycles
afterthe sag.F romthe figures we can seethat a deep sag in the field
voltage(sag I) causes
a highovershootin the armaturecurrent(Fig . 5.63), in thetorque(Fig. 5.64),andin the
speed (Fig. 5.65).For a shallowsag in the fieldvoltage(sag11) the armaturecurrentand
torqueare zero for a long time, but with smallerovershoot(Figs
a . 5.67 and 5.68); the
speed shows a large drop but only a smallovershoot(Fig . 5.69).Note the ripple in the
armaturecurrentduring the sag. Theunbalancein the acvoltageleads to a muchlarger
,
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Figure 5.62 Fieldcurrentfor sag type D, with
Time in seconds
largedrop in field voltage.
4
;>
"'-
.S
., 3
e-
B
...
B 2
0
::E
1.25
1.2
5.
.S 1.15
1l
~ 1.1
~ 1.05
::E
0.95
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Figure 5.65Motor speed for sag type D, with
Time in seconds
large drop in field voltage.
;>
c, 0.8
.S
C
50.6
o
'"
"0
u: 0.4
0.2
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Figure 5.66 Fieldcurrentfor sag type D, with
Time in seco nds
smal1 drop in field voltage.
Section 5.4 • Adjustable-SpeedDC Drives 311
5 c----~----.---_--~-----,
4
::l
0.
.5
<Ll 3
::l
go
B
....
2
~
~
1.15
1.1
5.
.5 1.05
1 ....
J -
~ 0.95
~
0.9
0.85
Sag Type FieldVoltage min max min max min max min max
Phase-anglejumps affect the angle at which the thyristors are fired. The firing
instantis normally determinedfrom the phase-lockedloop (PLL) output, which takes
at least several cycles to react to the
phase-anglejump.
A calculatedstepresponseof a conventionaldigital phase-lockedloop to a phase-
angle jump is shown by Wang [57]. His results arereproducedin Fig. 5.70, where we
can seethat it takesabout400 ms for thePLL to recover. Theerror gets smallerthan
10% after about250 ms, which is still longerthan the durationof most sags. Thus for
our initial analysiswe can assumethat the firing instantsremain fixed to thepre-event
voltage zero-crossings.W ith additional measures it is possible to m ake PLLs which
respondfaster tophase-anglejumps, but those will be more sensitive to harmonicsand
other high-frequencydisturbances.
We can reasonablyassumethat the phase-locked-loopoutput does not change
during the sag.The effect of the phase-anglejump is that the actual voltage is shifted
0.....--....----------------.
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1 ......-------I
~
Firing
I
I
::s 0.8
0.. PLLoutput ,/ '" ,Supplyvoltage
.S I
I ,
~0.6
\
I
\
I
S I
\
,
15 I
I
\
;> 0.4 I
\
\
I
\
t
\
I
\
I
\
0.2 I
I
\
\
I
\
I
\
I
\
::s 0.8
e,
.S
~ 0.6
~
;> 0.4
0.2
5.4.4.1 Balanced Sags.For balanced sags the phase-angle jump is equal in the
three phases; thus the shift in firing angle is the same for all three voltages.
If the
shift is lessthan the intendedfiring-angle delay, theoutput voltage of the rectifier
will be higher than it would be without phase-anglejump. This assumesthat the
phase-anglejump is negative, which isnormally the case. A negativephase-angle
jump will thus somewhatcompensatethe drop in voltage due to the sag. For a posi-
tive phase-anglejump the output voltage would be reduced and the phase-anglejump
would aggravatethe effects of the sag.
For a firing angle equal toa the pre-sagarmaturevoltage equals
Va = cos(a) (5.52)
314 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
120,------r--
110
=
~ 100
8- 70 degrees
.5 90
~
S
~ 80
:g
~ 70
o
60
30 degrees
Figure5.73 Influenceof phase-anglejump on
5 10 15 20 25 30 the armaturevoltage,for different firing
Phase-anglejump in degrees
angles.
The voltage is rated to thearmaturevoltage for zero firing angle.For a sag with
magnitude V (in pu) and phase-anglejump !:14>, the during-eventarmaturevoltageis
1.1r-------.---~----
& 0.9
.~ 0.8
co
11o0.7
>
] 0.6
~ 0.5
0.4
1.1....----..,-----r------r------,
=' 0.9
Q.
.9
4)
08
•
co
~ 0.7
>
.8 0.6
g 0.5
0.4
L
+
(5.54)
(5.55)
At time zero the two driving voltagesare the same,thus the line-to-line voltageis zero,
which correspondsto the free-firing point. For a firing-delay anglea, thyristor 2 is fired
at lJJot = a. This is the moment the current through thyristor I startsto rise and the
currentthrough thyristor 2 startsto decay.The changein currentis describedthrough
the following differential equation (note that both thyristors conduct, thus the two
phasesare shorted):
di, di 2
Vt(t) - L
di + L di = V2(t) (5.56)
di 1 + di2
dt dt
=0 (5.57)
J3v
I max = 2eoo (l + cosa) (5.60)
L
Section 5.4 • Adjustable-SpeedDC Drives 317
speed. Speed control will not mitigate thetransientsin torque and current but it may
reduce the variations in speed.
A disadvantageof both control techniques isthat they will lead to a severe
transient inarmaturecurrent and torque upon voltage recovery.
5.4.6.3 Improved Rectifiers. The control of the drive may be significantly im-
proved by using a self-commutating rectifier. These rectifiers enable control of the
output voltage on a sub-cycle timescale. This will preverit the drop in armature
voltage and thus the severe drop in torque. Using advancedcontrol techniquesit
additional enery storagewhich is only madeavailable
may also be possible to install
during a reduction in the supply voltage.
By using self-commutating rectifiers it may also possibleto
be usea sophisticated
control systemthat detects and mitigates phase-anglejumps. With such a control
system, the reference signal should no longerobtainedfrom
be a phase-lockedloop
but from the measured supply voltage through a suitabledigital filter.
Pre-sag power
During-sag
power
0.8 Normal
::s operating
0..
.8 point
~ 0.6
~ Operatingpoint
0
~ with reduced
0.4 voltage
0.2
0
0 50 100 150 200 Figure5.77 Powertransferto a synchronous
Rotor angle in degrees motor as a function of the rotor angle.
0.2
0
0 50 100 150 200 Figure5.78 Powertransferin normal
Rotor angle in degrees
situationand for a deep sag.
Section 5.5 • Other Sensitive Load 321
will start to accelerate again but as it still rotates slower than the airgap field (thus
slower than the frequency of the supply voltage) rotor its angle will continue to
increase. The maximumrotor angle is reached the moment the motor speed comes
back to nominal. As long as this angle is smaller than the angle for the instable
operatingpoint, themotor does not lose synchronism. The figure shows the maximum
angle at the end of the sag which does not lead to an instable situation; this angle is
indicated as"critical angle." According to the so-called"equal-area-criterion"the two
shadedpartsin the figure are equal in area [207].
The highest possiblesteady-staterotor angle equals 90 °-this occurs when the
motor load equals the maximum power which can transportedto
be the motor. If the
motor load is onlyhalf this maximum value, a drop in voltage to 50% will bring the
operatingpoint back to the top of the sine wave again. This 50% is, however, not the
deepest sag the m otor can withstand for a long time. The drop in voltage causes the
motor to slow down, thus when the r otor angle reaches 90° it does not stop but will
continue to increase until the voltage recovers. The deepest long-durationsag can be
found from Fig. 5.79. Again theequal-areacriteria tells usthat the two shadedparts
have the same area .
Operating angle
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
0.8 I
:s I
0.
<: ,
I
't 0.6
~
0
I:l-o
0.4
0.2
5.5.3 Contaetora
Contactorsare a very common way of connecting motor load to the supply. The
supply voltage is used to power an electromagnetwhich keeps thecontactin place.
When the supply voltage fails the contactopens, preventing them otor from suddenly
restartingwhen the supply voltage comes back. This works fine for long interruptions
where the unexpected starting of motors can be verydangerous.But contactorsalso
drop out for voltage sags and short interruptionswhere such a behavior is not always
acceptable. Test results forcontactorsare presented in[34]. The measuredvoltage
tolerance curve for a
contactoris shown in Fig. 5.80. We see that the
contactortolerates
any voltage sag down to a bout70%. When the sag magnitudeis below 70% for longer
than a few cycles, thecontactordrops out. We also see theremarkableeffect that the
voltage tolerance becomes better for deeper sags: a zero voltage toleratedfor
can be 3.5
cycles but a 50% voltage only for one cycle. This effectprobablydue
is to the experi-
mental setup. Sags were generated by switching between normal
a supply and the out-
322 Chapter5 • VoltageSags-EquipmentBehavior
0.8
a
.8 0.6
]
.~
«S 0.4
~
0.2
5.5.4 Lighting
Most lampsjust flicker when a voltage dip occurs.Somebodyusing the lamp will
probably notice it, but it may not .beconsideredas somethingserious. It isdifferent
when the lamp completely extinguishes and takes several minutesto recover. In indus-
trial environments,in places where a large numberof people aregathered,or with street
lighting, this can lead todangeroussituations.
Dorr et a1. [36] havestudiedthe voltagetoleranceof high-pressuresodiumlamps.
Voltage sags can extinguish the lamp, which must cool down for one to several minutes
beforerestarting.The voltage-tolerancecurves for three lamps are shown in Fig. 5.81.
For voltages below50% the lampsalreadyextinguishfor a sagof lessthan two cycles.
Section 5.5 • Other Sensitive Load 323
0.8
[
.s 0.6
~
.~ 0.4
~
0.2
325
326 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
160
140
ft 120
~
8. 100
fI)
bO
~
fI) 80
~
...
0
U 60
\
\
-a
\
\
\
i 40 \
,,
Figure 6.1 Comparisonof two supply
20 ,
I
- - __: _-_-__
-_-_-_-__
-_-_-_-__
-_-_- J alternatives(solid curve: supply I, dashed
o '-----'---"---'------'----'--~-~-.-j curve: supplyII) and twoequipment
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 A,
tolerances (solid vertical line: device
Severityof thesag dashedline: device B).
Section 6.1 • Compatibility BetweenEquipmentand Supply 327
From Fig. 6.1, one canreadthe numberof spurioustrips per year,for eachof the
four designoptions, at the intersectionbetweenthe supply curve and the device (ver-
tical) line. For device AandsupplyI we find 72.6spuriousequipmenttrips peryear,etc.
The resultsare shown in Table 6.1.
Supply I Supply II
Knowing the numberof trips per year, theannualcostsof eachof the four design
options,andthe costsper spurioustrip, it is easy tocalculatethe total annualcosts.For
the combinationof device A and supply I thesecostsare
The resultsfor the four designoptionsareshownin Table6.2. From this tableit follows
that the combinationof supply I and device B has thelowest annualcosts.
Supply I Supply II
0.15 BII
0.1
g
~
.,J:)
~
e
0.05 AI
0.15 "BII
0.1
g
~
£
0.05
Fig. 6.3. This figure showsthat design BI is clearlybetterthan any of the otherdesign
options.
1---------------------,
0.9
0.8
••
!
r, ..
aO.7 •
.~ 0.6
~ 0.5
.~ 0.4
~ 0.3
0.2
0.1
Voltage swells
Lower thresholdfor swells
Upper threshold for sags
Sags due to motor starting
one yearof monitoringat anindustrialsite [155]. For a large powerquality survey, the
scatterdiagramsof all the sites can be combined. A stylized versionof the resulting
scatterdiagram is shown in Fig. 6.5. In this figure not only voltage sags, but also
interruptionsand voltage swells are
indicated.
In Fig. 6.5 we see anumberof heavily populatedregions:
18
16
14
~
..,...c,
;>.. 12
'" 10
bIl
....1J!
0
..,...
.c
8
§ 6
Z
4
2
0
> 0.8s
Figure 6.6 Two-dimensional bar chart of the sag density function shown in Table
6.3.
(6.2)
below 60% for 200 ms, it will trip on average 4.5 times per year.
From such a table the
number ofequipmenttrips per year can be obtainedalmost directly.
50
45
40
~ 35
&30 ~fJ.ril~~~~~
~~ 90%
80%
~ 25
'"
'- 70%
o
~ 20 60%
.0
~ 15
50% . ,&0(,
40% <$''bo~"
10 llc
30% e.,'bo
5
o
25 ~~-----l~"-'£'-+-------:~~-----t-------;- 80%
J-,C--~rJ----+---7"G.-_---+-----+-------t-70%
a--.,t;-----~------+-----+-------t-60% 4)
]
J----~t.--_+_------+-----+_----___t_ 50% .~
8
~-~---+-------+-----+-------t-40% l
5 sags/year
I - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - f - - - - - - - - t - 20%
1--------+-------+------+------.....-,- 10%
Os 0.2 s 0.4 s 0.6 s 0.8 s
Sag duration
17"~"7""""':::r-::;lI..-,.-,..,r----~-~-------r------__ 90%
20
t7----t'7l'----tr-.--.."e-----+------4-------I-70%
15
DeviceA
10 60% ~
t----t----:r---tr-.--------+------+-------4-50% .~
8
~
t--""7'"t----t-------+-------+-------I-40% U)
5 t-----t-----Ir.--------+------+------4- 30%
t----t----tr-.--------+------+-------I- 20%
t-----t----1I----------+------f-------+. 100/0
08 0.2 s 0.48 0.68 0.88
Sag duration
Figure 6.9 Voltage sag coordinationchart, reproducedfrom Fig. 6.8, with two
equipmentvoltage-tolerancecurves.
~.....,.._~7"_::l~--,.,r-----~---y------~-----~ 90%
........,.:....----~..-------+------+------~60% -8
10 a
r---:-i==:::;~~~-------t------;-------;- 50% .~
e
J---....,.r..t-----4I---------f.-------t------_+_ 40% tf
en
51o------II-------4I---------f.-------t--------t- 30%
J------tl------II---------+-------+--------t- 20%
t------tI...------I'-------4-------+----------- 10%
Os 0.28 0.4 s 0.6s 0.88
Sag duration
Figure 6.10 Voltage sag coordinationchart, reproducedfrom Fig. 6.8, with non-
rectangularequipmentvoltage-tolerancecurve.
Adding these twonumbers(6 + 12 = 18) would count double those voltage sags for
which both componentstrip. Both componentstrip when thevoltagedropsbelow 50%
for longer than 200 ms;aboutfour times per year. Thiscorrespondsto point C in the
chart. The numberof equipmenttrips is thus equal to
FA + En - Fe = 6 + 12- 4 = 14 (6.3)
Section 6.2 • Presentationof Results : Voltage SagC oordination Chart 335
The dataobtainedfrom a large survey [68] has been usedplot to the sag density
bar chart shown in Fig. 6.11. The survey measured the quality of the voltage at the
terminals of low-voltageequipment(at the wall outlet) at many sites across the United
States andCanada. Figure 6.11 can thus be interpretedas the average voltage quality
experienced by low-voltage equipment.
From Fig. 6.11, a voltage sagcoordinationcharthas beenobtained,shown in Fig.
6.12. Four equipmentvoltage tolerances are indicatedby the points A, B, C, and D.
The meaningof these will be explained next.
Supposethat a computermanufacturerconsiders differentoptionsfor the power
supply of personalcomputers. The choice is between two different de/deconverters,
with minimum operatingvoltages of 100V and 78 V, and between two capacitorsizes,
leading to 5% and 1% de voltage ripple. Using (5.6) we can calculate the voltage
toleranceof the four designoptions. For a minimum operatingvoltage of 100V and
a de voltage rippleof 5% we find a voltage tolerance of 84% (100 V) and 1.5 cycles, etc.
The results are shown in column 4 of Table 6.5. The voltage tolerancefor the four
options(A , B, C, and D) is indicated by the four dots in Fig. 6.12.
From this voltage sag
70
60
[ 50
.,...
Co
'"
OIl 40
~
e-
.,...o
.r> 30
e
z'"
20
10
6-10 c 20 c-
0.5s
Sag duration
Figure 6.11 Sag density for the average low-voltage supply in the United
Statesand
Canada. (Data obtainedfrom Dorr [681.)
336 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
10 sagsperyear
104V
A ~ t:::::::; -- )
-- -::::: -
/---
......... ::-- V..-
~
lOOV
90
- r-'WB
~~ ~ ~
I-'
~
---
:l
- -- - ~ ~ .."I (5
60
40
10-
-------/
V
~
.--/
l-/V
J
)
II
96V
90V
>
.8
]
30
I..- /
J
84V
78V
'f
C~
f.-- /D f
(/)
-~ 60V
20 -
, 10V
1 c 2 c 3 c 4 c 5 c 6 c 10 c 20 c 0.5 sis 2 s 5 s lOs 30 s 60 s 120 s
Sag duration in cycles (c) and seconds (s)
® ® ® X X X X
® ® ® X X X X
Q9 ® ® X X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
® ® ® ® ® Ix X
® ® ® X X X X
® ® ® X X X X
® ® X X X X X
® ® X X X X X
X X X X X X X
Using this methodit is possible toquantify the quality of the supply including
non-rectangularsags. But thismethodcannotbe used tocharacterizeindividual sags.
Note that this is oftennot a seriousconcernwhen one isinterestedin merelyquantify-
ing the supply performance.
Some sags will still escape
quantification,as shown in Fig. 6.15. A possible choice
here is tomeasurethe time the sag is in each magnituderange in the table, and then
increase thepoints to the left of the table inthat magnituderange. This would lead to
an equivalentsag asindicatedin Fig. 6.15. Themethodproposedin [156] treatsthese
"very non-rectangularsags" in a similar way. To understandthe limitation of the
method in Figs. 6.13, 6.14, and 6.15 the term " rectangularvoltage-tolerancecurve"
is introduced. A piece of equipmenthas a rectangularvoltage-tolerancecurve if its
tripping is determinedby one magnitude and one duration. Thus, the equipment
trips when thevoltage drops below a certain magnitudefor longer than a certain
duration. The actual shapeof the rms voltage versus time has no influence on the
equipmentbehavior. Examplesof such equipmentare undervoltagerelays (e.g., used
to protect induction motors) and mostnon-controlledrectifiers. Alsocomputersand
otherconsumerelectronicsequipmentfit in this category. Manyadjustable-speed drives
trip due to anundervoltage-timerelay at the dc bus or on the ac terminals. Also those
can beconsideredas having a rectangularvoltage-tolerancecurve.
For equipmentwith a rectangularvoltage-tolerancecurve this method directly
gives the expectednumber of spurious trips. For non-rectangularvoltage-tolerance
curves themethod no longer works.That might appeara seriousdisadvantageuntil
one realizesthat a non-rectangularvoltage-tolerancecurve will normally be obtained
for rectangularsags.Applying it directly to non-rectangularsags isproneto uncertain-
ties anyway, nomatter which definition of magnitudeand duration is used. When
assessing the influence of non-rectangularsags on a piece ofequipmentit is recom-
mended to use a r ectangularapproximationof the voltage-tolerancecurve unless more
detailedinformation on its behaviorundernon-rectangularsags is available.
Q9 @ @ @ @ @I X
Q9 @ Q9 @ X X X
Q9 ® @ ® X X X
@ X X X X X X
@ X X X X X X
-
X X X X X X X
Figure 6.15 Problemsin updatingthe
cumulativetable for a verynon-rectangular
Duration sag.
(6.4)
The method can be extended toward other types. The main problem remains to obtain
the type of sag frommonitoringdata. A technique for this has been proposed in
[203],
[204] which requires the sampled waveforms.
Type A
Duration
_.. Tn'~~
Duration
._. _....!~e _~. "_ . . .__..._..
Trip No trip
0.
.[
ll)
(6.5)
0°
No ~ N
30
30°
N60
60°
N90
90°
The resultsof these surveys will be presented and discussed in the following
paragraphs.For more details about the surveys refer to the various paperscited.
These are by far the only surveys, but they were the ones for which detailed results
were available. With the exceptionof the EFI survey all the resultspresentedbelow
Dorr [54] contains
werepublishedin the internationalliterature.Especially the paper by
very usefulinformation. The amountof results published, even in reports,is still very
limited. There must still be gigabytesof very interestingmonitoring data stored at
utilities all over the world, waiting to be processed.numberof
A observationscan be
made from thevarious surveys, someof which are mentionedbelow. To explain or
check all this,further analysis of thedatais needed.
TABLE 6.6 CumulativeVoltage Sag Table for CEA SecondarySide Data: Numberof Sags perYear
Duration
TABLE 6.7 CumulativeVoltage Sag Table for CEA Primary Side Data: Numberof Sags perYear
Duration
30.0
25.0
:a
...;"., 20.0
"e,
'"
OJ)
.....0~ 15.0
...
'"
1
Z
10.0
5.0
50-70%.,J§'
10-50% ~'Ir~
0-10%
Duration in seconds
80 50 20 10 sags/year
~
::::--:::
::::::::::
--- /'i/ Wi 90%
I-----
80%
/ 70% t
/ 50%
~
10%
17 ms lOOms 167 ms 333 ms 0.5 s I s 2s 10 s
Duration
30
25
Duration in seconds
Duration
Magnitude 1 cycle 6 cycles 10 cycles 20 cycles 0.5 sec I sec 2 sec 10 sec
Duration
Magnitude I cycle 6 cycles 10 cycles 20 cycles 0.5 sec I sec 2 sec 10 sec
80
70
... 60
"'"
...>-
'0." 50
'"
....0~ 40
l>
e:s
30
Z
20
10 50-70% ..,s>"O'lJ
10-50% ~'!1q
0-10%
80
70
.,
Ii!
>.
60
.,... 50
.,
Co
bO
.,
'" 40
'-
0
...
~ 30
~
Z
20
10
20
10
sags/year
F-."""""'=-r"""t--,,...,:==-t----j----+-----ji"""""---t----'-----'---j 80%
f - - - - f - - - - f - - - - +---+--+--1f----+- - - - j 50%
the survey.F urtherinvestigation of the datais needed to find out whether most
starting
events areclusteredor whetherit is all due to a smallnumberof sites. Acomparison
between theNPL dataand the CEAdatashows a much larger numberof events for the
former . The most likelyexplanationis the much lower lightning activity inCanadaas
comparedto the United States .
348 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessmen1
Duration
Magnitude I cycle 6 cycles 10 cycles 20 cycles 0.5 sec I sec 2 sec 10 sec
Duration
Magnitude I cycle 6 cycles 10 cycles 20 cycles 0.5 sec I sec 2 sec 10 sec
30
25
:a
Q)
...>.
Q)
20
.,
0.
bll
.,
~
....0 15
...
Q)
.&J
§ 10
Z
Figure 6.26 EPRI feeder data : sag density function , correspond ing to Table 6.10.
50 20 10 5 sags/year
rrT"rrrTrTTTr---r- ...,,-- - , - , - -- - - ,r-r- - - ,--....::....--n------,- 90%
~"....r£"....r£'_A----r'=-+--T+------1I-----+----(t-------j - 80%
]
f--+--A---+~--+-----I----t-----j'+---+ 70% . ~
~
:::E
~--_A---+---+-----I----t--+-+---+ 50%
30
25
5
50-70% .J'¢)
o 10-50% ~i'
0-10%
50 20 10 5 sags/year
r-r-r=-.l'~---+'~--+----+---r""---+----+----\· 80%
.g
a
h<:=:::..--.....,f=--- - + -- - + - - - - I - + - - - - + -- - - + - - - - \·70% '§,
os
~
1----- - - + - - - + - - - + - - + -- + - -- - + - - - - + - - - - \·50%
• Reclosing actions on the feeder beyond the point where the monitor is con-
nected. Themonitor on the feeder will record a deeper sag than the one in the
substation. This would explain the deepshort sags. As thedistribution trans-
former is often Dy-connected, deep sags due to single-phase faults will not
transfer fully to low voltage. This explains the smaller
numberof deep short
sags measured at low voltage (NPL survey).
Section 6.3 • PowerQuality Monitoring 351
TABLE 6.12 Numberof Events with aDurationLess than20 Cycles: NPL Survey (LV) andEPRI Survey (Feeder,
Substation)
Distribution
TABLE 6.13 CumulativeVoltage Sag Table for EFID ata, All Low-Voltage
Networks: Numberof Sags per Year
Duration (sec)
Magnitude 0.01 0.1 0.5 1.0 3.0 20.0
90% 74.7 36.5 18.5 12.1 8.6 6.8
700/0 26.3 11.9 8.2 7.5 6.8 5.9
40% 16.6 9.8 7.5 7.5 6.8 5.9
1% 9.3 8.2 7.5 7.5 6.8 5.9
Source: Data obtainedfrom Seljeseth[67].
352 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
TABLE 6.14 CumulativeVoltage Sag Table for EFI Data, All Distribution
Networks: Numberof Sags perYear
Duration (sec)
TABLE 6.15 CumulativeVoltage Sag Table for EFI Data, 950/0 Percentile
for Low-Voltage Networks: Numberof Sags perYear
Duration (sec)
TABLE 6.16 CumulativeVoltage Sag Table for EFI Data, 95% Percentile
for ·Distribution Networks: Numberof Sagsper Year
Duratjo~ (sec)
50
45
40
.,til 35
..
>.
.,
., 30
0.
OIl
., 25
....'"
~
..
0
., 20
§ 15
Z 70-90%
10
40-70% ~
5 ,s.'/!!
's
1-40% ~q
0 ~
e,'bo"Jo
50
45
40
..~
>.
.,0.
35
30
.,
OIl
.,
....0'" 25
~
..., 20
§ 15
Z 70-90%
10
40-70% ~
5 .,s.'/!!
1-40% ~q
0 $'
e,'bo"Jo
160
140
120
:....
..
;...
.0.... 100
VI
bO
80
....'0"
VI
.D
..... 60
E
::l 70-90%
Z 40
40-70% ~
20 ~'tS
's
1-40% ~~
0 <$'
~"'~
160
140
120
:.
...
.....
;...
0..
100
VI
bO
80
....'"0
VI
~
.. 60
§ 70-90%
Z 40
40-70% ~
20
.s>
1-40% ~~
0 <$'
~"'~
Figure 6.33 Sag density for 95% percentile of EFI distrib ution networks,
corresponding to Table 6.16.
Section 6.3 • Power Quality Mon
itoring 355
18
16
14
E 12
'"
>
....'"0 10
fl'"
OJ)
s:: 8 - -
'"g 6
'"
e,
.-
:?i;;~
f ";).
4 ff41 - f-- ,....--
~
2 - I!
..,
h ~
'- .~~ 1-
:~~
~'.!:.-"
:f\,'-!$1.
0
Jan Feb March April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec
Month of the year
6.3.1.6 Correcting for Short Monitoring Periods.The variation of the sag fre-
quency through the year indicates that the monitoring period should be at least I
year to get a good impression of the power quality at a certain site. As weather activ-
ity varies from year to year, it is even neededmonitor
to several years. In case a lim-
ited monitoring period is used, it is still possible to get a rough estimate of the
average number of sags over a longer period [49]. To do this, faultdata are needed
over themonitoring period as well as over a longer period of time.
356 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
Ideally, one would like toknow the numberof faults in theareaof the system in which
the sagsoriginate. Often this information is not available: one is likely to only have
fault data over the whole servicearea of the utility. This method also neglects the
above-mentionedshort-durationsags due totriggering of overvoltagedevices and
sags due totransientfaults which are not recorded.
The correction method can beimproved if the sags can betraced back to the
voltage levels at which theyoriginated:
Fli)]
N
sags= L[
I
N(i) faults
sags X N(')
faults
(6.9)
with N.~2gs the numberof sagsduring the monitoring period originatingat voltage level
i, etc. In most cases it will
not bepossibleto traceback all sags. Only for a small
number
of sites thismethodmight be suitable.It has been used in [49] to q uantify the average
supply performancein Japan.
6.3.1.7 Variation in Space. The basic assumptionof a large power quality sur-
vey is that the averagepower quality, over a number of sites, givesinformation
aboutthe power quality for each individual site. Thus, if the conclusionof the survey
is that there are onaverage25 sagswithin a certain magnitudeand duration range,
this number should at least be anindication of the numberof sags at anindividual
site, in an individual year. Obtaining information about the differences between dif-
ferent sites is difficult;partly becausemainly the averageresults have been published;
partly because differences betweensites arenot always statistically significant after a
short monitoring period.
Someindication of the differencebetween sites iso btainedfrom the EFI survey.
The difference between the 95% site and the averageof all sites is very large, as can be
seen bycomparingTables6.13 and 6.15. At least5% of the sites haveaboutfour times
as many sags as theaverageof all sites. For those sites theaveragevalues donot give
much usefulinformation. The problem is that without a prior study it is difficult to
know whetherthe averagedataappliesto a certainsite. Furthersplitting up thedataset
in different types of sites, e.g., systems with mainly overheadlines and systems with
mainly undergroundcables, canreducethe spreadamongthe sites within onegroup.
But reducing thedataset will' also increasethe statisticalerror in the estimates.
Information on the spreadin power quality amongdifferent sites is also given in
[72]. Sags and someo ther voltage disturbanceswere measuredat 24 sites from May
1977through September1979,leading to a total of 270 monitor-monthsof data. The
Section 6.3 • PowerQuality Monitoring 357
10% II 6 3 2 0
250/0 17 9 5 3 2
50% 25 13 8 5 3
75% 36 19 12 8 5
900/0 51 26 17 12 8
total amountof dataof this survey is not very large, but the
monitor period at each site
is long enoughto make some comparisonbetween the different sites. Some of the
results are shown inT able 6.17. This table gives, for various minimum durations,the
maximum number of sags andinterruptionsfor a certain percentageof sites. As an
example:25°~ of the sites has fewerthan five events per year longer than 200 milli-
seconds. Also:80% of the sites has between 11 and 51 events per year longerthan one
cycle in duration,the remaining20% of sites are outsideof that range.For about half
of the sites themedianvalue is areasonableindicatorof the numberof sagsthat can be
expected. Asalreadymentionedbefore, it ishard to know if a site belongs to the 500/0
average sites or not,without monitoring the supply.
8.3.2 IndividualSites
Monitoring is not only usedfor large power quality surveys, it is also used for
assessing thepower quality of individual sites.For harmonicsand voltagetransients,
reliable results can beobtainedin a relativelyshortperiod of time. Someinterestingsite
surveys inCanadianrural industry have beenperformedby Koval [58]. One of the
conclusionsof his studieswas that a monitoring period of two weeks gives a good
impressionof the power quality at a site[59]. Again it needs. to be stressed that this
holds only for relativelyfrequentevents like voltagetransientsand motor startingsags
and for phenomenalike harmonicsand voltagefluctuation. Voltage sags andinterrup-
tions of interest for compatibility assessment have occurrence frequencies of once a
month or less.Much longer monitoring periods are needed for those events.
6.3.2.1 The Required Monitoring Period.To estimate how long the monitoring
period needs to be, we assume that the time-between-events exponentiallydistribu-
is
ted. This meansthat the probability of observing an event, in let's say the next min-
ute, is independentof the time elapsed since the last event. Thus, events occur
completelyindependentfrom each other.Under that condition the numberof events
capturedwithin a certain period is a stochasticvariable with a so-called Poisson dis-
tribution.
Let Jl be the expectednumberof events per year, then the observed numberof
eventsK, over amonitoringperiod of n years is a discrete stochasticvariablewith the
following distribution:
(6.10)
358 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
with N = nil the expectednumberof events inn years, i.e., in the wholeobservation
period. To limit the relativeerror to E the monitoringperiod n shouldfulfill the follow-
ing inequality:
2
--<E (6.13)
~
or
4
n > -2 (6.14)
J-LE
• A large fraction of voltage sags is due to bad weather: lightning, heavy wind,
snow, etc. The sag frequency thereforenot
is at all constantbut follows the
annual weatherpatterns.But the amountof weatheractivity also varies sig-
nificantly from year to year. Due to the relation betweenvoltage sags and
adverseweather,the sags come in clusters. To getcertain a accuracyin the
estimate,one needs to observe more than a minimum numberof clusters. It is
obviousthat this will increase therequiredmonitoring period. To get a long-
term average a long monitoringperiodis needed. Acorrectionmadeaccording
to (6.8) might increase the accuracy.
• Power systems themselves are not static but change continuouslyfrom year to
year. This especially holds fordistribution networks. The numberof feeders
connectedto a substation·can change; ora notherprotectiverelay is used. Also
componentfailure rates can change, e.g., due to aging; increasedloading of
components;different maintenancepolicies; or because the amountof squirrels
in the areasuddenlydecreases.
6.4.2.1 Outlineof the Method. The method of fault positions proceeds, sche-
matically, as follows:
8
3 4 5 l
6 .-..---
Figure 6.35 Part of power system with fault
positions.
Load
The first step inapplying the methodof fault positionsis the choiceof the actual
fault positions. It will be obvious that to obtain more accurateresults, more fault
positions are needed.But a random choice of new fault positions will probably not
increasethe accuracy,only increasethe computationaleffort.
Threedecisionshave to bemadewhen choosingfault positions:
Below are somesuggestionsfor the choice of the fault positions. A numberof those
suggestionsare borrowed from the method of critical distancesto be discussedin
Section 6.5. In this section only the results will be used; for more theoretical back-
ground one is advisedto read Section6.5 first.
The main criterion in choosingfault positionsis: a fault position should represent
short-circuit faults leading to sags with similar characteristics.
This criterion has been
applied in choosingthe fault positionsin Fig. 6.35 and Table 6.19.
Vnom
Z s= (6.15)
v'3 x [fault
0.8
.e~ 0.6
Q
~
8 c=
0
fO.4
r/) ·3en
J:J
~
0.2 ]
.s
0
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
Distanceto the fault
0.8
\
~
lO.6
~
: 0.4
en /'
0.2
../
..... .... ~Approximated voltage
........~ Actualvoltage
O...----I---+----t--~~---I----+-----I~---I
o 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
Distanceto the fault
Source
Feeder
Load
Figure 6.38 Faults ina radial system.
The feederhasan impedancez per unit length and the distancebetweenthe substation
and the fault is x, leading to a feederimpedanceof ZF = zx. The voltage at the sub-
stationduring the fault (as afraction of the pre-fault voltage)is found from
V - ZF _ xz (6 16)
sag - ZS+ZF - ~+xz ·
.../31/ou11
For a given sag magnitude Vsag, we can calculatethe distanceto the fault:
Vnom Vsag
x = X ------~ (6.17)
./3Z[/ault 1 - Vsag
Note that someapproximationsare madehere, which will be discussedin Section6.5.
Consideras an example a 34.5 kV system with 10kA availablefault currentand a
feederimpedanceof 0.3 O/km. This gives the following distances to the fault:
If we want to distinguish between a sag down 10% to and one down to 20%, we need
fault positionsat least every kilometer. But if thebordersof the bins in the sag density
table are at500~, 70%, 80%, and900~, fault positionsevery' 5 km are sufficient.Note
also that the required distance between fault positionsincreases very fast when moving
away from the load position. Thus, the required density of fault positionsdecreases fast
for increasing distance to the fault.
Equation (6.17) gives anindication of the distancebetween faultpositions for
linesoriginatingin thesubstationfrom which the load is fed.For otherlines, one or two
fault positions per line is normally enough, if thesubstationsare not too close. A
possible strategy is to first calculate the resulting magnitudefor
sag faults in the sub-
station and to insert fault positions in between when the resulting sagmagnitudefor
two neighboringsubstationsdiffers too much.
Choosingtwo fault positions per line instead o f one couldactually speed up the
calculationsif the fault positions are chosen at the beginningand end of the line. This
way, all tinesoriginating from the samesubstationneed only one voltagecalculation.
The situationbecomes morecomplicatedwhen networksare meshed across vol-
tage levels, like thetransmissionvoltage levels in theUnited Statesand in severalo ther
countries.Considera system like in Fig. 6.39. A safe strategyis to use multiple fault
positions on the indicated lines and only one or two fault positionson the other lines,
including 138kV, 230kV, and 345kV. Due to the multiple pathsfor the fault current
and the relatively largetransformerimpedances, faults at 138kV and higher will not
cause very deep sags; and the precise fault positionwill not have much influence on the
sagmagnitude.For 230kV and 345kV, one faultposition per substationis probably
still too much. The main problem is that no definite rules can be given for the required
numberof fault positions. In case computationtime is noconcern,and the selectionof
fault positionsis automatic,one might simply choose 10 or even more fault positions
for each line.
In the above, only the sag magnitudehas been used to determinethe numberof
fault positions.Apart from the sagmagnitude,the sagduration will also have to be
considered. The sag d uration depends on theprotectionused for thevarious feeders
and substationcomponents.It is especiallyimportant to considerparts of the system
where faults lead to longer fault-clearing time and thus to a longer sagduration.
Possible examples are busbars protectedby the backup protection of the infeeding
lines; faults toward the remote endof a transmissionline cleared by thedistance
protectionin its zone 2.
345kV
1. Use (6.17) toestimateat which distancea fault would lead to a sag down to
90%, or anyothervalue for the"mostshallow sagof interest."For transmis-
sion voltages this will give very large values (600 km for a 345 kV system with
10 kA availablefault current),which areprobablymuch higherthanactually
needed.
2. Startwith fault positionsin a restrictedarea, and look at the sagmagnitudes
for faults at theborderof this area.If thesemagnitudesare below900/0, the
area needs to be extended.If the system isavailablein the right format for a
suitablepower systemanalysispackage,this might still be the fastestmethod.
6.4.3.4 Multiple Events. The method of fault positions in its basic form only
considersshort-circuit faults in an otherwisenormal system. Multiple events like a
fault during the failure of anearbypower stationare normally not considered.To in-
clude these, faultcalculationsneed to beperformedfor the system with the power
station out of operation.The choice of fault positions becomes even more compli-
cated now. Only those faults need to be consideredfor which the outage of the
power station influences the sag.When an automaticmethod is used, it isprobably
simplest toconsiderall situations.The beststrategyappearsagain to' start with gen-
erator stationsnear the load,and move further away from the load until there is no
longer any significant influence on the sag
magnitude.Significant influence should be
defined as likely to affectbehaviorof equipment.
6.4.4.2 Voltages Due to One Fault.F igure 6.41 shows the effectof a fault half-
way between busses 2and 4 on the voltages throughout the system. Only bus 4
BUS 22
230kV
BUSt3
Trans. 4
BUS 10""'''''''''
138kV BUS 4
BUS 8
BUSS
BUst BUS2
shows avoltage drop below 50%, but the voltagedrops below 900/0 in a large part
of the 138kV system.Note that the voltagedrops to 280/0 at bus 4, but only to58%
at bus 2, while theshort-circuit fault is exactly in the middleof the line between bus
2 and bus 4. This difference is due to the generatorsat bus I and bus 2 keeping up
the voltage. Bus 4 is far away from any generatorstation, thus the voltagedrops to
a much lower value. The dense c oncentrationof generatorstationskeeps up the vol-
tage in most of the 230 kV system, thuspreventingmore serious voltagedrops. Also,
the relatively hightransformerimpedancemakesthat the voltagedrops at 230 kV le-
vel are small. This figure shows some well-known and trivial facts which are still
worth repeatinghere:
6.4.4.3 Exposed Area.In Fig. 6.41 the fault position was fixed and voltage
sags were calculated for all busses. Figure 6.42 gives the reversed
situation: the vol-
tage magnitudeis calculated for one bus but for many fault positions. In this case,
the sagmagnitudeat bus 4 is calculated. Positions leading to equal magnitudes
sag
at bus 4 are connectedthrough "contour lines" in Fig. 6.42.Contourlines have been
plotted for sag magnitudes of30% , 50% , 60%, 70% , and 80% • The area in which
faults lead to a sag below a certain voltage is called the "exposed
area."The term ex-
posed area was originally linked to
equipmentbehavior. Suppose t hat the equipment
trips when the voltagedrops below 600/0. In that case theequipmentis "exposed"to
all faults within the 60% contour in the figure; hence the term exposed .area. As
faults can only occur onprimary components(lines, cables,transformers,busses,
speakingnot an area, but acollection of points (the
etc.), the exposed area is strictly
substations)and curves (the lines and cables). But drawing a closedcontourhelps to
visualize the concept.Knowing which primary componentsare within the exposed
area can be morevaluable information than the actual number of sags. Suppose
there is anoverheadline across amountainprone to adverseweather,within the ex-
posed area. Then it might be worth to consideradditional protection measuresfor
this line, or to change the systemstructureso that this line no longer falls within the
exposed area, or to improve equipmentimmunity so that the exposedareano longer
con tains this line.
From Fig. 6.42 andother exposed areacontours,the following conclusionsare
drawn:
138kV 8.58
6.81
7.14
4.72
Figure 6.43 Voltage sag frequencyfor all busses in the RTS:numberof sags
below 800/0. (Reproducedfrom Qader[71].)
138kV 12.18
12.18
12.18 12.18
Figure 6.44 Voltage sag frequency(numberof sags per year) for all busses in the
reliability test system when the 138 kV
g eneratorsare out of operation.
(Reproducedfrom Qader[71].)
TABLE 6.24 Influenceof GeneratorSchedulingon the SagFrequencyin the Reliability Test System,Numberof
Sags perYear below 65%
138 kV Bus
Generator
Scheduling 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Generatorlout 2.80 2.77 3.24 3.65 3.42 3.16 0.80 1.47 2.65 3.38
Generator2 out 2.43 2.79 3.06 3.77 3.44 3.18 0.80 1.49 2.64 3.40
Generator7 out 1.54 1.40 3.06 2.81 3.20 3.18 4.42 4.42 3.11 3.44
Average 2.26 2.32 3.12 3.41 3.35 3.17 2.01 2.46 2.80 3.41
All generatorsin 1.34 1.40 2.85 2.19 2.16 2.60 0.80 1.34 2.59 2.81
All generatorsout 7.37 7.37 6.73 7.43 7.06 5.19 6.66 6.66 5.88 5.96
Section 6.5 • TheMethod of Critical Distances 373
138kV busses are shown in Table 6.24. The table shows numberof
the sags below65%
for all 138kV substations,for a number of generatorscheduling options. The sag
frequency for the three4-monthperiods mentioned, is given in the rows labeled "gen-
erator lout," "generator2 out," and "generator7 out." The numberof sags per year
has beencalculatedas the averageo f these three sag frequencies, and included in the
row labeled"average."For reference the sag frequency is also given for situation
the
when all generatorsare in operation("all generatorsin") and when all three 138kV
generatorsare out of operation("all generatorsout").
The methodof critical distances doesnot calculate the voltage at a given fault
position,
but the fault position for a given voltage. By using some simple expressions, it is
possible to findout where in thenetwork a fault would lead to a voltage sag down
to a givenmagnitudevalue. Each fault closer to the load will cause a deeper sag. The
numberof sagsmore severethan this magnitudeis the numberof short-circuitfaults
closer to the loadthan the indicated positions.
We first describe the basic theory and give the outline
of the method. A simple
exampledemonstrateshow to apply the method. In the derivationof the basic expres-
sion, anumberof approximationshave been made. More exact expressions and expres-
sions for non-radial systems are derived next. Finally the resultsof the method are
comparedwith the resultsof the methodof fault positions.
The method of critical distances is based on the voltage divider model for the
voltage sag, asintroducedin Fig. 4.14. Neglecting loadcurrentsand assuming the pre-
event voltage to be one, weobtainedfor the voltage at thepoint-of-commoncoupling
(pee)during the fault:
ZF
Vsag = ZF + Zs (6.18)
Zs the source impedance
where ZF is the impedancebetween the pee and the fault, and
at the pee. LetZF = z£, with z the feeder impedance per unit length and
£, the distance
between the peeand the fault. This results in the following expression for the sag
magnitude:
Zs V
LCrit =---; x 1 _ V (6.20)
Here it isassumedthat both source and feeder impedance are purely reactive rather
(a
commonassumptionin power system analysis), or more general: that the angle in the
complex plane between these two impedances is zero.
Strictly speaking(6.20) only holds for a single-phase system.For three-phase
Zs and z the positive-
faults in a three-phasesystem, the expressions are valid if for
374 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
II kV. 15 1 MVA
- - ---- - - - -- - 80%
-
.-..
__------- 90%
Figure 6.45 An II kV network used as an
example for the method of critical distances.
Section 6.5 • The Methodof Critical Distances 375
Critical Voltage Critical Distance Exposed Length Number of Trips per Year
90% 21.4 km 24.0 km 15.5
80% 9.6 km 21.6 km 13.9
700~ 5.6 km 16.8 km 10.8
60% 3.6 km 12.2 km 7.9
50% 2.4 km 8.6 km 5.5
40% 1.6km 5.4 km 3.5
300/0 1.0 km 3.0 km 1.9
200/0 0.6 km 1.8km 1.1
10% 0.3 km 0.9 km 0.6
v= ZF (6.21)
ZS+ZF
where Zs = Rs + jXs is the sourceimpedanceat the pee,ZF = (r + jx)£' is the impe-
dancebetweenthe fault and the pee,.c is the distancebetweenthe fault and the pee,
z = r + jx is the feeder impedanceper unit length. The load currents have been
neglected; thepre-fault voltageat the peeequalsthe sourcevoltageequals 1000/0.
In Section4.5 expressionshave beenderivedfor the magnitudeV and the phase-
anglejump as afunction of the distancebetweenthe peeand the fault. Equation(4.87)
for the magnitudeof the voltagereadsas follows:
v = -1-~-A --;::;::===:::::::::::====
i 2A(l-COSa) (6.22)
- (1+Ai
with
A = ZF = Z X £,
(6.23)
Zs Zs
a the angle in thecomplex plane betweensourceand feeder impedance,the so-called
impedanceangle:
(6.25)
376 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
(6.26)
(6.28)
25r - - - - - - - r - - - - - - , . - - - - - , - - - - - - - , . - - - ,
50 r - - - - - . , . . - - - - - . . , . - - - - - . - - - - - , - - - - ,
40
d
~ 30
&
.5
~ 20
Jj ~.
/'
10
The more thisfactor deviates from one, the larger theerrormadeby using the simplified
expression (6.20). This e rror has beencalculatedas (1 - k) * 100% and plotted in Fig.
6.47 for three valueso f the impedanceangle. The simplified expression (6.20) overesti-
mates the criticaldistance(and thus thenumberof sags) as is also shown in Fig. 6.46.
The error is, however, small in most cases, with the exception of systems with large
impedance angles like undergroundcables indistributionsystems. A first-order correc-
tion to the simplified expression (6.20) can obtainedby
be approximating(6.29)around
V=O:
(6.30)
L,crit
z,
=--;- x
V
I _ V (I - V(l - cosa)} (6.32)
0 -.......::----
I
-0.5 l
,
, ,
-1 , ,
, ,
5 -15
\
\
,
U .
,,
[
.S -2 \
,
... ,
,
~ -2.5 \
~ \
,
I
-3 \
\ I
,
I
-3.5 I
Figure 6.48 Error madeby usinga first-order /
1,
For Veq < there are no sags. 1
For < Veq < 1, (6.20) can be used to calculate the
critical distance,with V = Vchar• The resulting sag frequency should be multiplied~by
to accountfor the fact that one in three faults does not lead to a sag at equipment
the
terminals. For a type D sagof magnitude Vcha" one phase has m a agnitudeof Vchar
also. The expression for the critical distance can be applied directly, but the resulting
sag frequency needs to be multiplied by!. The two other phasesdrop to
Veq = ~ j n: + 3 (6.35)
For Veq < !"f3 this gives nocontribution.For!"f3 < Veq < 1, the critical distance can
be calculatedby using
(6.36)
and the resulting sag frequency should be multiplied j.byNote that the two sag
frequencies for the type D sag
should be added.
Section 6.5 • TheMethod of Critical Distances 379
• For a given critical voltage at the equipmentterminals Veq, the critical char-
acteristicmagnitude Vchar is calculatedby using
(6.37)
The resultis shownin the secondcolumnof Table6.26. For Veq < 0.5 thevalue
underthe squareroot is negative, whichmeansthat even for aterminal fault
(distancezero), thevoltageat the equipmentterminalsis higher than the cri-
tical voltage. The contribution to the exposedlength is thus zero, hence the
zeros in the first few rowsof the table.
• From the critical characteristicmagnitude,the critical distanceis calculatedin
the standardway, by using
z,
Vcru=-x---
v-; (6.38)
z 1 - Vchar
0 0 0 0 0
0.1 0 0 0 0
0.2 0 0 0 0
0.3 0 0 0 0
0.4 0 0 0 0
0.5 0 0 0 0
0.6 0.38 1.5 5.0 2.1
0.7 0.57 3.2 11.4 4.9
0.8 0.72 6.1 18.2 7.8
0.9 0.86 14.7 24 10.3
380 Chapter6 • VoltageSags-Stochastic
Assessment
Consider, as a second example, that the low-voltage load isconnectedin star (thus
phase-to-neutralsingle-phase load). The three-phaseunbalancedsag will beof type D,
with one deep sag and two shallow sags atequipmentterminals.
the Acalculationof the
trip frequency using themethodof critical distancesis summarizedin Table6.27. Only
critical voltages between80% and 960/0 are shown in the table. The calculationfor
other voltage values proceeds in a similar way.
Magnitude
Equipment Critical Exposed Trip Characteristic Critical Exposed Trip Total Trip
Terminals Distance Length Frequency Magnitude Distance Length FrequencyFrequency
(pu) (km) (km) (per year) (pu) (km) (km) (per year) (per year)
• The calculationsfor the shallow sag proceed fairly similar to the calculations
for thedelta-connected load. As a first step the critical voltage at the equipment
terminals istranslatedinto a criticalcharacteristicmagnitude,using the follow-
ing expression:
(6.39)
• The first step is the translation from the characteristicvoltage to the initial
voltage,for which expression(6.41) is used.The characteristicmagnitudecan-
not be lessthan0.33 pu, hencethe zerosin the tablesfor lower valuesthanthis.
• From the critical initial voltage,the critical distancecan be calculatedby using
the standardexpression
r Zs Vinit
J-crit = - X (6.42)
z 1 - Vinit
o o o o o
0.1 o o o o
0.2 o o o o
0.3 o o o o
0.4 0.10 0.1 0.3 0.2
0.5 0.25 0.4 1.2 0.8
0.6 0.40 0.8 2.4 1.5
0.7 0.55 1.4 4.6 3.0
0.8 0.70 2.7 9.8 6.3
0.9 0.85 6.6 18.6 12.0
6.5.5.5 Single-Phase
Faults-GeneralSolutions. In resistance-groundedd istri-
bution systems,the assumptionthat positive- and zero-sequencei mpedanceare equal
no longer holds. The assumptionis also not valid when line impedancesare a large
part of the sourceimpedance.This is the casein the 400kV supply in Fig. 4.21, as
was shown in Fig. 4.105. To obtain a more general expressionfor the critical dis-
tance, we can use the phase-to-neutralv oltage in the faulted phase according to
(4.40):
V - 1- 32s1 (6.45)
an - (2z) + zo)£ + (2ZS1 + Zso)
The distanceto the fault £erit can beobtainedfor a given (critical) phase-to-neutral
voltage Van:
v _ Z£+ZSO (6.47)
char - z£ + Zs
0.86 0 0 0
0.88 0.9 2.7 1.7
0.90 2.2 7.8 5.0
0.92 4.2 13.3 8.9
0.94 7.4 19.4 12.5
0.96 13.9 24 15.5
0.98 33.5 24 15.5
To obtain the voltage at the pee we have to realizethat all load currentshave been
neglected here.There are no pre-fault power flows, andboth generatorsin Fig. 4.24
outputvoltage, sothat they canbe replaced by onesourcein the
have exactly the same
equivalent scheme. The following expression for the voltage obtained
is from this
scheme:
2
V 2 (6.50)
pee = Z3 + ZIII(2 3 + Z4)
v - 1- Z1Z 4 (6.51)
sag - 2 2(Z I + 2 3 + 2 4) + ZI(Z3 + 2 4)
distance,we substitute2 2 = Z X L. The critical
To obtain an expression for the critical
distanceis obtainedby solving v,rag = Vcrit toward £. The resultingexpressionis
I _ Veril
Peril ~ I - (6.59)
Vmax'
] 1400 3000 ' s 1600
x ~ 1400
= 1200 ~ 2500 .S 1200
:B 1000 t 2000 fa 1000
j 800 ] 1500 ] 800
"'0 600 "'0 JX
&
~
400 &
~ 1000 ~600
&400 ~x
J
~ 200 _. ~x..~-;...x ~. 500 ~ 200 *_*__X#..
00 20
x....-=~x-~
40
.
60 80
J 100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 °0 20 40 60
Sagmagnitudein percent
80 100
Sagmagnitudein percent Sagmagnitudein percent
o0 20 XC==40 60 8'0 1
00 o 20 40 60 80 100 00 20 40 60 80 100
Sagmagnitudein percent Sagmagnitudein percent Sagmagnitudein percent
B 1200 a 800
z
~ 700 o
.s 1000 .5 600
fo 800 i 500
]600 .!400
"d
~ 400 ] 300
200
" " ;,;z. 8. 200
! &1 100
0 -'II'-Z-;r 00
0 20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60 80 100
Sagmagnitudein percent Sagmagnitudein percent
Figure 6.49 Exposedlength for nine 400 kV substations:c omparisonbetweenthe methodof fault positions(crosses)and the methodof critical distances(diamonds).
Section 6.5 • TheMethod of Critical Distances 387
The contribution of the feeder to the exposed length equals the critical fraction times
the feeder length.F or Veri' > Vmax the whole feedercontributesto the exposed length.
389
390 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
Reduce number
of faults
Improve system
design
Mitigate
disturbance
Improve
equipment
Figure 7.1 The voltagequality problemand
ways of mitigation.
These four types ofmitigation are discussed briefly next. Power system design and
mitigation equipmentat the system-equipmentinterfaceare discussed in detail in the
remainderof this chapter.Power engineers have always usedcombinationof
a these
mitigation methodsto ensurea reliableoperationof equipment.Classically the empha-
sis has been on reducing the number of interruptions, while recently emphasishas
shifted toward mitigating voltagesags.
One has to keep in mind, however,that these measures may be very expensive that
and
its costs have to be weighted
againstthe consequencesof the equipmenttrips.
Reducingthe fault-clearingtime does not reduce the numberof events but only
their severity. It does not doanything to reduce thenumberor duration of interrup-
tions. Thedurationof an interruptionis determinedby the speed with which the supply
is restored.Fasterfault-clearingdoes also not affect the numberof voltage sags but it
can significantly limit the sagduration.
The ultimate reductionin fault-clearingtime is achieved by using current-limiting
fuses [6],[7]. Current-limitingfuses are able to clear a fault within one half-cycle,that
so
the durationof a voltage sag will rarely exceed one cycle.If we further realizethat fuses
have an extremely small chanceof fail-to-trip, we have what looks like theultimate
solution. The recentlyintroducedstatic circuit breaker[171], [175] also gives a fault-
clearing time within one half-cycle; but it is obviously much more expensive than a
current-limiting fuse. No information is availableaboutthe probability of fail-to-trip.
Additionally several types offault-currentlimiters have beenproposedwhich not so
392 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
much clear the fault, but significantly reduce the fault-currentmagnitudewithin one or
two cycles.
One importantrestrictionof all these devices is t hat they can only be used for low-
and medium-voltagesystems. Themaximumoperatingvoltage is a few tenso f kilovolts.
Staticcircuit breakersshow thepotentialto be able tooperateat higher voltage levels in
the future.
But thefault-clearingtime isnot only the time needed to open the breakerbut also
the time needed for the p rotectionto make a decision. Here we need considertwo
to
significantly different types of distribution networks,both shown in Fig. 7.2.
The topdrawingin Fig. 7.2 shows a system with one circuit breakerprotectingthe
whole feeder.The protectionrelay with thebreakerhas acertaincurrentsetting. This
setting is suchthat it will be exceeded for any fault on the feeder, but not exceeded for
any fault elsewhere in the system nor for any loadingsituation.The momentthe current
value exceeds thesetting (thus for any fault on the feeder) the relay instantaneously
gives a trip signal to thebreaker. Upon receptionof this signal, thebreakeropens
within a few cycles. Typicalfault-clearingtimes in these systems are around 100 milli-
seconds. To limit thenumberof long interruptionsfor the customers,reclosing is used
in combination with (slow) expulsion fuses in the laterals or incombination with
interruptorsalong the feeder. This typeof protectionis commonly used inoverhead
systems.Reducingthe fault-clearing time mainly requires a fasterbreaker.The static
circuit breakeror severalof the othercurrentlimiters would be goodoptionsfor these
systems. Acurrent-limitingfuse to protectthe whole feeder is notsuitableas it makes
fast reclosingmore complicated.Current-limiting fuses can also not be used for the
protection of the laterals because they wouldstart arcing before the mainbreaker
opens. Using a fasterclearing with the main breakerenables fasterclearing in the
lateralsas well.
The network in the bottom drawing of Fig. 7.2 consistsof a numberof distribu-
tion substationsin cascade. To achieve selectivity, time-grading of the overcurrent
relays is used. The relays furthest away from the source tripinstantaneouslyon over-
current.When moving closer to the source, the tripping delay increases each time with
typically 500 ms. In theexamplein Fig. 7.2 the delay times would be 1000ms, 500 ms,
and zero(from left to right). Close to the source, fault-clearing times can be up to
several seconds. These kind of systems are typically used underground
in networksand
in industrial distribution systems.
pr~
Figure 7.2Distribution system with one
circuit breakerprotectingthe whole feeder
(top) and with anumberof substations
. .overcient (bottom).
Section 7.1 • Overviewof Mitigation Methods 393
100%
800/0
]
.~
~
~
Local
50% MVnetworks
Interruptions
0% - - - - - -....- - - - - -.....- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0.1 s 1s
Duration
The structureof the distribution system has a big influence on the numberand
durationof the interruptionsexperienced by thecustomer.The influence of thetrans-
mission system ismuch smaller becauseof the high redundancyused. Interruptions
originating in the distribution system affect lesscustomersat a time, but any given
customerhas a muchhigherchanceof experiencing adistribution-originatedinterrup-
tion than a transmission-originated one. The largeimpact of interruptionsoriginating
in the transmissionsystemmakesthat they shouldbe avoided atalmostany cost. Hence
the high reliability of transmissionsystems.
Number and duration of interruptionsis determinedby the amount of redun-
dancy presentand the speed with which the redundancycan be made available. Table
7.1 gives some types of redundancyand thecorrespondingdurationof the interruption.
Whetherthe supply to a certainload is redundantdepends on the time scale at which
one islooking. In otherwords, on themaximuminterruptiondurationwhich the load
cantolerate.
When apowersystemcomponent,e.g., atransformer,fails it needs to berepaired
or its function takenover byanothercomponentbefore the supply can be restored.In
casethereis no redundanttransformeravailable, the faultedtransformerneeds to be
repairedor a spareone has to beb roughtin. The repairor replacementprocess can take
severalhours or, especially withpower transformers,even days up to weeks. Repair
times of up to onemonth have beenreported.
Lateral
33/11 kV
n/o switch
----: ~
0/0 ntc¥nto
11kvt400~
The system is stilloperatedradially; this prevents the fault level from getting too
high and enables the use of (cheap)overcurrentprotection.If a fault occurs it is cleared
by a circuitbreakerin the substation.The faulted section is removed, thenormallyopen
switch is closed, and the supply can restored.The
be varioussteps in therestorationof
the supply are shown in Fig. 7.6.
T$ $ $/' $ $
(b) Fault clearing
(c) Interruption
---r- Interruptionfor
these customers ____T
(d) Isolatingthe fault
---r-
n---~$ $
(e) Restoringthe supply
Figure 7.6 Restoration procedure in a
distribution system with normally open
points. (a) Normal operation, (b) fault
clearing, (c) interruption, (d) isolating the
fault, (e) restoring the supply.
400 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
that one should in all cases choose taransfer time such that the transfer does not
lead to unacceptableconsequences.W hat should be considered as unacceptableis
simply part of the decision process. In practice the loadof a power system is not
constant,and decisionsabouttransfertime may have to be revised several years later
because more sensitive equipmentis being used, as, e.g., described[163].
in
66 kV substation
E = isinro! (7.1)
and E dependenton the frequency and the exponentially decaying rotor current.
Assume for simplicity that the magnitudeof the induced voltage remains constant
and considera linear decayin motor speed:
~ (7.5)
t=y6KJ
For a mechanicaltime constantT:m = 1 secand a frequencyof 10 = 50 Hz an angular
differenceof 60° is reachedafter 58 ms. In thecalculationit is assumedthat the motor
has not slowed down during the fault. If this is also considered,the value of 60° is
reachedfaster.Only very fast transferschemesareableto switch within this shorttime.
A secondchanceat closing the transferswitch is when the angulardifferenceis about
360° (i.e., sourceand motor are in phaseagain). This takesplacefor
& (7.6)
t=Yh
which is 140IDS in the aboveexample.Theseso-calledsynchronoustransferschemesare
very expensiveand may still leadtotransfertimes above 100 ms. In most cases asyn-
chronoustransfer is used where the transfer switch is only closed after the induced
voltagehassufficiently decayed,leadingto transfertimes aroundonesecondor longer.
For synchronousmachinesthe airgapfield decayswith the sametime 'constantas
the motor speed,so that the terminal voltagemay be presentfor severalseconds.In a
systemwith a large fraction of synchronousmotor load, synchronoustransferbecomes
Section 7.2 • Power System
D esign-Redundancy
ThroughSwitching 403
more attractive. Note that asynchronoustransferwill always lead to lossof the syn-
chronousmotor load.
7.2.4.4 Primary and Secondary Selective Supplies. Figures 7.8 and 7.9 show
two ways of providing a medium-voltagecustomerwith a reliable supply. In a pri-
mary selective system (Fig. 7.8) the transfer takes place on theprimary side of the
transformer.A secondaryselective system (Fig. 7.9) is more expensive but there is a
much reduced chance of very long interruptionsdue to transformerfailure. A numer-
ical analysisof such atransferscheme is given in Section 2.8.
The actual transferis identical to thetransferin the industrial supply shown in
Fig. 7.7: the load istransferredfrom the faulted to thehealthyfeeder as soon as possible
after fault clearing. With aprimary selective supply amake-before-break scheme would
directly connecttwo feeders. It is unlikelythat the utility allows this. Thetransfertakes
place behind atransformerwith the secondaryselective supply. The possible conse-
quencesof a make-before-breakscheme are less severe for the utility.
With the design ofprimary and secondaryselective supplies, it is again very
important to determinethe tolerance of the load to s hort interruptions.The choice
for a certaintype of transferscheme should depend on this tolerance.
Medium-voltage Medium-voltage
substation1 substation2
. -Automatic
transfer
switch
Industrial
Figure 7.8 Primary selective supply. customer
Medium-voltage Medium-voltage
substation1 substation2
Normal Backup
supply supply
II
~'----Ct---+---fc~ Dc
bL=
B
1 23
33 kV
loop
6.6kV
llkV
Another33kV
network
~----t Figure 7.11Distribution network with
n/o redundancythroughparallel operation.
7.3.1.1 Design Criteria for Parallel and Loop Systems.The design of parallel
and loop systems is based on the so-called (n - 1) criterion, which statesthat the
system consisting of n componentsshould be able to operate with only (n - 1)
componentsin operation, thus with onecomponentout of operation. This should
hold for anyonecomponentout of operation. The (n - 1) criterion is very com-
monly used inpower system design. It enables a high reliability without the need
for stochasticassessment. In some cases (large transmissionsystems,generatorsche-
duling), (n - 2) or (n - 3) criteria are used. As we saw in Section 2.8,thorough
a
assessmento f all "common-modefailures" is needed before one can trustfully use
such ahigh-redundancydesign criterion.
Here we will concentrateon the (n - 1) criterion, also referred to as "single
redundancy."This criterion is very commonly used in the designof industrial med-
ium-voltagedistribution as well as in publicsubtransmissionsystems. The main design
rule is that no single eventshould lead to aninterruption of the supply to any of the
customers.In an industrial environmentthe wording is somewhatdifferent: no single
eventshouldlead to aproductionstop for any of the plants. How these basic rules are
further developeddependson the kind of system. A list of things that have to be
consideredis given.
7.3.1.2 Voltage Sags in Parallel and Loop Systems. Considerthe system shown
in Fig. 7.12: three supplyalternativesfor an industrial plant. In theradial system on
the left, theplant is fed through a 25 km overheadline; two more overheadlines ori-
ginate from the samesubstation,each with a lengthof 100km. In thecenterfigure
the plant is fed from a loop bymaking a connectionto the nearestfeeder. In the
third alternativeon the right aseparateoverheadline has beenconstructedin paral-
lel with the existing 25 km line. Themagnitudeof voltage sags due to faults in this
system is shown in Fig. 7.13. The calculationsneeded toobtain this figure are dis-
cussed in Section 4.2.4. We will use Fig. 7.13 to assessnumberof
the voltage sags ex-
periencedby the plant for the three designalternatives.
For the radial system, theplant will experienceinterruptionsdue to faults on
25 km of overheadline, and voltage sags due to faults on 200 of kmline. The relation
between sagmagnitudeand distanceto the fault isaccordingto the dottedline in Fig.
7.13. Improving the voltage toleranceof the equipmentwill significantly reduce the
exposed length. The exposed length for radial operation is given in Table 7.2 for
different equipmentvoltage tolerances. By simplyadding the exposed lengths, it is
assumedthat the impact of interruptionsand voltage sags is the same, whichnot is
always the case. Even if the process trips due to a voltage sag, it mightrequire still
power from the supply for a safes hutdownof the plant.
408 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
] B .e
§ § 0
~
0.8
a
.8
-8 0.6
a
.~
m 0.4 .-
f
f/} :
,
I
I
........
.,
"
ExposedLength
Trips on interruptionsonly 25 km 25 km
Trips on sags below20% 25 km 3km 3 km 31km
Trips on sags below50% 25 km 12 km 12 km 45 km
Trips on sags below900/0 25 km 100 km 100 km 225 km
Exposed Length
VoltageTolerance Feeder I Feeder II Feeder III Total
Trips on interruptions only
Trips on sags below 200/0 25 km 14km 3 km 42 km
Trips on sags below 50°A» 25 km 100 km 12 km 137 km
Trips on sags below 90°A» 25 km 100 km 100 km 225 km
TABLE 7.4 Exposed Length for Various Equipment Voltage Tolerances for
Parallel Operation in Fig. 7.12
Exposed Length
VoltageTolerance Feeder I Feeder II Feeder III Total
Trips on interruptions only
Trips on sags below 20% 50 km 3 km 3 km 56 km
Trips on sags below 50°A» 50 km 12 km 12 km 74 km
Trips on sags below 90% 50 km 100 km 100 km 250 km
The basiccharacteristicof a spot network isthat a bus is fed from two or more
different busses at a higher voltage level. In the previous section we looked at parallel
and loop systems originatingat the same bus or at two busses connectedby a normally
closed breaker. When a bus is fed from two different busses, the same design problems
have to be solved as for parallel and loop systems. (n - 1) criterion remains the
The
underlying rule. Themagnitudeof voltage sags is significantly lower for spot networks,
comparedto parallel networks. Also thenumber of interruptionswill be somewhat
lower, but that difference will not be significant as the
numberis already low.
7.3.2.1 Magnitudeof Voltage Sags. Considerthe system in Fig. 7.14: the bus-
bar with the sensitive load is fed from two different busbarsat a higher voltage level,
ZSI and ZS2 are source impedances at the higher voltage level, Ztt and Zt2 are trans-
former impedances, z is the feeder impedance per unit length, {, the distance between
bus I and the fault. The two busses can be in the same substationor in two different
substations.The reliability in thelatter case is likely to besomewhathigher, although
it is hard to exactlyquantify this difference.
Consider a fault on a feederoriginatingfrom bus I at a distance£, from the bus.
The magnitudeof the voltage at bus I is found from the voltage-dividerequation
(7.7)
where we neglect the effect of the second source on the voltage at bus I. This is a
reasonableassumptionas the impedanceof the two transformersin series will be
much higher than the source
impedanceat bus I. If we assume the two sources to be
410 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
ZSl
BusI-..........- . - - - ..........--BusIl
V t: +12
sag - .c + 1 (7.9)
and at bus I:
c (7.10)
VI = £+ 1
For a radially operatedsystem,without a connectionto bus II the voltageat the
load bus is equal to the voltage at bus I, given by (7.10).Figure 7.15 comparesthe
voltage magnitudeat the load bus for the two designalternatives.It is immediately
obvious that the secondinfeed significantly reducesthe voltagedrop. The deepestsag
will have a magnitudeof 50% of nominal. Here it is assumedthat the secondtrans-
former has the sameimpedanceas the first one. Inpractice this translatesto them
having the samerating. If the secondtransformerhas asmaller rating, its impedance
will typically be higher and the voltagesag will bedeeper.
From the expressionsfor the voltageversusdistance,we can obtain expressions
for the critical distance,like in Section6.5. For the radial systemwe obtain the same
expressionas before:
(7.11)
0.8
a /
.S "
~ 0.6 "
.a '
.~
8 0.4
~
r:J)
0.2
10,..-----y------r-----r-----,..-..,..,....----,
I
I I
, I
, I
I,,
, I
, , I I
i I
,, ,,'
, ,
, , I I
,,
I I
.'
.' ,
I
I
,II / '
(solid line) and for aconnectionto a second ". ,,"
substationat a higher voltage level: same "."" .,
numberof feeders from bothsubstations ".:'" "
(dashed line); twice as many feeders from the 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
secondsubstation(dash-dotline). Sag magnitude in pu
and L,crit = 0 for V < 0.5. From the critical distancethe exposed length can be calcu-
lated, resultingin Fig. 7.16. Themain featureis that the exposed length is zero in case
the equipmentcan toleratea sag down to50% of nominal. This could be an i mportant
pieceof informationin decidingaboutthe voltage-tolerancerequirementsfor the load.
For higher critical voltages(more sensitiveequipment)the exposed lengthdependson
the numberof feedersoriginatingfrom the two busses. Let INbe thenumberof feeders
fed from busI and N 2 the numberof feeders fed from bus II. The total exposed length
for the load fed from both feeders is found from
(7.13)
(7.14)
for the radial system. In case NI = N 2, the exposed length for the
double infeed is
always lessthan for single infeed. WhenN2 > N, the double-infeedoption becomes
lessattractivewhen theequipmentbecomes too sensitive. In the example shown by a
412 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
T Oifferent MV
substations
Substation 1 Substation2
MVILV
transformers
Low-voltage
network
Substation 3
--.-.........---.......- Medium-voltageload
magnitudeof deep sags is significantly reduced (Fig. 4.39). The effect on shallow sags is
more limited.
::I
Qc '-
.S ",,
,,
-8 0.6
" /' '"
.S "
""
""
t
~
0.4
",,
,
,, I
I
I
/
"
t:I} ,, I
,,
I
,,
0.2 ,, , I
Figure 7.21Sagmagnitudein transmission
and subtransmissionsystems. Solid line:
,, ,
J
obtain an unavailability of 2 hours per year; with three, the unavailability is only 10
minutesperyear,neglectingall common-modeeffects. As we saw inChapter2 the latter
assumptionis no longer valid for highly reliable systems.Any attempt to further
increasethe reliability by adding more generatorunits is unlikely to be successful.
Emergencyor standbygeneratorsare often startedwhen an interruptionof the public
supply occurs. Instead of calculating unavailabilitiesit is more suitable to calculate
interruption frequencies.Supposethat the public supply is interrupted40 times per
year. The failure to startof an emergencygeneratoris typically somewherebetween10/0
and 5%. A valueof 5% will reducethe numberof interruptionsfrom 40 peryearto two
per year. This assumesthat the generatoris alwaysavailable.In reality one hasto add
anotherfew percentunavailability due to maintenanceand repair. The resultinginter-
ruption frequencywill be aroundfive per year. Again an industrial useris likely to opt
for two units, which brings the interruptionfrequencydown to lessthan one per year.
with Z3 the impedancebetween the generator/loadbus and the pee (typically the
impedanceof a distribution transformer)and 2 4 the (transient)impedanceof the gen-
erator. If we further assumethat Vpcc = .c~1' with.Z the distanceto the fault, and
introduce ~ =~, we get the following expressionfor the sagmagnitudeat the load
bus as a functio~ of the distanceto the fault:
V =1 1_ _
(7.16)
sag (1 + ~)(1 + £)
This expressionhasbeenused toobtain the curvesin Fig. 7.22: the sagmagnitudeas a
function of distanceis shownfor different valuesof the impedanceratio ~. A value ~ =
o correspondsto no generator;increasingt; correspondsto increasinggeneratorsizeor
increasingtransformerimpedance.C onsidera typical transformerimpedanceof 50/0 of
0.8
6-
.5
~ 0.6
a
.~ . ,I
~ 0.4 i,'
8 "
~ ",',
C/)
,
0.2 Figure 7.22Sagmagnitudeversusdistance
for different generatorsizes. Theratio
betweentransformerand generator
2 4 6 8 10 impedanceused was 0 (solid line), 0.2 (dashed
Distance to the fault (arbitr. units) line), 0.4(dash-dotline), and 0.8(dottedline).
Section 7.3 • Power System
D esign-Redundancy
Through ParallelOperation 417
its rated power, and a typical generatortransientimpedanceof 18%. For equal gen-
eratorandtransformerrating, we find t; = 0.28; ~ = 0.8 correspondsto a generatorsize
about three times the transformerrating, thus also about three times the sizeof the
load. We sawbeforethat generatorcapacityof more than threetimes theload doesnot
have any improving effect on the reliability. It is thus unlikely that the generator
capacity is more than three times the load. Anexception are someCHP schemes
where theindustry sellsconsiderableamountsof energy to theutility.
We see in Fig. 7.22 how the g eneratormitigatesthe voltage sag. The larger the
generator,the more the reduction in voltage drop. From the expressionfor the sag
magnitudeas afunction of distance,one canagainderive anexpressionfor the critical
distance:
1
Lcrtl = (1 + ~)(1 _ V) - 1 (7.17)
10r----...----.------y-----,-----rr-..---,
-'-'-'-,-"-'-';"
5 100 \
, \
.
[ \
\
\
\
\
.5 80 \ \
\
i~ 60
\
" "'-.
t!=
~
.8 40
.s=
.g 20
Figure 7.24Reductionin sag frequencydue
~ to the installationof an on-sitegenerator.The
ratio betweentransformerand generator
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 impedanceused was 0.2(dashedline), 0.4
Sag magnitude inpu
(dash-dotline), and 0.8 (dotted line).
Radial
network Island system
(meshed)
n/o
the rest of theindustrial distribution system (e.g., by using a meshed network and
differential protection).The island system also serves asbackupfor
a the restof the
industrial distribution system. A big problem in large industrial systems isthat
islanding cannot be tested. One has to wait for an interruption to occur to seeif it
works.
/ Self-commutating
II device (GTO/IGBT)
Controllergenerating
required switching pattern
dcbus
Energy
storage
Figure 7.27 Series voltagecontroller.
Section 7.4 • TheSystem-EquipmentInterface 421
....
,
.. ..
Sag with
phase-angle jump
I
~ 0.5
o 0.5 1 o 0.5 1
Alpha = -40 degrees Alpha = - 60 degrees
-" ~.,,:<~.:,:~,~ . .
~ " .:-~~~~:-..
Figure 7.31 Active power requirementfor a a
.. 0.5 0.5 ,".v v,
seriesvoltagecontroller, for different ! ,,,,
'~\,
impedanceangles(a=O, -20°, -40°, -60°)
and different leadingpowerfactors: 1.0(solid
J o L-- --J o '--- -..J
power taken from the supply thus increases and the activepower requirementof the
controlleris reduced. This holds for a negative
phase-anglejump and a lagging power
factor. For a leading power factor, a negativephase-anglejump increases the active
power requirements,as shown in Fig. 7.31.
with Vellar the complexcharacteristicvoltage of the sag. The voltage injected by the
controller is the difference between the load voltage and the sag voltage:
(7.30)
424 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
0
The loadcurrentin phase b isshifted over 120 comparedto the currentin phase a:
(7.32)
(7.33)
(7.34)
(7.35)
(7.36)
(7.37)
Adding the complex powers in phaseb and phasec gives thetotal injected power (the
voltage in phase a is
n ot affected by the sag):
-
s.; -_32(1 - -
Vchar)e
if/>
(7.38)
shallow sag for type D. Thethird phase for a type C sag does not require any injected
power; the activepower requirementsfor the third phase of a type 0 sag are identical
to (7.25). Both in Fig. 7.32and in Fig. 7.33 the injected power has been plotted for
two valuesof the impedanceangle (0 and 30°) and four valuesof the power factorof
the loadcurrent (1.0,0.9,0.8,0.7).We can conclude from the figures that the power
factor has significant influence on the power injection. Thecharacteristicphase-angle
jump makes that the two phases behave slightly differently, but does not change the
overall picture.
For a single-phasecontroller,the characteristicvoltage does not have much prac-
tical meaning.Thereforethe activepowerrequirementshave beenplottedin a different
way in Figs. ·7.34and 7.35. Thehorizontal axis is theabsolutevalue of the complex
voltage during the sag; inother words, the sagmagnitudeat theequipmentterminals.
The different curves in eachsubplot give the relation between sagmagnitudeand
injected power for each of the phasesof a type C or type Dthree-phaseunbalanced
sag. This leads to ma aximumof five curves, two from a type C sag, three from a type D
sag. We seethat there is no generalrelation between the injected power and the sag
t 1
l
~ 0.5 ..__"," _, , 0.5 , .. ...
~ ~.:~:.~~::~.~.~ ..~.:-:.:~..
" ................
o ~ --.J o
o 0.5 o 0.5
~&t 1',~~>~....
. . . "," -·w.
Figure 7.32Active power requirementsfor a ... ~~..• ~ ...
single-phaseseriesvoltagecontroller, for two ~ 0.5 ' ~.~::~,...
phasesof a type C unbalancedsag, for j '~'::
impedanceanglezero (left) and -300 (right). 0"'--- ---' 0'--- --'
Powerfactor 1.0(solid lines), 0.9 (dashed),0.8 o 0.5 1 o 0.5 1
(dash-dot),0.7 (dotted). Characteristicmagnitude Characteristicmagnitude
o 0.5 o 0.5
~ 0.6 0.6
Figure 7.33Active power requirementsfor a a 0.4 0.4
single-phaseseriesvoltagecontroller, for two ~ 0.2 0.2
. 0 ..
phasesof a type D unbalancedsag, for
impedanceangle zero (left) and -300 (right).
j -o.~ ~~~~~~.:.:.~~~~~.~~c~.,,~',.... -0.2 ...:. :..~..~ ..-:-..:-:.::-....
Powerfactor 1.0(solid lines), 0.9(dashed),0.8 o 0.5 I o 0.5 I
(dash-dot),0.7 (dotted). Characteristicmagnitude Characteristicmagnitude
426 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
R
t 0.5 0.5
Figure 7.34Active power requirementsfor a
ti
.s> 0 0
single-phase series voltage
controller as a
function of the sagmagnitude-forzero
0 0.5 0 0.5 impedanceangle and four values of the power
Sag magnitude Sag magnitude factor of the loadcurrent.
~
0
c,
t 0.5 0.5 Figure 7.35Active power requirementsfor a
~
Go)
> single-phase series voltage
controller as a
.s 0 0
function of the sagmagnitude-foran
0 0.5 0 0.5 impedanceangle equal to - 30° and four
Sag magnitude Sag magnitude valuesof the power factorof the loadcurrent.
7.4.2.5 Effect of the Voltage Rating. The voltage ratingof the voltage-source
converter directly determinesthe maximum voltage (magnitude)which can be in-
jected. This inturn determinesagainstwhich sags the load is protected.In the above
calculations,it was assumedthat the load voltage would remain exactly at its pre-
event value. This isnot strictly necessary: small voltage
d rop and some phase-angle
jump can betoleratedby the load. Figure 7.38 shows how theprotectedarea of the
complex (voltage) plane can beobtained for a given voltage rating. The voltage
Section 7.4 • TheSystem-EquipmentInterface 427
0 0.5 0 0.5
pf= 0.8 pf= 0.7
t> 1
~
... 0.5 0.5
Figure 7.36 Active power requirements for a ~
u
single-phase series voltage
controller as a
,....~ 0 0
function of the missingvoltage-forzero
impedance angle and four values of the power 0 0.5 0 0.5
factor of the loadcurrent. Missing voltage Missing voltage
Voltagetolerance
~
t
Range of
possible sags
Figure 7.38 Part of the complex (voltage)
plane protectedby a series voltagecontroller
with the indicatedvoltage rating.
7.4.2.6 Effectofthe Storage Capacity. The voltage rating of the controller de-
termineswhich range of magnitudeand phase-anglejump of sags can be mitigated.
For a given magnitudeand phase-anglejump the active power requirementis found
from (7.25). The active power requirementand the amount of energystoragedeter-
mine the longestsag durationwhich can be mitigated.
During the designof a seriescontroller, a sagmagnitudeand a sagdurationare
chosen.The sagmagnitudegives thevoltagerating, the sagdurationgives therequired
storagecapacity.Togetherthey determinethe "designpoint" in Fig. 7.39.The voltage
toleranceof the load without controller is shownas adashedline (in this examplethe
voltagetoleranceof the load is 200 ms, 90% ) . The influenceof the phase-anglejump is
neglectedhere.(Including the phase-angle j ump would give arangeof voltage-tolerance
curves, both with and without the controller.) Any sag with amagnitudeabove the
design magnitudeand with a duration lessthan the designduration,will be mitigated
by the controller: i.e., the resulting load voltage will be above the voltage-tolerance
curveof the load. Sagslonger than the designdurationareonly toleratedif they do not
depletethe storagecapacity.Neglectingthe phase-angle j ump, we can use (7.26) for the
injected power:
Peont = (1 - V)P1oad (7.39)
The energyneededto ride through a sagof magnitude V and duration T is
£ = (1 - V)TPload (7.40)
--------------------~-----------------;
0.8
:::s
Q..
.S 0.6
]
.~ 0.4 Design point
~
Figure 7.39 Voltage-tolerancecurve without
0.2 (dashed line) and with (solid line) series
voltage controller. The designpoint gives the
lowest magnitudeand the longestd uration
2 4 6 8 10 which theload-controllercombinationis able
Duration in seconds to tolerate.
Section 7.4 • TheSystem-EquipmentInterface 429
with ZI the impedanceof the load to beprotectedby the controller. If the upstream
load is smallerthan the protectedload, 2 2 > Z 1, this could lead todangerousover-
voltages. With the existing devices this effect is limited in two ways:
Circuit breaker
causing the
interruption
Series
~ controller Loadprotected
----/--r--f Jontroner
Upstream----...-
load
Distribution
Transmission substation
system
Supply transformer
t----~ Load
Shunt voltage
controller
Q
= RV sin 1/1 + X(l - V cos 1/1)
(7.53)
2+X2
R
The main limitation of the shuntcontroller is that the sourceimpedancebecomesvery
small for faults at the samevoltagelevel close to theload. Mitigating suchsagsthrough
a shuntcontroller is impractical as it would require very large currents.We therefore
432 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
.~
< 00 0.5 I
Alpha =-40 degrees Alpha = -60 degrees
8,..-----:-:-:------, 15r - - - - - - - - - - ,
6- ' .
.: 6 o'., ...
.. ,-° '.
0
10 - -'- ,,0.
~ .:'<": ~
"
.... ".-' ",
Figure 7.43 Activepowerinjected by a shunt
Q., 4 : / , ,
.. ', ,".....:,". o"
."
5 :.~.~:~ , ~ .,
" ..
- - - _....... '-0.
" ..,\.'~'"
".
voltage controller, for different impedance
~ 2..{:"" , \"'. angles(0, -20° -40°, -60°) and different
.~ ,
~" '~
,
< 00 0.5 I
'\
00 0.5 1
sourceimpedances:0.1pu (solid line),0.05pu
(dashedline), 0.033pu (dash-dotline),
Sag magnitude in pu Sag magnitude in pu 0.025pu (dottedline).
increases, less injectedcurrent is needed to get the same change in voltage. Note the
difference in vertical scale between Figs 7.43 and 7.44. The reactive power exceeds the
active power injected in all shown situations.
The current rating of the controller is determinedby both active and reactive
power. From (7.52) and (7.53) we find for the absolutevalue of the injected current:
1 - 2V cos1/1 + V2
I cont = (7.54)
R2+X2
u~ 10 10
00 O.S 1 . 00 0.5 1
Alpha = -40 degrees Alpha = - 60 degrees
40 .... 40··..
:s .
~ 30.. ...... 30 ' ,
Figure 7.45 Magnitudeof the currentinjected .S ..
by a shuntvoltagecontroller, for different 5 20 .... 'eo 20 '" ....
impedanceangles (0, -200 , -400 , -60°) and
different sourceimpedances:0.1 pu (solid
o~ 10 10
Source
impedance
....,.. ,"Injected
. Normaloperating
voltage voltage
\ Sag
\
,,
------- voltage
\
,,
,
----a.,.
\
\
\
\
\
\
,
\
\
,,
Figure 7.46 Phasordiagramfor shuntvoltage ~
controller. Solid lines: without phase-angle Injected
jump. Dashedlines: with phase-anglejump. current
434 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
Iseries ~
~ag -----. load
System Load
o
00
Figure 7.47 Shunt-series-connected
voltage >
controller: theshunt-connectedconverteris
placed on system side of the series
controller.
7.4.4.1 Current Rating. The active powertaken from the supply by the shunt-
connectedconverteris
(7.56)
We assumethat the shunt-connectedconvertertakes acurrent from the supply with
magnitude[shunt and in phase with the system voltage
V cos(¢+ 1/1)]
Pseries = [ 1- cos ¢ Pload (7.59)
1 cos(¢+ 1/1)]
I ,rhunt = [V- cos ¢ Plood (7.60)
The resultsof this equationare shown in Fig. 7.48 in the same format and with the same
parametervalues as before (e.g., Fig. 7.29). The magnitude ofshunt the current has
partof the loadcurrent.The
beenplottedfor values up to 4 pu, i.e. four times the active
influence ofphase-angle j ump and power factor is similar to their influence on the active
power as shown in Fig. 7.29. But the overriding influence onshuntcurrentis
the the sag
magnitude.The less voltage remains in the system, the more currentis needed to get the
sameamount of power. As the power requirement increases with decreasing system
voltage, the fast increase current
in for decreasing voltage is understandable .
3
2
00 0.5 I 00 0.5 1
Alpha = - 40 degrees Alpha = - 60 degrees
4 .-.:..r-- ---='---, 4 I
I,
\, 3 \
, .~\
-v
• 2 ..~ Figure 7.48Shuntcurrent for a shunt-series
.~\
'\,
.\ , voltage controller, for different impedance
~ " .c- ~.~ ":.."'- angles(0, _20°, _40°, _60°)and different
...
:::: .'::.. ....-.;:
leading powerfactors: 1.0 (solid lines), 0.9
00 0.5 00 0.5 1 (dashed lines), 0.8
( dash-dotlines), 0.7(dotted
Sag magnitude in pu Sag magnitude in pu
lines).
7.4.4.2 Shunt Converter on Load Side. Figure 7.49 again shows shunt
a -series
controller. The difference with Fig. 7.47 is
t hat the shuntcurrentis taken off the load
voltage.
To assess the effect of this, we again calculate the requirements for the shunt and
seriescurrents.We use the same n otationas before:
V load = 1 + OJ (7.61)
~ag ~oad
System Load
Figure 7.49Shunt-seriesconnectedvoltage
controller; the shunt-connectedconverteris
placed on load sideo f the seriescontroller.
factor COs~:
We assumethat the shuntcurrentis taken at a lagging power
I.vlzunt = I cos~ - jI sin ~ (7.64)
The total currenttaken off the supply,throughthe series-connected
converter,is
[series = IShunt + [load = cosl/J + I cos~ - j sin l/J- jI sin ~ (7.65)
The active power taken off the supply should be equal to the powertakenby the load.
The power injected by the series
converteris taken off again by theshuntconverter.As
there is no active power storage, the total active power still has to come off the supply.
This gives the following expression:
(7.66)
From this the following expression for the
s huntcurrentcan beobtained:
I = cosl/J - V cos(l/J + 1/1)
(7.67)
V cos(1/1 + ~)
To minimize theshuntcurrent,the angle~ is taken suchthat 1/1 + ~ = 0; thus theshunt
If we further rate theshuntcurrentto the
currentis in phase with the supply voltage.
active part of the loadcurrent,we obtain
I = -!. _cos(1/1 + e/» (7.68)
V cose/>
which is exactly the same
currentas for a system-side shunt.
------t Statict--_.._--------
System switch Load
Energy
u
00 storage
> reservoir
Figure 7.52 Shunt-connected backup power
source.
_ _~ Static1 - - - . . . . , . - - - - - - ' \
System switch Load
1
Static
switch
2
Energy
storage
reservoir
Figure 7.53 Series-connected backup power
source.
controller. The difference is the static switch which is present between the system and
the load bus. Themomentthe system voltagedropsbelow a pre-set rms value, the static
switch opens and the load is supplied from the energy storage reservoir through the
voltage-sourceconverter.Various formsof energy storage have been proposed.A so-
called superconductingmagneticenergy storage (SMES) stores electrical energy in a
superconducting coil [57], [158], [159], [160], [161], [162]. A BESSor battery energy
storagesystemuses a largebatterybankto store the energy [186], [187],[188]. For small
devices the energy storageis not a problem,but using a SMES, BESS, or any otherway
of storage at medium voltage will put severestrainson the storage. A backup power
source is only feasible if it can ride
t hrough a considerablefraction of short interrup-
tions. Looking at some statistics forshort interruptions,Figs. 3.5, 3.6, and 3.7, shows
that the amountof storageshouldbe able to supply the load for 10 to 60 seconds. Less
storage would not give any serious improvementin the voltage tolerance comparedto
the seriescontroller.
All backuppower sources suggested in the literatureuse ashuntconnection,but it
aseriesconnectionas in Fig. 7.53. This device could
is also feasible to use operateas a
seriescontrollerfor sags and as baackuppower source forinterruptions.The moment a
deep sag is detected, static switch 1 opens and static switch 2 closes.
equipmentbetween the wallo utlet and acomputer.All that is needed is to replace the
batteriesevery few years, and as long as one does
not power the kettle and the micro-
wave from the same UPS, virtually
a problem-freesupply iscreated.
7.4.6.1 Operationof a ups. The UPS isneither a shunt nor a series device,
but what could bedescribedas acascadeconnectedcontroller. The basic configura-
tion of a typical UPS isshown in Fig. 7.54. Itsoperationis somewhatsimilar to the
converterpart of an ac adjustable-speed drive (compareFig. 5.12): a diode rectifier
followed by an inverter. The main difference is the energystorageconnectedto the
de bus of a UPS. In allcurrently commerciallyavailable UPSs the energy storageis
in the form of a battery block. Other forms of energystoragemight become more
suitablein the future.
During normal operation,the UPS takes its power from the supply, rectifies the
ac voltage to dc andinverts it again to ac with the same frequency and rms value. The
designof the UPS is suchthat the de voltageduring normal operationis slightly above
the batteryvoltageso that the batteryblock remainsin standbymode. All power comes
from the source. The onlyp urposeof the batteryblock in normal operationis to keep
the de busvoltageconstant.The load ispoweredthroughthe inverterwhich generates a
sinusoidalvoltagetypically by using aPWM switching pattern.To preventload inter-
ruptions due to inverter failure, a static transfer switch is used. In case the inverter
output drops below acertainthresholdthe load is switched back to the supply.
During a voltage sag orinterruptionthe batteryblock maintainsthe voltage at the
de bus for severalminutesor evenhours,dependingon the batterysize. The load will
thus tolerate any voltage sag ors hort interruption without problem. For long inter-
ruptions, the UPSenablesa controlledshutdown,or the start of a backupgenerator.
Bypass
ac de
System de
Energy
storage Figure 7.54 Typicalconfigurationof an
uninterruptablepower supply (UPS).
UPS
.- -. ---- -----Computer
f
---------.. -.... ---.. ----. f
t-----:--t Digital
electronics :
i
I
f
_ .. - - . _ .. - __ - - I
_ _ eI
Computer
Digital
I
electronics
I
I
I
,. -.-- --- _--------._.
7.4.6.4 UPS and Backup Generators. Figure 7.56 shows a power system where
both UPSs and backup generationare used to mitigate voltage sags and interrup-
tions. The UPS is used to protect sensitive essential load against voltage sags and
short interruptions.But especially for large loads, it is not feasible to have more
than
a few minutes energy supply stored in the batteries. In case of an interruption, the
so-called "islanding switch" opens, disconnectingthe sensitive load from theutility
system. During the interruption the sensitive load is completelypowered from a
backup generator.This generatorcan be eitherrunning in parallel with the utility
442 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
Utility
infeed
Islanding
switch
r-r-
Flywheel-
Power
system
= Motor Generator ~
I--
Sensitive
load
Static
switch
Power 1-----,.- - - - - - - Load
system- - - - - I
Synchronous
machine
Flywheel
Diesel
Figure 7.58 Configurationof ofT-line UPS engine
with diesel enginebackup.
Adjustable-speed
drive ac motor
Power
system
.....
Power >-
system Load
>-
- .....
>-
>-
>-
>-
,'1
>-
Static
switehe
:'2
>-
1'3 Figure 7.60 Basic principleof the
constructionof an electron ic tap changer.
Section 7.4 • TheSystem-Equ
ipment Interface 445
power~ ~sensitive
system 0----3 ~Ioad
tl
LJ Ferroresonant
winding
Figure 7.61 Basic principle of the
construction of a ferroresonant transformer .
(7.69)
(7.70)
PWM voltage-source
Storage converter
capacitors
\ de Power
system
de ac interface
Variable O__ _ _....J
Figure 7.63 Energyextractionfrom de
de voltage storagecapacitors.
Section 7.4 • TheSystem-EquipmentInterface 447
From the
power
system
To the
Brushless de generator power
~ ''' _ ~~~ ~~ , - - system
Inertia
energy from the flywheela nd suppliesthis to the power system via ade/deconverter
and a voltage-source(dc/ac) converter.
Considera solid cylindrical pieceof materialwith a length of 50 em and a radius
of 25 em. Theinertia of this pieceof material,for rotationalongthe axisof the cylinder,
is
J = ~mR2 (7.71)
with m the massand R the radiusof the cylinder. With a specific massof 2500 kg/m" we
find for the mass:
m=n X 0.252 x 0.50 x 2500 = 245 kg
and for the inertia:
£ = !J(J)2 (7.72)
2
If we rotate our cylinder at the "moderate" speed of 3000 rpm (w =
21r X 3~ = 314radjs,the amountof kinetic energystoredin the rotating cylinder is
1
£ =2 x 7.7 x 3142 = 380kJ
(7.73)
(7.74)
with R the total seriesresistance.S upposethat we can achieve anX jR ratio of 100 for
the inductor. In that case we find for the losses:
450 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
(7.75)
Refrigerator
Constant-voltage
de bus
Superconducting
t Power
system
coil interface
Figure 7.65 Energystoragein a
superconductingcoil and interfacewith the
power system.
5-------------------,
• Costs now
o Costs in 10 years time
4
~ 3
.8
~
o
2 ..
Figure 7.66 Costs ofsuperconducting
magnetic energystorage(SMES) including 0 0
.. o
00 0
0
o 0
o
o
o 0 0 o 00
0
the power system interface, asfunction
a of n
o~_w.......:==----+----+-----+-----f
Costs of EnergyStorage
included, as these are similar for all energy storage methods. The costsbattery of a
energy storage system (BESS) is based on the same batteriesas used before: 1MJo f
storage, 2400Wof power for $50. The costs of capacitorstorage is based on 188 J of
storage for $35 as used before. Additional costs ofconstruction,wiring, protection,
cooling, etc., have not been included for the capacitorsor for the batteries.
We see that, withcurrent prices, battery storage remains by far the cheapest
solution, even if we consider a factor of two to three for additional costs. But the
lifetime of a battery is limited in number of discharge cycles, andbatteriescontain
environmentallyunfriendly products.When the costsof SMES devices go down and
the costs of batteries go up in the future, the former will become a more attractive
option for high-power short-time ridethrough.For short-time ridethroughcapacitor
storage is still moreattractive,especially if one realizes
that we used low-voltage capa-
citors where medium-voltage capacitorsare likely to form acheaperoption.
Note that the amountof energystoredin an SMES is similar to theamountof
energy stored in abattery.The main difference isthat the energy in asuperconducting
coil can be made available much faster. The units currently in operationare able to
extract 1MJ of energy from the coil in 1 second. The limitation in energyextractionis
the voltage over aninductor when thecurrentchanges:
di
dc
V;nd = L Cit (7.77)
~ H3 Li c} = P10ad (7.78)
452 Chapter7 • Mitigation of Interruptionsand Voltage Sags
For a 3MW unit we get V;nd = 6 kV. The de/de converter should be able to
operatewith this voltageover its input terminals.
Summary and
Conclusions
In Chapter I the term "power quality" and several related terms are defined. Power
quality is shown to consistof two parts: "voltage quality" and "currentquality." The
voltagequality describes the way in which the power supply affects equipment;as such
it is part of the quality of supply. Current quality describes the way in which the
equipmentaffects the power system and part is of the so-called"quality of consump-
tion." The termelectromagneticcompatibility (EMC) has a largeoverlapwith "power
quality" and the terms can often be used as synonyms.
An overview is givenof the various types of powerquality disturbances.An
important distinction is made between"variations" and "events." Variations are a
continuous phenomenon, e.g., the variation of the power system frequency.
Measuringvoltage andcurrentvariationsrequirescontinuousrecordingof their values.
Events only occur occasionally: voltage sags and interruptionsare typical examples.
Measuringvoltage andcurrentevents requires a triggering process: e.g.,ems the voltage
becoming lessthan a pre-definedthreshold.These two typesof power quality distur-
bances also requiredifferent analysis methods: average andstandarddeviation for
variations;frequencyof occurrencefor events.
The main subjecto f this bookis formed by voltage sags and interruptions:the two
mostimportantexamples from a familyo f voltage events known as "voltagemagnitude
events." Voltage magnitudeevents aredeviationsfrom the normal magnitude(ems
value) of the voltage with arather well-definedstarting and end time. Themajority
of these events can be characterizedby one magnitudeand oneduration. Different
initiating events and differentrestorationprocesses lead to different rangesof magni-
tude andduration.Based on these ranges, a classification of voltagemagnitudeevents is
proposed.
453
454 Chapter8 • Summaryand Conclusions
There is one questionthat always comesup when thinking about the future of
powerquality: "Will the powerquality problemstill be amongus in 10 years time?" It
may well bethat equipmentwill be improvedin such a waythat it no longeris sensitive
to the majority of voltagedisturbancesand that it no longer producesseriouscurrent
disturbances.In other words, equipmentwill have becomefully compatiblewith the
power supply. At the moment, however, there is no indication that this will happen
soon.Equipmentappearsto be assensitiveandpolluting as ever. Abrowsethroughthe
advertisementsin power-qualityorientedjournalsshows that the emphasisis on miti-
gation equipment (surge suppressors,UPSs, custom power) and on power-quality
measuremente quipment.Advertisementsin which equipmentwith improved voltage
toleranceis offered are extremelyrare.
The main drive for improved equipmentis likely to come from standards,in
particular the IEC standardson electromagneticcompatibility. When the standards
on harmonic currents produced by end-userequipment (lEe 61000-3-2 and -3-4)
becomewidely accepted,the harmonic distortion problem may be the first one to
move to thebackground.
Voltage quality eventslike voltage sags will take even longer to becomepart of
equipmentstandards.A t leastvoltagesags arereasonablyunderstoodnowadays(read
Chapters4, 5, and 6). Higher frequencyphenomenalike switching transientsare less
well understood,more difficult to model, and their statistics probably show more
variations among different customers.Still they causeequipmentproblems. High-
frequencydisturbancesmay well becomethe next bigpower-qualityissue.
8.1.2 Education
From the beginning,power quality has been anareavery much based on mea-
surementsand observations.T he standardtools in use atuniversities,simulationsand
theoreticalanalysis;are much less used in thepowerquality work. In fact, theamount
of universityresearchon powerquality is still very limited. This will certainlychangein
Section 8.2 • Standardization 4SS
the near future; powerquality will not only find its way into educationbut also into
university research.There is a serious risk herethat a gap will develop between the
heavily measurement-based power-quality practice and the very much theory- and
simulation-baseduniversity research. Such situation
a may be preventedif utilities
make much moreof their data available for university research and education.A
very good example is set by IEEE Project group 1159.2. At their Website (accessible
through www.standards.ieee.org) a number of voltage recordings are available for
downloading.I would like to see much more utilities making d ata available in this
way: not only theactual voltage andcurrent recordings but also some basic data
aboutthe kind of event and the kind of power system involved.
8.2 STANDARDIZATION
8.3 INTERRUPTIONS
8.4 RBLIABILITY
The secondpart of Chapter2 summarizes the various aspects of power system relia-
bility and the stochastic analysis techniques currently in use: network modeling,
Markov models, andMonte Carlo simulation. Various examples are given for each
of these techniques. Different aspects are given for the reliability analysis
of generation,
transmission,and distribution systems (the three so-called "hierarchicallevels"). For
the industrial power supply a systematic methodologyis given that can be used to
obtain the reliability of the supply. Thismethodologyconsistsof six layers, partly
correspondingto the hierarchical levels but also including power
quality and equipment
failure.
8.4.1 V.rlflcatlon
Power system reliability has two distinctly different faces: the observed reliability
of numberand
and the predicted reliability. Observed reliability, i.e., keeping records
durationof interruptions,is the domainof the utilities; predictedreliability, i.e., relia-
bility evaluation,is thedomainof universities;without much overlapbetween these two
sides. A comparisonbetween observed and predicted reliability is needed to move
forward in reliability evaluation.For this, utilities should provide thedata and uni-
versities the analysis and prediction techniques. Only such caomparisonwill give a
clear answera boutthe accuracyof the variousstochasticpredictiontechniques. Such a
comparisonwill also lead to a wider acceptance of stochasticpredictiontechniques and
to a wider useof them within the utilities.
In Chapter4 the various characteristicsof voltagesags are discussed. After the more
"classical"characteristics,m agnitudeand duration, two newercharacteristics,phase-
anglejump and three-phaseunbalance,are treatedin considerabledetail. Techniques
are presentedto calculatethese sagcharacteristicsfor a given fault and loadposition
and fault type. Thetechniquesare applied to an example supplyconsistingof several
voltage levels.
Phase-angle j ump andthree-phaseunbalanceare discussed in detail in Chapter4.
Especially three-phaseunbalanceis an important characteristic.The currently used
definition of sagmagnitudeis not suitablefor three-phaseequipment.The definition
of sagmagnitudeis generalized forthree-phaseunbalancedsags leading to a classifica-
tion of three-phaseunbalancedsags into seven types, of which two types (C and D)
cover the majority of sags. A three-phaseunbalancedsag is quantified through a
characteristiccomplex voltage which isindependento f voltage level or loadconnection.
Magnitudeand phase-anglejump are absolutevalue andargument,respectively,of the
characteristiccomplex voltage. The possible rangemagnitudeand
in phase-anglejump
is calculated,for single-phaseas well as forthree-phaseequipment,for the example
supply as well as in general.
Chapter4 concludeswith a treatmentof two additionalsagcharacteristics,point-
on-wave and missing voltage, discussionaboutload
a influence on voltage sags, and a
brief treatmentof voltagesags due toinduction motor starting.
tied methodslike the methodof critical distances. These developmentswill reduce the
gap between powerquality and reliability evaluation.In fact, stochasticprediction of
voltage sags may be consideredaspart of the reliability evaluationof the power supply.
Stochasticpredictionof voltage sags based on the methodof fault positionsis likely to
become astandardpart of power-system analysis software, next to load flow, short-
circuit currentcalculations,transientstability, etc.Calculatingthe expectednumberof
voltage sags may become common as as calculatingthe short-circuit current or the
normal operatingvoltage.
It is likely that the first commercially availableprogramswill only give results for
magnitudeand duration.But soon morecharacteristicsmay becomepart of the calcu-
lation results:three-phaseunbalancebeing the most essential one.
The methodof critical distances willcontinueto playarole. It may becomepart
of the stochasticprediction software, e.g., to estimate the extent of and distance
between the fault positions. The method of critical distances remains much more
powerful than the methodof fault positionsfor fast "back-of-the-envelope"calcula-
tions. An exampleof the latter is the simple expression derived in the last section of
Chapter6. This expression estimates the number of sags due to faults in a meshed
transmissionsystem. Thedrawbackwith this expression isthat there is(not yet) any
theoretical basis for it. Further studies andcomparisonsmay teach usabout this
expression'saccuracy level.
Powerquality is an areaof power engineeringthat did not exist only 10 years ago.
Powerquality and reliability have formanyyears beenpart of power system design and
operation,but they were rarelyconsideredas a separatearea. Being a new area, the
Section 8.9 • FinalRemarks 463
developments in power quality are fast and difficult to predict. A new device may be
inventedtomorrow solving all voltage sagproblems.
A more likely developmentis that sensitiveequipmentwill stay amongus for a
long time to come.Certainlyshort and longinterruptionswill remain a problem.The
power quality area willfurther expandand likely develop into two new areas: a non-
technical area covering"customer-utility interactions"and a technical onethat will
merge withelectromagneticcompatibility("equipment-system interactions").An addi-
tional spin-off of the developmentsin power quality will be that power system educa-
tion and research will be much more measurementbasedthan in the past.
Regardlessof what the future will bring, powerquality in all its varieties will offer
utilities, equipmentmanufacturers,customers,and universities a very interestingfield of
study, on which lots ofcooperationis needed and possible.
Bibliography
465
466 Bibliography
[33] J. Holtz, W. Lotzhat, and S. Stadfeld, Controlled AC drives with ride-through capacity at
power interruption, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol, 30, no. 5, September
1994, pp. 1275-1283.
[34] Brief 10: Low-voltage ride-through performance of AC contactor motor starters, EPRI
Power Quality Database, Elforsk, Stockholm, Sweden, 1995.
(35] C. Pumar, J. Amantegui, J. R.Torrealday, and C. Ugarte, A comparison between DC and
AC drives as regards their behaviour in the presence of voltage dips: New techniques for
reducing the susceptibility of AC drives, Int. Con! on Electricity Distribution fCIRED),
June 2-5, 1997, Birmingham, U.K., pp. 9/1-5.
[36] D. S. Dorr, A. Mansoor, A. G. Morinec, and J. C. Worley, Effects of power line voltage
variations on different types of 400-W high . . pressure sodium ballasts, IEEE Transactions on
Industry Applications, vol. 33, no. 2, March 1997, pp. 472-476.
[37J J. Lamoree, D. Mueller, P. Vinett, W. Jones, and M. Samotyj, Voltage sag analysis case
studies, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 30, no. 4, July 1994, pp. 1083-
1089.
[38] A. E. Turner and E. R. Collins, The performance of AC contactors during voltage sags,
7th Int. Conf. on Harmonics and Quality ofPower (ICHPQ), Las Vegas, NV, October 1996,
pp. 589-595.
[39] PQTN Brief 39: Ride-through performance of programmable logic controllers, EPRI
Power Electronics Applications Center, Knoxville, TN, November 1996.
[40] H.G. Sarmiento and E. Estrada, A voltage sag study in an industry with adjustable.. speed
drives, IEEE Industry Applications Magazine, vol. 2, no. 1, January 1996, pp. 16-19.
[41] J.e. Smith, J. Lamoree, P. Vinett, T. Duffy, and M. Klein, The impact of voltage sags on
industrial plant loads, Int. Con! Power Quality: End-use applications and perspectives
(PQA . . 91), pp. 171-178.
[42] R. A. Epperly, F. L. Hoadley, and R. W. Piefer, Considerations when applying ASD's in
continuous processes, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 33, no. 2, March
1997, pp. 389-396.
[43] W. Sheperd, L. N. Hulley, and D. T. W. Liang, Power Electronics and Motor Control, 2nd
ed., Chapter 12, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, U.K., 1995.
[44] L. Moran, P. D. Ziogas, and G. Joos, Design aspects of synchronous PWM rectifier-
inverter systems under unbalanced input voltage conditions, IEEE Transactions on
Industry Applications, vol. 28, no. 6, November 1992, pp. 1286-1293.
[45] E. P. Wiechmann, J. R. Espinoza, and J. L. Rodriguez, Compensated carrier PWM syn-
chronization: A novel method to achieve self.. regulation and AC unbalance compensation
in AC fed converters, IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 7, no. 2, April 1992, pp.
342-':348.
[46] P. Rioual, H. Pouliquen, and J....P. Louis, Regulation of a PWM rectifier in the unbalanced
network state using a generalized model, IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. I),
no. 3, May 1996, pp. 495-502.
[47] E. G. Strangas, V. E. Wagner, and T. D. Unruh, Variable speed drives evaluation test,
IEEE Industry Applications Society Annual Meeting, October 1996, San Diego, CA, pp.
2239-2243. A revised version of this paper appeared in IEEE Industry Applications
Magazine, vol. 4, no. 1, January 1998, pp. 53-57.
[48] L. Conrad, K. Little, and C. Grigg, Predicting and preventing problems associated with
remote fault . . clearing voltage dips, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 27, no.
I, January 1991, pp. 167-172.
[49J Y. Sekine, T. Yamamoto, S. Mori, N. Saito, and H. Kurokawa, Present state of momen-
tary voltage dip interferences and the countermeasures in Japan, Int. Con! on Large
Electric Networks (CIGRE), 34th Session, September 1992, Paris, France.
468 Bibliography
[50] D. Dorr, T. Key, and G. Sitzlar, User expectations and manufacturer tendencies for
system-compatible design of end-use appliances, 3rd Int. Con! on Power Quality: End-
use applications and perspectives, October 1994, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
[51] A. David, J. Maire, and M. Dessoude, Influence of voltage dips and sag characteristics on
electrical machines and drives: evaluation and perspective, lrd Int. Con! on Power Quality:
End-use applications and perspectives, October 1994, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
[52] IEC Standard 1800-3, Adjustable speed electric drive systems, Part 3: EMC product stan-
dard including specific test methods.
[53] N. Mohan, T. M. Undeland, and W. P Robbins, Power Electronics-Converters,
Applications and Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1995.
[54J D. S. Dorr, M. B. Hughes,T. M. Gruzs, R. E. Jurewicz, and J. L. McClaine, Interpreting
recent power quality surveys to define the electrical environment, IEEE Transactions on
Industry Applications, vol. 33, no. 6, November 1997, pp. 1480-1487.
[55] Kj. Torborg, Power Electronics-in Theory and Practice, Lund, Sweden: Studentliteratur,
1993. Published in the United States by Chartwell Bratt, Ltd.
[56] E. R. Collins and R. L. Morgan, A three-phase sag generator for testing industrial equip-
ment, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. II, no. 1, January 1996, pp. 526-532.
[57] P. Wang, The use of FACTS devices to mitigate voltage sags, PhD thesis, Department of
Electrical Engineering and Electronics, University of Manchester Institute of Science and
Technology, Manchester, U.K., July 1997.
[58] D. O. Koval and J. J. Leonard, Rural power profiles, IEEE Transactions on Industry
Applications, vol. 30, no. 2, March-April 1994, pp. 469-475.
[59] D.O. Koval, How long should power system disturbance site monitoring be significant?
IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 26, no. 4, July-August 1990, pp. 705-710.
[60] J. Marquet, CREUTENSI: Software for determination of depth, duration and number of
voltage dips (sags) on medium voltage networks, EDF (Electricite de France), Clamart,
France, September 1992.
[61] M. H. J. Bollen, Method for reliability analysis of industrial distribution systems, lEE
Proceedings-C, vol. 140, no. 6, November 1993, pp. 497-502.
[62] M. H. J. Bollen and P. E. Dirix, Simple motor models for reliability/power quality assess-
ment of industrial power systems, lEE Proceedings-Generation, Transmission,
Distribution, vol. 143, no.l, January 1996, pp. 56-60.
[63] M. H. J. Bollen, Reliability analysis of industrial power systems taking into account voltage
sags, IEEE Industry Applications Society Annual Meeting, Toronto, Canada, October 1993,
pp. 1461-1468.
[64] M. R. Qader, M. H. J. Bollen, and R. N. Allan, Stochastic prediction of voltage sags in the
reliability test system, PQA-97 Europe, June 1997, Elforsk, Stockholm, Sweden.
[65] M. B. Hughes and J. S. Chan, Early experiences with the Canadian national power quality
survey, Transmission and Distribution International, vol. 4, no. 3, September 1993, pp. 18-
27.
[66] D. O. Koval, R. A. Bocancea, and M. B. Hughes, Canadian national power quality sur-
vey: Frequency of industrial and commercial voltage sags, IEEE Transactions on Industry
Applications, vol. 35, no. 5, September 1998, pp. 904-910.
[67J H. Seljeseth and A. Pleym, Spenningskvalitetsmalinger 1992 until 1996 (voltage quality
measurements, 1992 to 1996, in Norwegian), Report EFI TR A4460 published by EFI,
7034 Trondheim, Norway.
[68] D. S. Dorr, Point of utilization power quality study results, IEEE Transactions on Industry
Applications, vol. 31, no. 4, July 1995, pp. 658-666.
[69] R. E. Jurewicz, Power quality study-1990 to 1995, Int. Telecommunications Energy Con!
(INTELEC), October 1990, Orlando, FL, pp. 443-450.
Bibliography 469
[93] Composite power system reliability: Phase I-scoping study. Final report, EPRI EL-5290,
Palo Alto, CA: Electric Power Research Institute, December 1987.
[94] CIGRE Working Group 38.03, Power System Reliability Analysis-Application Guide.
Paris: CIGRE publications, 1988.
[95] H. H. Kajihara, Quality power for electronics, Electro- Technology, vol. 82, no. 5,
November 1968, p. 46.
[96] D. J. Hucker, Aircraft a.c. electric system power quality, Proceedings of the IEEE National
Aerospace Electronics Conference, May 1970, Dayton, OH, pp. 426-430.
[97] R. K. Walter and H. Heinzmann, A customer discusses airborne static power conversion,
Conference Record of the 4th Annual Meeting of the IEEE Industry and General Applications
Group, October 1969, Detroit, MI, pp. 611-616.
[98] D. L. Piette, The effects of improved power quality on utilization equipment, Proceedings
of the IEEE National Aerospace Electronics Conference, May 1969, Dayton, OR, pp. 243-
250.
[99] R. H. McFadden, Power system analysis-what it can do to industrial plants, Conference
Record of the 5th Annual Meeting of the IEEE Industry and General Applications Group,
October 1970, Chicago, IL, pp. 189-199. This paper also appeared in IEEE Transactions on
Industry and General Applications, vol. 7, no. 2, March 1971, pp. 181-188.
[100] P. M. Knoller and L. Lonnstam, Voltage quality and voltage tendency recorders, Siemens-
Review, vol. 36, no. 8, August 1969, pp. 302-303.
[101] A. Lidholm, Mattekniska hjalpmedel for bestamning av spanningsgodheten i lagspannings-
nat (Measuring techniques applicable to the determination of voltage quality in low-voltage
networks, in Swedish), ERA, vol. 42, no. 5, 1969, pp. 99-101.
[102] B. A. Konstantinov and G. L. Bagiev, Financial losses due to deterioration of voltage
quality, Electric-Technology-USSR, vol. 1, 1970, pp. 119-123.
[103] R. D. Hof, The "dirty power" clogging industry's pipeline, Business Week, April 8, 1991.
[104] J. Douglas, Quality of power in the electronics age, EPRI Journal, vol. 10, no. 9, November
1985, pp. 6-13.
[105] W. E. Kazibwe, R. J. Ringlee, G. W. Woodzell, and H. M. Sendaula, Power quality: A
review, IEEE Computer Applications in Power, vol. 3, no. 1, January 1990, pp. 39-42.
[106] F. Martzloff, Power quality work at the International Electrotechnical Commission, PQA-
97 Europe, June 1997, Stockholm, Sweden, Elforsk: Stockholm, Sweden.
[107] M. H. J. Bollen, Literature search for reliability data of components in electric distribution
networks, Eindhoven University of Technology Research Report 93-E-276, August 1993.
[108] Basnivo for elkvalitet (Basic level for quality of electricity, in Swedish), Goteborg Energi
nat AB, Gothenburg, Sweden, January 1997.
[109] The Office of Electricity Regulation (OFFER), Birmingham, U.K., annually publishes two
reports on the quality of the supply: Report on distribution and transmission system
performance; and Report on customer services.
[110] P. C. M. van Kruining, J. H. P. Lommert, H. H. Overbeek, and R. J. R. Waumans, eds.,
Elektriciteitsdistributienetten (Electricity distribution networks, in Dutch), Deventer, The
Netherlands: Kluwer Techniek, 1996.
[Ill] R. J. R. Waumans, Openbare Netten voor Electriciteitsdistributie, Deventer, The
Netherlands: Kluwer, 1986.
[112] M. H. A. J. Hendriks Boers and R. M. L. Frenken, Help! De klant kan kiezen (Help, the
customer is allowed to choose, in Dutch), Energietechniek, vol. 75, no. 12, December 1997,
pp. 682-685.
[113] M. H. J. Bollen and A. Boyd, Instability problems in small power systems with more than
one centre of generation, Universities Power Engineering Conf.; September 1995,
Greenwich, U.K., pp. 191-194.
Bibliography 471
[114] E. Lakervi and E. J.. Holmes, Electricity Distribution Network Design, 2nd ed., Institution
of Electrical Engineers, London, U.K., 1995, Chapters 4 and 12.
[115] J. A. Burke, Power Distribution Engineering, Fundamentals and Applications, New York:
Marcel Dekker, 1994, Chapters 6 and 7.
[116] F. S. Prabhakara, R. L. Smith, and R. P. Stratford, Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems Handbook, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1996, Chapter 11.
[117] The INSPEC database has been accessed via the WebSPIRS server.
[118] The IEEE standard dictionary of electrical and electronics terms, 6th ed., IEEE Std. 100-
1996, IEEE, New York, 1997.
[119] Engineering Recommendation P2/5: Power system design.
(120] Electricity Plan 1997-2006, and Notes to the Electricity Plan 1997-2006, N.V. September/
Dutch Electricity Generating Board, Arnhem, The Netherlands, 1996.
[121] R. L. Capra, M. W. Sangel, and S. V. Lyon, Underground distribution system design for
reliability, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. 88, no. 6, June 1969,
pp. 834-842.
[122] N.E. Chang, Evaluate distribution system design by cost reliability indices, IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. 96, no. 5, September 1977, pp. 1480-
1490.
[123] B. H. T. Smeets and M. H. J. Bollen, Stochastic modelling of protection systems-eom-
parison of four mathematical techniques, Eindhoven University of Technology Research
Report 95-E-291, June 1995.
[124] J. W. H. Bar, H. L. Doppen, H. Juckers, H. M. A. Konings, P. Wiersma, H. Zuijderduin,
and M. J. Voeten, Onderhoudsanalyse (Maintenance analysis, in Dutch), VEEN,
Commissie Onderhoudsvraagstukken, Arnhem, The Netherlands, 1990.
[125] E. T. Parascos and J. A. Arceri, Reliability engineering and underground equipment fail-
ure, costs and manufacturer's analysis, 3rd Annual Reliability Engineering Conf., September
1976, Montreal, Canada, pp. 25-30.
[126] D. A. Ducket and C. M. McDonough, A guide for transformer replacement based on
reliability and economics, Rural Electric Power Conference, April 1990, Orlando, FL.
[127] N. E. Wiseman, Reliability testing, 3rd Annual Reliability Engineering Conf., September
1976, Montreal, Canada, pp. 21-24.
[128] T. Kawamura, M. Horikoshi, S. Kabayashi, and K.. Hamamoto, Progress of substation
maintenance based on records of operation and maintenance, Int. Con! on Large High
Voltage Electric Systems (CIGRE), August 1990, paper 23-102.
[129] G. Wacker and R. Billinton, Customer costs of electric service interruptions, Proceedings of
the IEEE, vol. 77, no. 6, June 1989, pp. 919-930.
[130] A. Makinen, J. Partanen, and E. Lakervi, A practical approach to estimating future outage
costs in power distribution networks, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 5, no. 1,
January 1990, pp. 313-316.
[131] A. M. Shaalan, Electric service interruptions: Impacts and costs estimation, Electra
(CIGRE), no. 127,1989, pp. 89-109.
[132) G. Wacker, E. Wojczynski, and R. Billinton, Interruption cost methodology and results-
A Canadian residential survey, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol.
102, no. 10, October 1983, pp. 3385-3392.
[133] S. Burns and G. Gross, Value of service reliability, IEEE Transactions on Power Systems,
vol. 5, no. 3, August 1990, pp. 825-834.
[134] IEEE Project Group 1159.2, Recommended practices for the characterization of a power
quality event, draft 1, March 1998.
[135] P. C. Krause, O. Wasynczuk, and S. D. Sudhoff, Analysis of electric machinery, New
York: IEEE Press, 1995.
472 Bibliography
[136] G. Yalcinkaya, The influence of induction motors on voltage sags due to short circuits,
PhD thesis, University of Manchester Institute of Science and Technology, Manchester,
U.K., October 1997.
[137] G. Yalcinkaya, M. H. J. Bollen, and P. A. Crossley, Characterisation of voltage sags in
industrial distribution systems, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 34, no. 4,
July 1998, pp. 682-688.
[138] E. Camm, Preventing nuisance tripping during overvoltages caused by capacitor switching,
in: P. Pilay, Ed., "Motor drive/power systems interactions", IEEE Industry Applications
Society Tutorial Course, October 1997.
[139] C. M. Warren, The effect of reducing momentary outages on distribution reliability
indices, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 7, no. 3, July 1992, pp. 1610-1617.
[140] Standards coordinating committee SCC-22: Charter, www.standards.ieee.org.
[141] T. Larsson, Voltage source converters for mitigation of flicker caused by arc furnaces, PhD
thesis, Royal Institute of Technology, Department of Electric Power Engineering,
Stockholm, Sweden, 1998.
[142] P. M. Anderson and R. G. Farmer, Series compensation of power systems, Section 7.3,
Lamp Flicker, PBLSHI, Encinitas, CA, 1996.
[143] J. G. Kappenman and V. D. Albertson, Bracing for the geomagnetic storms, IEEE
Spectrum, vol. 27, no. 3, March 1990, pp. 27-33.
[144] A. Lui, Ferroresonant overvoltages in electrical distribution systems, MSc thesis,
University of Manchester Institute of Science and Technology, Manchester, U.K.,
March 1997.
[145] H. J. Koglin, E. Roos, H. J. Richter, U. Scherer, and W. Wellssow, Experience in the
reliability evaluation of high voltage networks, Int. Con! on Large High Voltage Electric
Networks (CIGRE), September 1986, Paris, France.
[146] M. Mitra and S. K. Basu, On some properties of the bathtub failure rate family of lifetime
distributions, Microelectronics and Reliability, vol. 36, no. 5, May 1996, pp. 679-684.
[147] L. V. Skof, Customer interruption costs vary widely, Electrical World, vol. 188, no. 2, July
15, 1977, pp. 64-65.
[148] E. C. Ifeachor and B. W. Jervis, Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach,
Wokingham, England: Addison-Wesley, 1993.
[149] Cigre Working Group 34.01, Reliable fault clearance and back-up protection, Final report,
August 1997.
[150] K. Benson and J. R. Chapman, Boost converters provide power dip ride-through for ac
drives, Power Quality Assurance Magazine, July 1997.
[151] PQTN Brief No. 34, Performance of an ASD ride-through device during voltage sags,
EPRI PEAC, Knoxville, TN, May 1996.
[152] J. Svensson, Synchronisation methods for grid-connected voltage source converters, lEE
Proceedings-Electric Power Applications, in print.
[153] J. Svensson, Grid-connected voltage source converter-eontrol principles and wind energy
applications, PhD thesis, Chalmers University of Technology, School of Electrical and
Computer Engineering, Gothenburg, Sweden, 1998. Technical Report No. 331.
[154] R. de Graaff, Simulating the behavior of AC and DC adjustable-speed drives during
voltage sags, project report, Chalmers University of Technology, Dept. of Electric Power
Engineering, Gothenburg, Sweden, September 1997.
[155} L. E. Conrad, personal communication.
[156] D. L. Brooks, R. C. Dugan, M. Waclawiak, and A. Sundaram, Indices for assessing utility
distribution system RMS variation performance, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery,
vol. 13, no. I, January 1998, pp. 254-259.
Bibliography 473
[175] R. K. Smith, P. G. Slade, M. Sarkozi, E. J. Stacey, J. J. Bonk, and H. Mehta, Solid state
distribution current limiter and circuit breaker: Application requirements a.e control
strategies, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 8, no. 3, July 1993, pp. 1155-1164.
[176] J. A. Aspinall et al., eds., Power System Protection, Institution of Electrical Engineers,
London, U.K., 1995.
[177] The National Grid Company Seven-Year Statement for the Years 1994/5 to 2000/2001,
Coventry, U.K.: National Grid Company, July 1994..
[178] H. Akagi, Y. Kanazawa, and A. Nabae, Instantaneous reactive power compensators com-
prising switching devices without energy storage components, IEEE Transactions on
Industry Applications, vol. 20, no. 3, May 1984, pp. 625-630.
[179] W. M. Grady, M. J. Samotyj, and A. H. Noyola, Survey of active power line conditioning
methodologies, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 5, no. 3, July 1990, pp. 1536-
1542.
[180] C. Schauder, M. Gerhardt, E. Stacey, T. W. Cease, A. Edris, T. Lemak, and L. Guygyi,
Development of a 100 MVar static condenser for voltage control of transmission systems,
IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, no. 3, July 1995, pp. 1486-1496.
[181] L. Guygyi, C. D. Schauder, S. L. Williams, T. R. Rietman, D. R. Torgerson, and A. Edris,
The unified power flow controller: A new approach to power transmission control, IEEE
Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, no. 2, April 1995, pp. 1085-1097.
[182] H. Akagi, Trends in active power line conditioners, IEEE Transactions on Power
Electronics, vol. 9, no. 3, May 1994, pp. 263-268.
[183] H. Akagi, New trends in active filters for power conditioning, IEEE Transactions on
Industry Applications, vol. 32, no. 6, November/December 1996, pp. 1312-1322.
[184] N. H. Woodley, M. Sarkozi, A. Sandaram, and G. A. Taylor, Custom power: The utility
solution, Int. Con! on Electricity Distribution (CIRED), May 1995, Brussels, Belgium, vol.
5, pp. 9/1-6.
[185] lEE Colloquium of Dynamic Voltage Restorers-Replacing those missing cycles,
Institution of Electrical Engineers, London, U.K., lEE Digest No. 1998/189.
[186] B. Bhargava and G. Dishaw, Application of an energy source power system stabilizer on
the 10 MW battery energy storage system at Chino substation, IEEE Transactions on
Power Systems, vol. 13, no. 1, February 1998, pp. 145-151.
[187] S. J. Chiang, C. M. Liaw, W. C. Chang, and W. Y. Chang, Multi-module parallel small
battery energy storage system, IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 11, no. 1,
March 1996, pp. 146-154.
[188] N. W. Miller, R. S. Zrebiec, R. W. Delmerico, and G. Hunt, Design and commissioning of
a 2.5 MWh battery energy storage system, Int. Con! on Electricity Distribution fCIRED),
June 2-5, 1997, Birmingham, U.K., vol. 2, pp. 10/1-5.
[189] P. Pillay, A switched reluctance drive with improved ride-through capability, in: "Motor
drive/power system interactions", IEEE Tutorial Course 97 TP 123, October 1997.
[190] B. G. Johnson, K. P. Adler, G. V. Anastas, J. R. Dowver, D. B. Eisenhaure, J. H.
Goldie, and R. L. Hockney, Design of a torpedo inertial power storage unit (TIPSU),
Intersociety Energy Conversion Engineering Conference, August 1990, Reno, NV, vol. 4,
pp. 199-204.
[191] N. G. Hingorani, Introducing custom power, IEEE Spectrum, vol. 32, no. 6, June 1995, pp.
41-47.
[192] J. R. Hull, Flywheels on a roll, IEEE Spectrum, vol. 34, no. 7, July 1997, pp. 20-25.
[193] R. T. Morash, J. F. Roesel, and R. J. Barber, Improved power quality with written-pole
motor-generators and written-pole motors, 3rd Int. Conf. on Power Quality: End-use appli-
cations and perspectives (PQA 94), October 1994, Amsterdam, The Netherlands. Paper
0-2.10.
Bibliography 475
[194] J. Arrillaga, D. Bradley, and P. S. Bodger, Power System Harmonics, London: John Wiley
and Sons, Ltd., 1985.
[195] J. Arrillaga, B. C. Smith, N. R. Watson, and A. R. Wood, Power System Harmonic
Analysis, Chichester: John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., 1997.
[196] A. Larsson, M. Lundmark, and J. Hagelberg, Increased pollution in the protective earth,
European Conf. on Power Electronics and Applications, Trondheim, Norway, September
8-10, 1997.
[197] C. R. Heising, Worldwide reliability survey of high-voltage circuit breakers, IEEE Industry
Applications Magazine, vol. 2, no. 3, May 1996, pp. 65-66.
[198] IEEE standard terms for reporting and analyzing outage occurences and outage states of
electrical transmission facilities, IEEE Std. 859-1993.
[199] G. A. Taylor, J. E. Hill, A. B. Burden, and K. Mattern, Responding to the changing
demands of lower voltage networks-the utilisation of custom power systems, Int. Conf.
on Large Electric Networks (CIGRE), Session 1998, Paris, France, August 1998, paper
14-303.
[200] Avbrottskostnader for elkunder (Interruption costs for electricity customers, in Swedish),
Svenska Elverksforeningen, Stockholm, Sweden, 1994.
[201] N. S. Tunaboyla and E. R. Collins, The wavelet transform approach to detect and quantify
voltage sags, 7th Int. Con! on Harmonics and Quality of Power, October 1996, Las Vegas,
NV, pp. 619-624.
[202] o. Poisson, P. Rioual, and M. Meunier, Detection and measurement of power quality
disturbances using wavelet transform, 8th. Int. Conf. on Harmonics and Quality of
Power, Athens, Greece, October 1998, pp. 1125-1130.
[203] L. D. Zhang and M. H. J. Bollen, A method for characterizing unbalanced voltage dips
(sags) with symmetrical components, IEEE Power Engineering Review, vol. 18, no. 7, July
1998, pp. 50-52.
[204] L. D. Zhang and M. H. J. Bollen, Characteristics of voltage dips (sags) in power systems,
8th. Int. Con! on Harmonics and Quality of Power, Athens, Greece, October 1998, pp. 555-
560.
[205J G. Desuilbet, C. Foucher, and P. Fauquembergue, Statistical analysis of voltage dips, lrd.
Int. Conf. on Power Quality: End-use applications and perspectives, October 1994,
Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
[206] B. K. Bose, Ed., Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives-Technology and
Applications, New York: IEEE Press, 1997.
[207] E. W. Kimbark, Power System Stability, New York: IEEE Press, 1995.
[208] N. Carter, Improvements in network performance on urban and rural 11 kV networks, In:
Improving Power Quality in Transmission and Distribution, January 1998, Amsterdam, IBC
Technical Services, London, U.K., 1998.
[209] H. L. Willis, Power Distribution Planning Reference Book, New York: Marcel Dekker,
1997.
[210] G. T. Heydt, W. Tan, T. LaRose, and M. Negley, Simulation and analysis of series voltage
boost technology for power quality enhancement, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery,
vol. 13, no. 4, October 1998, pp. 1335-1341.
[211] J. Lundquist, Ornriktare och olinjara laster i elektriska nat (Converters and nonlinear load
in electric power systems, in Swedish), MSc Report, Hogskolan i Skovde, Skovde, Sweden,
December 1996.
[212] R. Hart, HV overhead line-the Scandinavian experience, Power Engineering Journal, June
1994, pp. 119-123.
[213] M. W. Vogt, T2 ACSR conductors: lessons learned, IEEE Industry Applications Magazine,
vol. 4, no. 3, May 1998, pp. 37-39.
476 Bibliography
[214] Recommended practice for electric power distribution for industrial plants (IEEE Red
Book), IEEE Std. 141-/993.
[215] H. C. Tijms, Stochastic Models: An Algorithmic Approach. Chichester, U.K.: Wiley, 1994.
[216] K. K. Kariuki and R. N. Allan, Factors affect.ng customer outage costs due to electric
service interruptions, lEE Proceeding-Genera til n, Transmission, Distribution, vol. 143, no.
6, November 1996, pp. 521-528.
Appendix A:
Overview of EMC
Standards
• Part 1: General
- Section 1: Application and interpretation of fundamental definitions and
terms.
- Section 2: Methodology for the achievement of functional safety of electrical
and electronic equipment (in preparation).
• Part 2: Environment
- Section 1: Description of the environment-Electromagnetic environment for
low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in power supply systems.
- Section 2: Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and
signalling in public supply systems.
- Section 3: Description of the environment-Radiated and non-network-fre-
quency-related conducted disturbances.
- Section 4: Compatibility levels in industrial plants for low-frequency con-
ducted disturbances.
- Section 5: Classification of electromagnetic environments.
- Section 6: Assessment of the emission levels in the power supply of industrial
plants as regards low-frequency conducted disturbances.
- Section 7: Low-frequency magnetic fields in various environments.
- Section 8: Voltage dips, short interruptions and statistical measurement
results (in preparation).
- Section 12: Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances
and signalling in public medium-voltage power supply systems (in prepara-
tion).
477
478 Appendix A • Overview of EMC Standards
• Part 3: Limits
- Section 1: Overview of emission standards and guides (in preparation).
- Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current
~ 16A per phase).
- Section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-voltage supply
systems for equipment with rated current ~ 16A.
- Section 4: Limitation of emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage power
supply systems for equipment with rated current greater than 16A.
- Section 5: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-voltage power
supply systems for equipment with rated current greater than 16 A.
- Section 6: Assessment of emission limits for distorting loads in MV and HV
power systems.
- Section 7: Assessment of emission limits for fluctuating loads in MV and HV
power systems.
- Section 8: Signalling on low-voltage electrical installations-Emission levels,
frequency bands and electromagnetic disturbance levels.
- Section 9: Limits for interharmonic current emissions (equipment with input
power ~ 16 A per phase and prone to produce interharmonics by design) (in
preparation).
- Section 10: Emission limits in the frequency range 2 ... 9 kHz (in prepara-
tion).
- Section 11: Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current ~ 75 A and sub-
ject to conditional connection (in preparation).
• Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques
- Section 1: Overview of immunity tests.
- Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
- Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test.
- Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test.
- Section 5: Surge immunity test.
- Section 6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency
fields.
- Section 7: General guide on harmonic distortion and interharmonics mea-
surement and instrumentation, for power supply systems and equipment con-
nected thereto.
- Section 8: Power frequency magnetic field immunity test.
- Section 9: Pulse magnetic field immunity test.
- Section 10: Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity test.
- Section 11: Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations immunity
tests.
- Section 12: Oscillatory waves immunity test.
- Section 13: Test for immunity to harmonics and interharmonics including
mains signalling at a.c. power port (in preparation).
- Section 14: Voltage fluctuations-Immunity test.
- Section 15: Flickermeter-Functional and design specifications.
Appendix A • Overview of EMC Standards 479
The American standard setting organizations, ANSI and IEEE, do not have such a
comprehensive and structured set of power quality standards as the lEe. On the other
hand, the IEEE standards give much more practical and some theoretical background
on the phenomena. This makes many of the IEEE standard documents very useful
reference documents, even outside of the United States. Below follows a list of existing
IEEE standards on power quality, and some standard documents currently under
development.
481
482 Appendix B • IEEE Standards on Power Quality
• Std 376-1993 Standard for the measurement of impulse strength and impulse
bandwidth.
• Std 430-1991 Standard procedures for the measurement of radio noise from
overhead power lines and substations.
• Std 446-1987 Recommended practice for emergency and standby power sys-
tems for industrial and commercial applications, also knows as the Orange
Book.
• Std 449-1990 Standard for ferroresonance voltage regulators.
• Std 473-1991 Recommended practice for an electromagnetic site. survey
(10kHz to IOGHz).
• Std 493-1997 Recommended practice for the design of reliable industrial and
commercial power systems, also known as the Gold Book.
• Std 519-1992 Recommended practice and requirements for harmonic control in
electric power systems,
• Std 539-1990 Standard definitions of terms relating to corona and field effects
of overhead power lines.
• Std 762-1987 Standard definitions for use in reporting electric generating unit
reliability, availability, and productivity.
• Std 859-1987 Standard terms for reporting and analyzing outage occurrences
and outage states of electrical transmission facilities.
• Std 944-1986 Application and testing of uninterruptible power supplies for
power generating stations.
• Std 998-1996 Guide for direct lightning stroke shielding of substations.
• Std 1048-1990 Guide for protective grounding of power lines.
• Std 1057-1994 Standard for digitizing waveform recorders.
• Std 1100-1992 Recommended practice for powering and grounding sensitive
electronic equipment, also known as the Emerald Book.
• Std 1159-1995 Recommended practice for monitoring electric power quality.
• Std 1184-1995 Guide for the selection and sizing of batteries for uninterruptible
power systems.
• Std 1250-1995 Guide for service to equipment sensitive to momentary voltage
disturbances.
• Std 1325-1996 Recommended practice for reporting field failure data for power
circuit breakers.
• Std 1313.1-1996 Standard for insulation coordination-definitions, principles,
and rules.
• Std 1346-1998 Recommended practice for evaluating electric power system
compatibility with electronics process equipment.
• Project 1409 Custom power task force.
• Project 1433 A standard glossary of power quality terminology.
• Project 1453 Voltage flicker.
• Std C37.10-1995 Guide for diagnostics and failure investigation of power
cireui t breakers.
• Std C37.95-1994 Guide for protective relaying ofutility-eonsumer interconnec-
tions.
Appendix B • IEEE Standards on Power Quality 483
This appendix gives an overview of power quality terminology as used in this book and
as defined in standard documents. The main source for the latter is the "IEEE Standard
dictionary on electrical and electronics terms" (IEEE Std 100-1996). Other sources used
are IEC standard 61000-1-1 (Electromagnetic Compatibility: application and interpre-
tation of fundamental definitions and terms); CENELEC standard EN 50160 (Voltage
characteristics in public distribution systems), the UIE "Guide to quality of electrical
supply for industrial installations" and the book "Reliability evaluation of power
systems" (R. Billinton, R.N. Allan, Plenum Press, 1996). The references with the
various definitions below are to IEEE standards, unless otherwise noted.
The list below is certainly not consistent, neither is it complete. It does, however,
give an overview of the terminology in use as well as the potential pitfalls in defining
and using power quality terminology. Currently a number of IEEE standards are under
development and are aimed at providing a complete and comprehensive set of defini-
tions for power quality terminology (among others 1159 and 1433). As only early drafts
were available these are not included in the list below.
485
486 Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology
• Conducted interference
- Interference resulting from conducted radio noise or unwanted radio signals
entering a device by direct coupling [539].
- Electromagnetic interference due to an electromagnetic disturbance reaching
the affected device through a conducting medium.
• Current disturbance A variation or event during which the current in the system
or at the equipment terminals deviates from the ideal sine wave (this book).
• Current event One of two classes of current disturbances. A large deviation
from the ideal current sine wave, which only occurs occasionally (this book).
• Current magnitude variation A current variation in which the magnitude of the
load current is not constant (this book).
• Current phase variation A current variation in which the load current is not in
phase with the system voltage (this book).
• Current quality The study or description of deviations of the load or equipment
current from the ideal sine wave. The ideal current sine wave is of constant
magnitude, constant frequency equal to the voltage frequency, and in phase
with the voltage. The term "current quality" is rarely used, but it has been
introduced as a complement to "voltage quality" (this book).
• Current variation One of two classes of current disturbances. A small slowly
varying deviation from the ideal sinusoidal current which is always present but
nominally or ideally zero (this book).
• Electromagnetic compatibility The ability of an equipment or system to func-
tion satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intol-
erable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment [lEe
61000-1-1].
• Electromagnetic compatibility level = compatibility level [lEe].
• Electromagnetic disturbance Any electromagnetic phenomenon which may
degrade the performance of a device, equipment, or system, or adversely affect
living or inert rnatter [lEe 61000-1-1].
• Electromagnetic emission = emission.
• Electromagnetic environment
- The electromagnetic field(s) and or signals existing in a transmission medium
[IEEE Electromagnetic Compatibility Society].
- The totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location [IEC
61000-1-1].
• Electromagnetic interference Degradation of the performance of a device,
equipment, or system caused by an electromagnetic disturbance [IEC 61000-
1-1].
• Electromagnetic noise = electromagnetic disturbance [539].
• Emission The phenomenon by which electromagnetic energy emanates from a
source usc 61000-1-1].
• Emission level The level of a given electromagnetic disturbance emitted from a
particular device, equipment, or system, measured in a specified way [lEe
61000-1-1].
• Emission limit The maximum permissible emission level [lEe 61000-1-1].
Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology 487
• Emission margin The ratio of the compatibility level to the emission limit [IEC
61000-1-1].
• Immunity level The maximum level of a given electromagnetic disturbance,
incident in a specified way on a particular device, equipment, or system, at
which no degradation of operation occurs [IEC 61000-1-1].
• Immunity limit The minimum required immunity level [IEC 61000-1-1].
• Immunity margin The ratio of the immunity limit to the compatibility level
[IEC 61000-1-1].
• Interference = electromagnetic interference.
• Interference voltage Voltage produced by electromagnetic interference [IEEE
Electromagnetic Compatibility Society; CISPR-International Special
Committee on Radio Interference].
• Power disturbance Any deviation from the nominal value (or from some
selected thresholds based on load tolerance) of the input ac power character-
istics [1100], [1159].
• Power quality
- The study or description of both voltage and current disturbances. Power
quality can be seen as the combination of voltage quality and current quality
(this book).
- The concept of powering and grounding sensitive equipment in a manner that
is suitable to the operation of that equipment [1100], [1159].
• Quality of consumption The complementary term of "quality of service," refer-
ring to the customer's responsibilities in the interaction between customer and
utility (this book).
• Quality of service The non-technical part of the "quality of supply" (this book).
The term is also used as a synonym for "quality of supply."
• Quality of supply Referring to the utility's responsibilities in the interaction
between the utility and the customer. The term "quality of supply" includes a
technical part which more or less coincides with the term "voltage quality" and
a non-technical part sometimes referred to as "quality of service" (this book).
• Radiated interference
- Radio interference resulting from radiated noise or unwanted signals [IEEE
Electromagnetic Compatibility Society].
- Electromagnetic interference due to an electromagnetic disturbance reaching
the affected device in the form of radiation.
• Unwanted signal A signal that may impair the measurement or reception of a
wanted signal [539].
• Voltage characteristics A description of the voltage quality experienced by
customers or equipment in a certain area [EN 50160].
• Voltage disturbance A variation of event during which the voltage in the system
or at the equipment terminals deviates from the ideal sine wave (this book).
• Voltage event One of two classes of voltage disturbances. A large deviation
from the ideal voltage sine wave, which only occurs occasionally (this book).
• Voltage magnitude event A voltage event in which the rms voltage is outside of
its normal operating range for a limited period of time (this book).
488 Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology
- An rms increase in the ac voltage, at the power frequency, for durations from
one half-cycle to a few seconds [1100], [1250].
- A voltage magnitude event with a magnitude above 110% of the nominal
voltage, and a duration between 0.5 cycles and 1 minute [1159].
• Temporary fault A short-circuit fault that is self-clearing or is cleared by fault-
clearing followed by fast reclosing [1250].
• Temporary forced outage A forced outage where the unit or component is
undamaged and is restored to service by manual switching operations without
repair but possibly with on-site inspection [859]. Note the contradiction with
"temporary interruption." The use of these terms should be avoided.
• Temporary interruption
- An interruption with a duration between 3 seconds and 1 minute [1159].
- An interruption with a duration between 2 seconds and 2 minutes [1250].
• Temporary power frequency overvoltage = swell [EN 50160].
• Transient fault A fault that disappears of its own accord [lEe], [IEEE Power
Engineering Society]. The term is also used for a fault that disappears after
reclosure and the use of the term should be avoided.
• Transient forced outage A forced outage where the unit or component is un-
damaged and is restored to service automatically [859].
• Transient outage An outage of a power system component which is restored
automatically [859].
• Undervoltage
- A voltage event in which the rms voltage is outside its normal operating
margin for a certain period of time (this book).
- A voltage magnitude event with a magnitude less than the nominal rms
voltage, and a duration exceeding 1 minute [1159].
- A voltage magnitude event with a duration less than the nominal rms voltage,
and a duration longer than a few seconds [1100], [1250].
• Very long (interruption, undervoltage, overvoltage) A voltage magnitude event
with a duration more than a few hours, corresponding to events in the power
system requiring repair or replacement of faulted components before the pre-
event situation can be restored (this book).
• Very short (interruption, undervoltage, overvoltage) A voltage magnitude event
with a duration less than a few cycles, corresponding to transient and self-
restoring events in the power system (this book).
• Voltage interruption = interruption [1159].
• Voltage swell = swell.
• Aging The change of the failure rate of a stochastic component with time.
• ASAI Average service availability index [Billinton-Allan].
ASAI == customer hours of available service
(C.I)
customer hours demanded
• Automatic outage An outage occurrence that results from automatic operation
of switching devices [859].
• AvaUability
- The fraction of time during which a system is capable of performing its
mission [446], [493], [859], [896.9], [C37.1], [C37.100].
- The probability that an item will be operational at a randomly selected future
instant in time [352], [380], [577], [896.3].
• CAIDI Customer average interruption duration index [Billinton-Allan].
CA I D I
= sum of customer interruption durations (C.2)
tota I num ber 0 f customer Interruptions
. ·
• Outage duration The period from the initiation of an outage until the affected
component once again becomes available to perform its intended function
[346], [859].
• Outage event An event involving the outage occurrence of one or more units or
components [859].
• Outage occurrence The change in the state of one component or one unit from
the in-service state to the outage state [859].
• Outage rate = failure rate [346], [859].
• Outage state The component or unit is not in the in-service state; that is, it is
partially or fully isolated from the system [859].
• Partial outage state The component or unit is at least partially energized, or is
not fully connected to all of its terminals, or both, so that it is not serving some
of its functions within the power system [859].
• Passive failure The outage of a primary component not associated with a short-
circuit fault [Billinton-Allan].
• Permanent forced outage A forced outage where the component or unit is
damaged and cannot be restored to service until repair or replacement is com-
pleted [859].
• Permanent outage An outage of a power system component which is restored
through repair or replacement [859].
• Planned (interruption, outage, etc.) = scheduled (interruption, outage, etc.).
• Power system reliability The area of power engineering covering the stochastic
prediction of frequency and duration of supply interruptions. The term is
normally used to cover only interruptions, but the same techniques can be
applied to other power quality events.
• Primary outage An outage occurrence within a related multiple outage event
that occurs as a direct consequence of the initiating incident and is not depen-
dent on any other outage occurrence [859].
• Probability of failure to close on command The ratio of the number of failures to
close and the number of commands to close for a circuit breaker, switch, or
recloser [859].
• Probability of failure to open on command The ratio of the number of failures to
open and the number of commands to open for a circuit breaker, switch, or
recloser [859].
• Reclosing interval The time between the opening of a circuit breaker and its
automatic reclosure [C37.100].
• Reclosure The automatic closure of a circuit-interrupting device following
automatic tripping [C37.95].
• Redundant Referring to a (power system) component whose failure or outage
does not lead to an interruption of the supply for any load or customer.
• Related multiple outage event A multiple outage event in which one outage
occurrence is the consequence of another outage occurrence, or in which multi-
ple outage occurrences were initiated by a single incident, or both. Each outage
occurrence in a related multiple outage event is classified as either a primary
outage or a secondary outage depending on the relationship between that out-
age occurrence and its initiating incident [859].
• Reliability assessment = reliability evaluation [729].
Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology 495
C.4 VOLTAGESAGS
• Balanced sag An equal drop in the rms value of voltage in the three phases of a
three-phase system or at the terminals of three-phase equipment for a duration
up to a few minutes. Note that a balanced sag is a special case of the three-
phase unbalanced sag (this book).
• Characteristic complex voltage A characteristic of a three-phase unbalanced
sag, indicating the severity of the sag. For the various types of three-phase
unbalanced sags, definitions for the characteristic complex voltage are given.
The characteristic complex voltage may generally be defined as the complex
voltage in the phase most affected or the complex voltage of the voltage dif-
ference most affected, whichever one is more affected. In either case the rele-
vant pre-event voltage or voltage difference is along the positive real axis (this
book).
• Characteristic magnitude The absolute value of the characteristic complex vol-
tage (this book).
• Characteristic phase-angle jump The argument of the characteristic complex
voltage (this book).
• Complex voltage at the equipment terminals For three-phase equipment, the
three complex voltages as experienced at the terminals of a device or as mea-
sured at a certain location due to a three-phase unbalanced sag. For each of the
three voltages, the pre-event value is along the positive real axis (this book).
• Critical distance The distance at which a short-circuit fault will lead to a
voltage sag of a given magnitude for a given load position (this book).
• Duration (of a voltage sag) The time during which the voltage deviates signifi-
cantly from the ideal voltage. A further definition of "significant deviation"
remains a point of discussion; a typical definition is an rms voltage less than
90% of its nominal value in at least one phase (this book).
Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology 497
- A voltage magnitude event with a magnitude less than the nominal voltage
and a duration between 0.5 cycles and a few seconds [1100], [1250].
• Sag initiation The sudden change in voltage somewhere in the power system or
at the equipment terminals, directly attributed to the initiation of a short-
circuit fault. The instant of sag initiation can be viewed as the actual start of
a voltage sag (this book).
• Supply voltage dip A sudden reduction of the supply voltage to a value between
90% and 1% of the declared voltage, followed by a recovery after a short
period of time [EN 50160].
• Three-phase balanced sag = balanced sag.
• Three-phase unbalanced sag A drop in the rms value of the voltage for a dura-
tion up to one minute, in at least one phase of a three-phase system or at the
terminals of three-phase equipment (this book).
• Unbalanced fault A short-circuit or open-circuit fault in which not all three
phases are equally involved. Examples are single-phase-to-ground, and phase-
to-phase short circuits.
• Voltage dip Sudden reduction in the supply voltage by a value of more than
100/0 of the reference value, followed by a voltage recovery after a short period
of time [UIE].
• Voltage sag For single-phase equipment, a drop in the rms value of the voltage
for up to a few minutes.
• Voltage sag duration See duration.
• Voltage sag magnitude See magnitude.
• Voltage recovery The sudden change in voltage somewhere in the power system
or at the equipment terminals, directly attributed to the removal of a short-
circuit fault from the healthy part of the power system. The instant of voltage
recovery can be viewed as the end of the actual voltage sag. Note that the
voltage does not necessarily recover completely to its pre-event value.
• Voltage tolerance The immunity of a piece of equipment against voltage mag-
nitude variations (voltage sags, voltage swells, and interruptions) and short-
duration overvoltages.
• Voltage-tolerance curve The relation between the maximum sag duration and
the minimum sag magnitude for which a sensitive component will trip.
• Deviation from a sine wave The ratio of the absolute value of the maximum
difference between the distorted wave and the crest value of the fundamental
[519], [937].
• Distortion Non-power frequency components of voltage or current. The term is
often used as a synonym for "harmonic distortion."
• Distortion factor
- The ratio of the rms of the harmonic contents of voltage or current to the rms
value of the fundamental quantity [120], [519], [1100], [1250].
- The ratio of the rms of the harmonic contents of voltage or current to the rms
value of the full wave [281], [IEEE Power Engineering Society]. Note the
difference between these two definitions.
• Distortion power A third power term next to active and reactive power, math-
ematically defined as
(8.6)
where S is the apparent power, P the active power, and Q the sum of the
reactive powers in all harmonic components [270].
• Form factor The ratio of the root-mean-square value of a periodic waveform to
the absolute value averaged over a full period of the waveform [IEEE Industry
Applications Society], [1100], [270], [59], [120].
• Harmonic A sinusoidal component of a periodic wave or quantity having a
frequency that is an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency. Note: For
example, a component, the frequency of which is twice the fundamental fre-
quency, is called a second harmonic [519], [599], [936], [1250], [C62.48], [EN
50160].
• Harmonic component = harmonic.
• Harmonic content The distortion of a voltage or current wave, expressed in the
absolute value of the various harmonic components [446], [539], [644], [IEEE
Industry Applications Society].
• Harmonic distortion Frequency components of voltage or current that are
integer multiples of the power-system frequency [1057], [1100], [1143], [1250],
[C62.48].
• Harmonic factor = distortion factor [519].
• Harmonic (voltage or current) distortion A voltage or current variation in which
the steady-state waveshape contains components with frequencies that are an
integer multiple of the fundamental frequency.
• Interharmonic (voltage or current) distortion A voltage or current variation in
which the steady-state waveshape contains a component with a frequency
which is not an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency [1159], [EN
50160].
• Line voltage notch = periodic voltage notching [519].
• Maximum theoretical deviation from a sine wave For a nonsinusoidal wave, the
ratio of the arithmetic sum of the amplitudes (rms) of all harmonics in the wave
to the amplitude (rms) of the fundamental [519], [936].
500 Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology
• Critical load
- That part of the load that requires continuous quality electric power for its
successful operation [241].
Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology 501
• Common-mode noise The noise voltage that appears equally and in phase from
each signal conductor to ground [422],.[525], [1050], [1100], [1143].
• Common-mode overvoltage An event in which the differential mode voltage
does not exceed its normal operating range, but the common-mode voltage
does [1057].
• Common-mode voltage The noise voltage that appears equally and in phase
from current-carrying conductor to ground [1159], [lEe 61000-2-1].
• Conducted radio noise Radio noise propagated by conduction from a source
through electrical connections [539].
• Critical stroke magnitude The amplitude of the current of the lightning stroke
that, upon terminating on the phase conductor, would raise the voltage of the
conductor to a level at which flashover is likely [998].
• Current unbalance A current variation for a three-phase load, in which the
three current magnitudes or the phase-angle differences between them are
not equal (this book).
• DC offset The presence of a de voltage or current component in an ac power
system [1159].
• Differential mode voltage The voltage difference between two phases of a
balanced circuit [802.3], [802.12].
• Flicker = light flicker [1159], [1250], [lEe].
• Frequency deviation = voltage frequency variation [1100], [1159].
• Full impulse voltage An aperiodic transient voltage that rises rapidly to a max-
imum value and falls, usually less rapidly, to zero [4].
• Full lightning impulse A lightning impulse not interrupted by any type of dis-
charge [4].
• Geomagnetically induced currents Currents induced in power systems by varia-
tions in the geomagnetic field. These variations, and thus the induced currents,
have periods of several minutes [367].
• Glitch A perturbation of the pulse waveform of relatively short duration and of
uncertain origin [4]. The use of this term should be avoided.
• High-frequency transient An oscillatory transient with an oscillation frequency
above 500 kHz [1159].
• Imbalance = voltage unbalance [1159].
• Impulse A surge of unidirectional polarity, for example a 1.2/50 JlS voltage
surge [4], [28], [829], [1100], [1250], [C62.11], [C62.22].
• Impulse noise Noise characterized by transient disturbances separated in time
by quiescent intervals [145], [539], [599].
• Impulsive transient A type of voltage of current transient, during which the
deviation from the normal voltage is unidirectional; i.e., either always positive
or always negative [1159].
• Light flicker A variation in intensity of lighting as perceived by a human
observer. Light flicker can be due to voltage fluctuations.
• Lightning overvoltage A type of transient overvoltage in which a fast front
voltage is produced by lightning or fault [1313.~].
• Load voltage unbalance = voltage unbalance [428].
Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology 503
• Rapid voltage change A single rapid variation of the rms value of a voltage
between two consecutive levels which are sustained for definite but unspecified
durations [EN 50160]. This term corresponds to the term "voltage magnitude
step. "
• Ripple control signals Mains signaling voltages in the frequency range between
110 and 3000 Hz [EN 50160].
• Slew rate
- The rate of change of ac voltage, expressed in volts per second [1159].
- Rate of change of (ac voltage) frequency [1100].
• Solar-induced currents = geomagnetically induced currents.
• Spike = transient overvoltage [241].
• Surge
- A transient wave of current, voltage, or power in an electric circuit [C62.I],
[C62.11], [C62.22], [C62.41].
- A transient voltage or current, which usually rises rapidly to a peak value and
then falls more slowly to zero, occurring in electrical equipment or networks in
service [4].
- A transient wave of voltage or current [1250], [C62.34], [C62.48].
- The term "surge" is also used in the meaning of "short overvoltage"; its use
should be completely avoided.
• Switching overvoltage A transient overvoltage in which a slow front, short
duration, unidirectional or oscillatory, highly damped voltage is generated
by switching or by a fault [1313.1].
• Switching surge = switching overvoltage [524], [524a], [1048], [C62.22].
• Temporary overvoltage An undamped or only slightly damped overvoltage of
relatively long duration [1313.1].
• Three-phase unbalance = voltage unbalance.
• Transient
- = transient (voltage or current) disturbance.
- A change in the steady-state condition of voltage or current, or both [382].
- Any voltage or current event with a duration of less than a few cycles [1250].
- A subcycle disturbance in the ac waveform that is evidenced by a sharp brief
discontinuity of the waveform. May be of either polarity and may be additive
to or subtractive from the nominal waveform [1100].
- A disturbance lasting less than one half-cycle [VIE].
• Transient (voltage or current) disturbance A subcycle disturbance in the ac
waveform that is evidenced by a sharp brief discontinuity of the waveform
[1100].
• Transient overvoltage
- Short-duration oscillatory or non-oscillatory overvoltage usually highly
damped and with a duration of a few milliseconds or less [EN 50160].
- Momentary excursion of voltage outside of the normal 60 Hz voltage wave
[241].
Appendix C • Power Quality Definitions and Terminology 50S
S07
508 Appendix D • Figures
4.28 Sag magnitude as a function of the distance to the fault, for transmission
systems.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.29 Example of subtransmission loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.30 Equivalent circuit for subtransmission loop 160
4.31 Loop system operating at 132kV 161
4.32 Sag magnitudes for faults on a 132kV loop 161
4.33 Sag magnitude versus distance, for faults on loops (solid and dashed lines)
and on a radial feeder (dotted line) 161
4.34 Most shallow sag for a fault in a loop, as a function of the impedance of
the non-faulted branch for various values of the impedance of the faulted
branch 162
4.35 Most shallow sag for a fault in a loop, as a function of the impedance
of the faulted branch, for various values of the impedance of the
non-faulted branch 163
4.36 System with a branch away from a loop 163
4.37 Equivalent circuit for system with a branch away from a loop, as in
Fig. 4.36 164
4.38 Industrial system with breaker at intermediate voltage level closed (left)
and open (right) 164
4.39 Sag magnitude versus distance to the fault, for an industrial system
with and without bus-splitting applied to the 11 kV bus 165
4.40 Parallel operation of transmission and subtransmission systems 165
4.41 Circuit diagram representation of part of a 400/275 kV system 167
4.42 Sags of different origin in a magnitude-duration plot. 169
4.43 General structure of power system, with distribution and transmission
networks.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.44 Estimation of sag duration by power quality monitor for a two-cycle sag:
overestimation by one cycle (upper graph); correct estimation
(lower graph). .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.45 Half-cycle rms voltage together with absolute value of the voltage
(dashed line) of the sag shown in Fig. 4.1 171
4.46 Error in sag duration due to post-fault sag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.47 Measured sag with a clear post-fault component. (Data obtained from
Scottish Power.) 173
4.48 RMS voltages versus time for the sag shown in Fig. 4.47 173
4.49 Sag duration versus threshold setting for the three phases of the sag
shown in Figs. 4.47 and 4.48. . 173
4.50 Positive- (top), negative- (center), and zero- (bottom) sequence networks
for the voltage divider shown in Fig. 4.14 174
4.51 Equivalent circuit for a single-phase fault 175
4.52 Phase-to-ground voltages during a single-phase fault. 176
4.53 Three-phase voltage divider model. 178
4.54 Voltage in the faulted phase for single-phase and three-phase faults on a
132 kV feeder in Fig. 4.21 179
4.55 Voltage in the faulted phase for single-phase and three-phase faults on an
11 kV feeder in Fig. 4.21 180
4.56 Voltage in the faulted and non-faulted phases for a single-phase fault on
an 11 kV feeder in Fig. 4.21, as a function of the distance to the fault. 180
4.57 Complex voltages due to a fault on an 11 kV feeder in Fig. 4.21 180
512 Appendix D • Figures
4.84 Magnitude versus phase-angle jump, for underground cables with cross
section 300mm2 (solid line), 150mm 2 (dashed line), and 50 mnr' (dotted
line) 203
4.85 Phasor diagram for calculation of magnitude and phase-angle jump. . 204
4.86 Relation between magnitude and phase-angle jump for three-phase faults:
impedance angles: = -60 (solid curve); -35 (dashed); -10 (dotted);
0 0 0
4.95 Magnitude versus phase-angle jump for sag type D due to phase-to-phase
faults: impedance angle -600 (solid line), -400 (dashed), -20 0 (dotted),
o (dash-dot) 213
4.96 Range of sags due to phase-to-phase faults, as experienced by single-phase
equipment 214
4.97 Characteristic magnitude and phase-angle jump for sags due to
phase-to-phase faults in the example supply in Fig. 4.21-solid line:
type C sags, dashed line: type D sags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.98 Magnitude and phase-angle jump at the equipment terminals due to
phase-to-phase faults in the supply in Fig. 4.21, experienced by single-phase
load connected phase-to-ground at 420 V-solid line: 11 kV, dashed line:
33kV, dotted line: 132kV, dash-dot line: 400kV 215
4.99 Transformation of sags due to single-phase faults--error in approximate
expressions for characteristic magnitude. Impedance angle: -60 0 (solid line);
-40 0 (dashed); -20 0 (dotted) 217
4.100 Transformation of sags due to single-phase faults-error in approximate
expressions for characteristic phase-angle jump. Impedance angle: -60 0
(solid line); -400 (dashed); -200 (dotted) 217
4.101 Relation between phase-angle jump and magnitude of sags due to
single-phase faults: characteristic values (dashed curve) and initial values
(solid curve) 218
514 Appendix D • Figures
4.102 Range of sags experienced by single-phase equipment for sag type C and
single-phase fault, impedance angle: -60 0 (solid line), -40 0 (dashed),
-20 0 (dotted), 0 (dash-dot) 218
4.103 Range of sags experienced by single-phase equipment for sag type D and
single-phase fault, impedance angle:-60° (solid line), -40 0 (dashed),
-20 0 (dotted), 0 (dash-dot) 219
4.104 Range of sags due to single-phase faults (solid curve) and due to
phase-to-phase faults (dashed curve) 219
4.105 Characteristic magnitude and phase-angle jump for sags due to
single-phase faults in the example supply in Fig. 4.21, experienced by
three-phase load connected phase-to-phase at 660 V-solid line: 11kV,
dashed line: 33 kV, dotted line: 132kV, dash-dot line: 400 kV. . 220
4.106 Characteristic magnitude and phase-angle jump for three-phase
unbalanced sags in Fig. 4.21, experienced by three-phase delta-connected
load-solid line: type C, dashed line: type D 221
4.107 Magnitude and phase-angle jump for sags due to single-phase faults
in the example supply in Fig. 4.21, experienced by single..phase load-
connected phase-to-ground at 420 V-solid line: II kV, dashed line:
33 kV, dotted line: 132kV, dash-dot line: 400 kV 222
4.108 Magnitude and phase-angle jump for all sags in the example supply in
Fig. 4.21, experienced by single-phase load-connected phase-to-ground
at 420 V-solid line: 11 kV, dashed line: 33kV, dotted line: 132kV,
dash-dot line: 400 kV 222
4.109 Phasor diagram for three-phase unbalanced sag of type F with
characteristic magnitude V and characteristic phase-angle jump t/J. . ..... 223
4.110 Magnitude and phase-angle jump at the equipment terminals for a
type F sag, due to a two-phase-to-ground fault. The curves are given
for an impedance angle of 0 (dashed line) and -60 0 (solid line) 224
4.111 Detailed phasor diagram for three-phase unbalanced sag of type G with
characteristic magnitude V and characteristic phase-angle jump t/J. . ..... 224
4.112 Magnitude and phase-angle jump at the equipment terminals for a
type G sag, due to a two-phase-to-ground fault. The curves are given
for an impedance angle of 0 (dashed line) and -60 0 (solid line) 225
4.113 Range of magnitude and phase-angle jump at the equipment terminals
due to phase-to-phase (dashed curve) and two-phase-to-ground faults
(solid curve) 226
4.114 Magnitude and phase-angle jump at the equipment terminals due to
two-phase-to-ground faults in Fig. 4.21, experienced by single-phase
load-connected phase-to-ground at 420 V-solid line: 11 kV, dashed line:
33 kV, dotted line: 132 kV, dash-dot line: 400 kV 227
4.115 Sag magnitude versus distance for three-phase faults with fault resistances
equal to zero (solid line), 10% (dashed line), 200/0 (dash-dot line), and
30% (dotted line) of the source impedance 228
4.116 Sag magnitude versus phase-angle jump for three-phase faults with fault
resistances equal to zero (solid line), 10% (dashed line), 200/0
(dash-dot line), and 300/0 (dotted line) of the source impedance 229
4.117 Magnitude versus phase-angle jump at the equipment terminals for
single-phase faults in a solidly grounded system, sag type C; fault
resistances equal to zero (solid line), 10% (dashed line), 20%
(dash-dot line), and 30% (dotted line) of the source impedance 229
Appendix D • Figures 51S
4.138 Voltages at the equipment terminals, for three stages of induction motor
influence for type C sags. The solid lines are without induction motor
influence, the dashed lines with 247
4.139 Voltages at the equipment terminals, for three stages of induction motor
influence for type D sags. The solid lines are without induction motor
influence, the dashed lines with 247
4.140 Equivalent circuit for voltage sag due to induction motor starting 249
4.141 Induction motor starting with dedicated transformer for the sensitive
load 250
5.32 Induction motor influence on average de bus voltage for sags of type C.
Solid line: large capacitor; dashed line: small capacitor; dotted line: no
capacitor connected to the de bus 284
5.33 Induction motor influence on minimum de bus voltage for sags of type D.
Solid line: large capacitor; dashed line: small capacitor; dotted line: no
capacitor connected to the de bus 284
5.34 Induction motor influence on average de bus voltage for sags of type D.
Solid line: large capacitor; dashed line: small capacitor; dotted line: no
capacitor connected to the de bus 284
5.35 Configuration of the power supply to the control circuitry in an
adjustable-speed drive. . 285
5.36 AC side voltage (top) and currents (phase a, b, and c from top to bottom)
for a three-phase unbalanced sag of type D 286
5.37 AC side voltage (top) and currents (phase a, b, and c from top to bottom)
for a three-phase unbalanced sag of type C 287
5.38 Input current for an ac drive in normal operation. (Reproduced from
Mansoor [27].) 287
5.39 Input current for an ac drive with voltage unbalance. (Reproduced from
Mansoor [27].) 288
5.40 Input current for an ac drive during a single-phase fault. (Reproduced
from Mansoor [27].) 288
5.41 Principle of pulse-width modulation: carrier signal with reference signal
(dashed) in the top figure; the pulse-width modulated signal in the
bottom figure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.42 Motor terminal voltage due to a three-phase unbalanced sag of type C
with a characteristic magnitude of 50%, for a motor frequency of 50 Hz.
The dc bus voltage is shown as a dashed curve for reference 290
5.43 Motor terminal voltage due to a three-phase unbalanced sag of type D
with a characteristic magnitude of 50%, for a motor frequency of 50 Hz.
The de bus voltage is shown as a dashed curve for reference 291
5.44 Motor terminal voltages due to a three-phase unbalanced sag of type C
with a characteristic magnitude of 50%, for a motor speed of 40 Hz 291
5.45 Positive- (solid) and negative-sequence component (dashed) of the motor
terminal voltages as a function of the motor speed. A saga of type C
with a characteristic magnitude of 500/0 was applied at the supply terminals
of the adjustable-speed drive 291
5.46 Increase in motor slip as a function of the sag magnitude for different sag
duration: 50ms (solid curve), lOOms (dashed), 150ms (dash-dot), and
200ms (dotted) 293
5.47 Voltage-tolerance curves for adjustable-speed drives, for three-phase
balanced sags, for different values of the slip tolerance 294
5.48 Voltage-tolerance curves for sag type C, no capacitance connected to the
de bus, for different values of the slip tolerance 295
5.49 Voltage-tolerance curves for sag type C, small capacitance connected to
the dc bus, for different values of the slip tolerance 295
5.50 Voltage-tolerance curves for sag type C, large (solid line), small (dashed),
and no (dotted) capacitance connected to the de bus 295
5.51 Voltage-tolerance curves for sag type D, for two values of the slip
tolerance, large (solid line), small (dashed), and no (dotted) capacitance
connected to the de bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Appendix D • Figures 519
6.8 Contour chart of the cumulative sag function, based on Table 6.4 333
6.9 Voltage sag coordination chart, reproduced from Fig. 6.8, with
two equipment voltage-tolerance curves 334
6.10 Voltage sag coordination chart, reproduced from Fig. 6.8, with
non-rectangular equipment voltage-tolerance curve 334
6.11 Sag density for the average low-voltage supply in the United States
and Canada. (Data obtained from Dorr [68].) 335
6.12 Voltage sag coordination chart for the average low-voltage supply in the
United States and Canada. (Obtained from the sag density chart in
Fig. 6.11.) 336
6.13 Update of cumulative table for rectangular sag. . 337
6.14 Update of cumulative table for non-rectangular sag 337
6.15 Problems in updating the cumulative table for a very non-rectangular sag.. 338
6.16 Use of the voltage sag coordination chart when three-phase unbalance
needs to be considered 339
6.17 Hypothetical example of the voltage-tolerance curve for magnitude against
phase-angle jump. The sag duration is considered constant. 340
6.18 Hypothetical example of the fraction of sags with a given point-on-wave
value 341
6.19 Hypothetical example of the voltage-tolerance curves for different
point-on-wave of sag initiation 341
6.20 Sag density function for CEA secondary side data, corresponding to
Table 6.6. . 344
6.21 Voltage sag coordination chart for CEA secondary side data,
corresponding to Table 6.6 344
6.22 Sag density of primary side CEA data, corresponding to Table 6.7 345
6.23 Sag density of NPL data, no filter, corresponding to Table 6.8 346
6.24 Sag density of NPL data, 5-minute filter, corresponding to Table 6.9 347
6.25 NPL data: voltage sag coordination chart, 5-minute filter, corresponding
to Table 6.9 347
6.26 EPRI feeder data: sag density function, corresponding to Table 6.10 349
6.27 EPRI feeder data: voltage sag coordination chart, corresponding
to Table 6.10 349
6.28 EPRI substation data: sag density function, corresponding to Table 6.11 350
6.29 EPRI substation data: voltage sag coordination chart, corresponding
to Table 6.11 350
6.30 Sag density for EFI low-voltage networks, corresponding to Table 6.13 353
6.31 Sag density for EFI distribution networks, corresponding to Table 6.14 353
6.32 Sag density for 950/0 percentile of EFI low-voltage networks,
corresponding to Table 6.15 354
6.33 Sag density for 95% percentile of EFI distribution networks,
corresponding to Table 6.16 354
6.34 Variation of voltage sag frequency through the year. (Data obtained
from Dorr [68].) 355
6.35 Part of power system with fault positions. . 361
6.36 Voltage as a function of the distance to the fault. ~ 363
6.37 Approximated voltage as a function of the distance to the fault. 364
6.38 Faults in a radial system 364
6.39 Network meshed across voltage levels, with suggested fault positions 365
6.40 Reliability test system. (Reproduced from Qader [71].) '.' 367
Appendix D • Figures 521
6.41 Voltage sags at different busses due to a fault halfway between bus 2
and bus 4 in Fig. 6.40. (Reproduced from Qader [71].) 368
6.42 Exposed area contours for bus 4. (Reproduced from Qader [71].) 369
6.43 Voltage sag frequency for all busses in the RTS: number of sags
below 80%. (Reproduced from Qader [71].) 371
6.44 Voltage sag frequency (number of sags per year) for all busses in the
reliability test system when the 138kV generators are out of
operation. (Reproduced from Qader [71].) 372
6.45 An 11 kV network used as an example for the method of critical distances.. 374
6.46 Critical distance as a function of the critical voltage for impedance
angle 00 (solid line), -30 0 (dashed line), -60 0 (dash-dot line) 376
6.47 Error made in the simplified expression of critical distance; impedance
angle: -20 0 (solid line), -40 0 (dashed line), and -60 0 (dash-dot line) 377
6.48 Error made by using a first-order approximation for the critical distance;
impedance angle:-20° (solid line), -40 (dashed line), and -60
0 0
7.20 Spot network at subtransmission level: 400 kV (thick lines) and 275kV
(thin lines) system in the North of England. (Data obtained from [177].) ... 414
7.21 Sag magnitude in transmission and subtransmission systems. Solid line:
transmission substation 1, dashed line: transmission substation 2,
dotted line: subtransmission 415
7.22 Sag magnitude versus distance for different generator sizes. The ratio
between transformer and generator impedance used was 0 (solid line), 0.2
(dashed line), 0.4 (dash-dot line), and 0.8 (dotted line) 416
7.23 Critical distance versus magnitude for different generator sizes. The ratio
between transformer and generator impedance used was 0 (solid line),
0.2 (dashed line), 0.4 (dash-dot line), and 0.8 (dotted line) 417
7.24 Reduction in sag frequency due to the installation of an on-site generator.
The ratio between transformer and generator impedance used was 0.2
(dashed line), 0.4 (dash-dot line), and 0.8 (dotted line) 418
7.25 Industrial power system with islanding option 418
7.26 Three-phase voltage-source converter 419
7.27 Series voltage controller 420
7.28 Circuit diagram with power system, series controller, and load 421
7.29 Active power requirement for a series voltage controller, for different
impedance angles (ex = 0, -20°, -40°, -60°) and different lagging power
factors: 1.0 (solid lines), 0.9 (dashed lines), 0.8 (dash-dot lines),
O. 7 (dotted lines) 422
7.30 Phasor diagram for a series voltage controller. Dashed line: with negative
phase-angle jump. Solid line: without phase-angle jump. . 422
7.31 Active power requirement for a series voltage controller, for different
impedance angles (ex=O, -20°, -40°, -60°) and different leading power
factors: t.O (solid lines), 0.9 (dashed lines), 0.8 (dash-dot lines),
0.7 (dotted lines) 423
7.32 Active power requirements for a single-phase series voltage controller, for.
two phases of a type C unbalanced sag, for impedance angle zero (left)
and -30° (right). Power factor 1.0 (solid lines), 0.9 (dashed),
0.8 (dash-dot), 0.7 (dotted) 425
7.33 Active power requirements for a single-phase series voltage controller for
two phases of a type D unbalanced sag, for impedance angle zero
(left) and -30° (right). Power factor 1.0 (solid lines), 0.9 (dashed),
0.8 (dash-dot), 0.7 (dotted) 425
7.34 Active power requirements for a single-phase series voltage controller
as a function of the sag magnitude-for zero impedance angle and four
values of the power factor of the load current. 426
7.35 Active power requirements for a single-phase series voltage controller as
a function of the sag magnitude-for an impedance angle equal to -30°
and four values of the power factor of the load current. 426
7.36 Active power requirements for a single-phase series voltage controller
as a function of the missing voltage-for zero impedance angle and four
values of the power factor of the load current. 427
7.37 Active power requirements for a single-phase series voltage controller
as a function of the missing voltage-for an impedance angle equal to
-30 and four values of the power factor of the load current
0
427
7.38 Part of the complex (voltage) plane protected by a series voltage controller
with the indicated voltage rating 428
Appendix D • Figures 523
7.39 Voltage-tolerance curve without (dashed line) and with (solid line) series
voltage controller. The design point gives the lowest magnitude and the
longest duration which the load-controller combination is able to tolerate. . 428
7.40 Series voltage controller with upstream load during an interruption 429
7.41 Shunt voltage controller 430
7.42 Circuit diagram with power system, series controller, and load. Full circuit
(top), voltages without controller (center), effect of the controller (bottom). 431
7.43 Active power injected by a shunt voltage controller, for different
impedance angles (0, -20° -40°, -60°) and different source impedances:
0.1 pu (solid line), 0.05 pu (dashed line), 0.033 pu (dash-dot line), 0.025 pu
(dotted line). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
7.44 Reactive power injected by a shunt voltage controller, for different
impedance angles (0, -20°, -40°, -60°) and different source impedances:
0.1 pu (solid line), 0.05 pu (dashed line), 0.033 pu (dash-dot line), 0.025 pu
(dotted line). . 432
7.45 Magnitude of the current injected by a shunt voltage controller, for
different impedance angles (0, -20°, -40°, ~600) and different source
impedances: 0.1 pu (solid line), 0.05 pu (dashed line), 0.033 pu
(dash-dot line), 0.025 pu (dotted line). . 433
7.46 Phasor diagram for shunt voltage controller. Solid lines: without
phase-angle jump. Dashed lines: with phase-angle jump. . 433
7.47 Shunt-series-connected voltage controller: the shunt-connected converter
is placed on system side of the series controller 435
7.48 Shunt current for a shunt-series voltage controller, for different impedance
angles (0, -20°, -40°, -60°) and different leading power factors:
1.0 (solid lines), 0.9 (dashed lines), 0.8 (dash-dot lines), 0.7 (dotted lines)... 436
7.49 Shunt-series connected voltage controller: the shunt-connected converter
is placed on load side of the series controller 437
7.50 Shunt current for a single-phase shunt-series voltage controller as a
function of the sag magnitude, for zero impedance angle and four
values of the power factor of the load current. 438
7.51 Shunt current for a single-phase shunt-series voltage controller as a
function of the sag magnitude, for impedance angle -30° and four
values of the power factor of the load current. 438
7.52 Shunt-connected backup power source 439
7.53 Series-connected backup power source 439
7.54 Typical configuration of an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) 440
7.55 Power conversions for a UPS powering a computer, and for an
alternative solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
7.56 UPS combined with backup generation to mitigate voltage sags,
short and long interruptions 442
7.57 Principle of motor-generator set. 443
7.58 Configuration of off-line UPS with diesel engine backup 443
7.59 Power electronic converters in combination with a motor-generator set. 444
7.60 Basic principle of the construction of an electronic tap changer 444
7.61 Basic principle of the construction of a ferroresonant transformer 445
7.62 Voltage versus current diagram for a saturable inductor (solid line)
and for a capacitor (dashed line) 445
7.63 Energy extraction from de storage capacitors 446
524 Appendix D • Figures
3.1 Interruption Frequency (number of events per year) for Three Points in
the U.S. Distribution System. After data obtained from [54] 123
3.2 Interruption Frequency (per year) for Primary and Secondary Systems in
Canada. After data obtained from [69] 124
S2S
526 Appendix E • Tables
4.1 Line and Cable Impedances for 11 kV Feeders Used in Figs. 4.16 and 4.17.
Data obtained from [10] 150
4.2 Upward Propagation of Sags 152
4.3 Source Impedance for the Supply Shown in Fig. 4.21, at a 100MVA Base. 155
4.4 Feeder Data for the Supply Shown in Fig. 4.21 155
4.5 Transformer Connections and Neutral Grounding for the Supply Shown
in Fig. 4.21 155
4.6 Critical Distance Calculation for the Network Shown in Fig. 4.21,
According to (4.14) 155
4.7 Voltage Sags in the System Shown in Fig. 4.41 168
4.8 Further Propagation of Sags 192
4.9 Four Types of Sags in Equation Form 194
4.10 Fault Type, Sag Type, and Load Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.11 Transformation of Sag Type to Lower Voltage Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.12 Sags Due to Two-Phase-to-ground Faults 196
4.13 Origin of Three-Phase Unbalanced Sags " 196
4.14 Transformation of Sag Type to Lower Voltage Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.1 Number of Spurious Trips per Year for Four Design Alternatives 327
6.2 Total Costs per Year for Four Design Alternatives 327
Appendix E • Tables 527
6.3 Example of Sag Density Table: Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained
from [20] 330
6.4 Example of Cumulative Sag Table, Number of Sags per Year. Data.
obtained from Table 6.3 332
6.5 Comparison of Four Design Options for the Power Supply of a Personal
Computer 336
6.6 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for CEA Secondary Side Data: Number
of Sags per Year. Data obtained from Dorr et al. [54] 343
6.7 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for CEA Primary Side Data: Number of
Sags per Year. Data obtained from Dorr et al. [54] 343
6.8 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for NPL Data Without Filter: Number of
Sags per Year. Data obtained from Dorr et al. [54] 346
6.9 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for NPL Data with 5-minute Filter:
Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from Dorr et al. [54] 346
6.10 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for EPRI Feeder Data with 5-minute
Filter: Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from Dorr et al. [54] .... 348
6.11 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for EPRI Substation Data with 5-minute
Filter: Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from Dorr et al. [54] .... 348
6.12 Number of Events with a Duration Less than 20 Cycles: NPL Survey (LV)
and EPRI Survey (Feeder, Substation). Data obtained from Dorr et al.
[54] 351
6.13 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for EFI Data, All Low-Voltage Networks:
Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from Seljeseth [67] 351
6.14 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for EFI Data, All Distribution Networks:
Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from Seljeseth [67] 352
6.15 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for EFI Data, 95% Percentile for
Low-Voltage Networks: Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from
Seljeseth [67] 352
6.16 Cumulative Voltage Sag Table for EFI Data, 95% Percentile for
Distribution Networks: Number of Sags per Year. Data obtained from
Seljeseth [67] 352
6.17 Distribution Over the Sites of the Number of Sags and Interruptions.
Data obtained from [72] 357
6.18 Minimum Monitoring Period Needed to Obtain a Given Accuracy 358
6.19 Fault Positions with Resulting Sag Magnitude and Duration 361
6.20 Fault Positions Sorted for Magnitude and Duration Bins 362
6.21 Table with Event Frequencies for Example of Method of Fault Positions .. 362
6.22 Cumulative Table for Example of Method of Fault Positions 362
6.23 Percentiles of the Sag Frequency Distribution Over the Busses in the
Reliability Test System 370
6.24 Influence of Generator Scheduling on the Sag Frequency in the Reliability
Test System, Number of Sags per Year below 65% 372
6.25 Results of Method of Critical Distances, Three-Phase Faults .. " 375
6.26 Method of Critical Distances-Phase-to-Phase Faults, Type C Sags 379
6.27 Method of Critical Distances-Phase-to-Phase Faults, Type D Sags 380
6.28 Method of Critical Distances-Single-Phase Faults, Solidly Grounded
System 382
6.29 Method of Critical Distances-Single-Phase Faults, Resistance-Grounded
System 384
528 Appendix E • Tables
529
530 Index
EN 50160 (cont'd) F
future developments, 33-34 FACTS, 10,420
interruptions, 48 Fail-to-trip, 83
limitations, 32-33 Failure, definition, 36
measurements, 33 Failure data
scope, 32-33 large surveys, 47
voltage variations, 29-30 suggested values, 47
Energy storage, sag mitigation through, 299, Failure event, 63
446 Failure rate, 64, 65, 66
EPRI survey, 123, 342-343, 348-351 contributions, 56
Equal-area-criterion, 321 time dependencies, 98-100
Equipment Fast Fourier transform, see FFT
emission, see Emission Fast reclosing, short interruption due to,
failure, effect on reliability, 62 329
immunity, see Immunity Fast voltage event, 19
malfunction due to harmonic distortion, Fault clearing, 115
11 Fault level
maltrip, 389 effect on sag magnitude, 151-152
specification, sag mitigation through, 395 typical values in the U.K., 152
testing, 205, 459-460 Fault location, 400
voltage tolerance, see Voltage tolerance Fault positions, method of, 359-373, 387,
ETBF, see Expected time between failures 460
ETTF, see Expected time to failure Fault-clearing time, 118, 168
Event, 453 sag mitigation through reduced, 391-393
compatibility level, 27-29 Fault-current limiters, 391
duration, generalized definition, 237 Ferroresonance, 19
list, 93-95 Ferroresonant transformer, 445
Example supply FFT, 142, 143, 199
11 kV fault, 179-182 Field weakening range, 302
132 kV fault, 178-179 Firing angle, 302, 314, 315
33 kV fault, 183-184, 239 Five-minute filter, 125, 345
400 kV fault, 159-160 Flexible AC transmission systems, see
critical distance, 154-155 FACTS
description, 153-156 Flicker, see Light flicker
phase-angle jump, 206 Flywheels, 448-449
phase-to-phase fault, 183-184, 214-216 Forced braking, 297
sag magnitude, 153-156 Forced outage, 36
Forced unavailability, 51
single-phase fault, 178-179, 179-182,
Fourier transform, see FFT
219-222
Free-firing point, 302
single-phase load, 215-216, 221-222,
Frequency deviation, see Voltage frequency
226-227
variation
three-phase fault, 153-156
Frequency transients, 8
three-phase load, 214-215, 219-221
Fundamental voltage, use for sag
two-phase-to-ground fault, 226-227
characterization, 142-143, 146, 171,
Expected time between failures, 65
200
Expected time to failure, 64, 65
Fuse clearing, cause of voltage event, 19,
Expected time to repair, 64, 65
396
Exponential distribution, 40, 93
Fuse saving, 117-118
use for life time distributions, 67-68
use for repair time distributions, 68
Exposed area, 374 G
Exposed length, 374 Generation, see Embedded generation
in spot network, 411 Generation reliability, 51-53, 59-60
Expulsion fuse, 117, 168, 392, 412 Geomagnetically-induced currents, 13
Index 533
Gold Book, see IEEE Std. 493 IEEE Std. 493, 50, 68, 146, 333, 337, 360,
Goteborg Energi, 33 455
Guaranteed standards of service, 49 IEEE Std. 519,23,26
IEEE Std. 859, 116
IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, 50
H IGBT, 299
Harmonic distortion, 3, 10-12, 23, 25 Imbalance, see Voltage unbalance
books on, 11 Immunity, 2, 6, 24, 25. See also Voltage
burst of, 61 tolerance
compatibility level, 26 level, 25
due to voltage-source converter, 419 sag mitigation through improved, 395,
effect of voltage controller, 435 460
EN 50160, 29 Impedance angle, 204--205
European levels, 29, 30 effect on critical distance, 375-377
example, 11, 12 Impedance-grounded system, voltage sag
mitigation by power electronics, 420 due to fault in, 177-178
monitoring, 357 Impulsive transient, 19
Healthy state, 62 Incorrect protection intervention, see
Heating controllers, source of Protection maltrip
interharmonics, 12
Indirect costs, 102
Hidden failure, 78
Induction generator, effect on short
Monte Carlo model, 94
interruption, 120
Hierarchical levels, 50, 457
Induction machine, effect on load transfer,
industrial systems, 59,457
401
High-frequency conducted disturbances, 61
Induction motor current, 244
High-frequency voltage noise, 14
Induction motor
High-impedance fault, voltage sag due to,
immunity against single-phase tripping,
227-230
128
High-pressure sodium lamps, voltage
immunity against unbalance, 9
tolerance, 322-323
voltage' tolerance, 126, 318-319
HVDC, source of harmonics, 10
Induction motor load
effect on AC drives, 282-285
I effect on short interruption, 120
IEC 61000-1-1, 5 effect on voltage sags, 157, 172, 238, 336
IEC 61000-2-3, 23 effect on voltages during single-phase
IEC 61000-3-2, 25, 454, 455 tripping, 132-133
IEC 61000-3-3, 25 Industrial power system, 115, 158, 164-165,
IEC 61000-3-4, 454 240
IEC 61000-3-5, 25 design, 40 I, 406, 413
IEC 61000-3-6, 25 protection, 392
IEC 61000-3-7, 25 reliability, 58-62, 397,457
IEC 61000-4-1, 25 Industrial site, scatter diagram, 329
IEC 61000-4-11, 255-256 Information Technology Industry Council,
IEC 61800-3, 271 see ITIC
IEEE Industry Applications Society, 47, Initial complex voltage, 207
397 Initial phase-angle jump, 207
IEEE Power Engineering Society, 397 single-phase fault, 216-218
IEEE project group, 1159.2,455 Initial sag magnitude, 207
IEEE SCC22, 4, 5 single-phase fault, 216-218
IEEE Std. 1100, 5 INSPEC, 2
IEEE Std. 1159, 21, 23, 35, 116, 146 Inspection frequency, 391
IEEE Std. 1250, 35, 116 Instantaneous interruption, 116
IEEE Std. 1346, 23, 146, 254, 255, 256, 333, Institute of Electrical Engineers, 397
455 Insulation level, 391
534 Index
543